Home

user manual - Warehouse Sound Systems

1. viaa 8XNY 0 pousse oq you ueo 2443 2 0 pauBisse oq jou ueo 1443 NI LS se owes i wad FEM D zd uojpnpeu 3949W 13437 V ETA uaisvi sna tig 616 80 uod EU JPN pn T uoyonpey 193410 MES T His a Bsvua eeo 2098 99 000 Am AG aNva phe 2 1 ualsv sna EU 0103 8 x T 0 i jv iaa lnooaH av e 20101 1 Wad HSVHd inooaty sejusues 2 avea foun EH rubia Um Ka janvier 27 seen ononi 3 Se eure TM d 1 2 8 HinoooH aw uep _ 4 ao wms BAL i i uvi OIA EES GNvar gt i NO dies 425 s ad zw i TTT pm EN ee aioe I NVSr pevua 2 8L9SYEZL d 87997621 n TWNOIS 18 sna VH VH NIVO WH NIVO VH 20691 6 rig 8 1 9 4 5 010281 anan Ivo 4 212 L 6L ZL 1 apoz avd lt 4 19 6 LN NI
2. SLATE TALKBACK O2R User s Guide Monitor controls 23 24 25 26 27 STUDIO buttons These buttons select the monitor signal sent to the STUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT connectors CONTROL ROOM buttons These buttons select the monitor signal sent to the C R MONITOR OUT connectors TALKBACK buttons These buttons allow the control room to talk to the studio and to SLATE control room information to the output buses SOLO button This button activates the SOLO bus Use the ON buttons to select a channel to monitor C R LEVEL This control sets the level of the C R MONITOR OUT connectors Controls and Connections 9 Faders 28 T E O ECC n 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 STEREO 52 28 Tape and Effect return controls 29 30 These continuously rotary controls set the level of the tape and effect returns The current le
3. 9 MOVYL 9L St ve Eb Zt OF 6 8 2 9 S v L Ol NYNLAY ISNI OF ANIS XE AGE E AE E E E E Nivo 9 6 v ve ez zz te OG 6L 8L ZL 16 X XD S S TS AR DAE SUE X i wwe no ao 897 wo No 80 NO NO NO 0 NO No 9 NO 30 NOHO NOD o 9 POZ ev ee ee lee lee 9L SL bh EL ZL HF OF 6 8 2 9 S XINOLNV 3N32S LOArOud YAMAHA YAMAHA CORPORATION Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division 01 02 2000 AP Printed Japan P O Box 3 Hamamatsu 430 8651 Japan
4. 4 ge L apoz o 4 liis f 81ndNI Tong Ww ava So ee vinaN neve NO User Interface 17 User Interface In this chapter About the User 18 DISPLAY ACCESS Buttons 18 Displayed t aee bp ME SA eed 20 CURSOR Buttons b ELE ahs sais pak ea 21 Encoder Wheel eee odes e P 21 ENTER Button eere tse eee Pres e he dete as 21 SCENE MEMORY 21 Display Functions 22 SELECTED CHANNEL Controls 23 026 User s Guide 18 User Interface About the User Interface The 02R user interface is powerful but very intuitive There are two main methods of working with the 02R e Use the DISPLAY ACCESS controls to modify one parameter at a time across the entire recording console e Use the SELECTED CHANNEL controls to modify all of the parameters of the currently selected channel You will find these controls similar to the setup of an analog mixer Use whichever method is most convenient to you You will probably find you use a combination of both methods dependent on what you are trying to do with the 02R The DISPLAY ACCESS controls consist of a block of twelve function buttons div
5. lese UA D O2R User s Guide Automix 143 Automix Function The Automix function consists of six pages 1 7 Automix Main The Automix Main page controls the record and playback operations Select the timecode frame rate and the timecode input Set the initial start time and enable the editing operations 2 7 Memory Management The Memory Management page is used to name the AUTOMIX and perform store and recall operations You can also control the record and playback operations from this page 3 7 Fader Edit The Fader Edit page is used to edit the fader positions and set motor parameters You can also control the record and playback operations from this page 4 7 Event Copy The Event Copy page allows you to copy move extract and trim the level of automix events 5 7 Event Edit Scene Lib The Event Edit Scene Lib page allows you to duplicate and delete mix scene and library recall events and insert new events Timecode addresses can be captured on the fly and new events inserted at the captured points 6 7 Event Edit CH ON PAN FADER The Event Edit CH ON PAN FADER page allows you edit channel on off pan and fader events and duplicate delete and insert new events Timecode addresses can be captured on the fly and new events inserted at the captured points 7 7 Time Signature The Time Signature page allows you to enter time
6. Recorder 026 User s Guide 66 Surround Pan 3 1 Surround Mode Four channel surround sound consisting of left L center C right R and surround S channels Ideal for Dolby Surround authoring Bus Out 1 1 Bus Out 2 Recorder 3 2 1 Surround Mode Six channel surround sound consisting of front left FL front center FC front right FR rear left RL rear right RR and subwoofer SW channels Ideal for Dolby AC 3 Surround authoring Amps UL mi Bus Out 1 Bus Out 2 Bus Out 3 Bus Out 4 Recorder O2R User s Guide Surround Pan 67 1 Use the ROUTING button to locate the ROUTING 3 4 page ROUTING 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the MIC LINE or TAPE icon and press the ENTER button 3 Use the SEL buttons to select a channel 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the left right or front rear parameter 5 Use the encoder wheel to position the sound Panning Sounds Freely
7. 02 Getting Started Guide 16 Getting Started POWER 2 02R Getting Started Guide Power ON OFF This section explains how to power the 02R on and off Power ON It is always important to observe the correct order for powering up equipment in a studio Always start with the multitrack and mastering recorders and the signal processors then the 02R and finally the monitoring amplifiers and other downstream gear 1 Turn ON the power to the 02R by pressing the POWER switch on the rear panel 02R start up screen appears for a few seconds the faders return to their previous positions then the page that was used when the 02R was last powered off appears Power OFF It is always important to observe the correct order for powering off equipment in a studio Always start with the monitoring amplifiers and other downstream gear then the 02R and finally the multitrack and mastering recorders and the signal processors 1 Turn OFF the power to the 02R by pressing the POWER switch on the rear panel All mix settings mix scenes and other data are stored when the 02R is powered off Setting the Synchronization Before you use the 02R with a modular digital multitrack recorder or DAT master recorder be sure to correctly set the synchronization The 02R must be slaved to an external wordclock in order to process the input digital signals without drop out or distortio
8. 87 02 Getting Started Guide Introduction to the O2R 1 Introduction to the 02 In this chapter e ML 2 User Guides ode erepto a a ated tte 3 Installati n e ot ted iet ds 3 and Rear 8 4 Features d eo E ER wil EE RES 5 Key 2240155 degree ute Cg dee ue E e Ro pies 7 02R Getting Started Guide 2 Introduction to the O2R 02 Getting Started Guide 02R From the company that pioneered digital mixing consoles and leads the industry with its acclaimed DSP technology comes the 02R Digital mixing Console the most advanced digital mixing console in the world All of Yamaha s experience and innovation has been applied to the 02R to create a perfect mixer for use with the current generation of modular digital multitrack tape and disk recorders Inputs and Outputs I O Cards and Digital Cascade With the 02R you can record and mix directly to your modular digital multitrack recorder without ever leaving the sonic purity of the digital domain It is a 40 input channel mixer each with full dynamic processing and 4 band parametric EQ plus two stereo internal effects returns It comes with 24 analog inputs featuring 20 bit 64 times oversampling analog to digital conversion By adding one of
9. Parameter Seiting Range Description Freq 0 6Hz 0 1 40 0 2 Modulation frequency AM Depth 49 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM Depth 35 0 100 Pitch modulation depth LSF F 220Hz 32Hz 1 0kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSF G 3dB 12 to 12dB Low shelving filter gain Mod Dly 12 1ms 0 0 255 0 5 Chorus delay The delay time before modulation starts EQF 560Hz 160 2 8 2 Equalizer frequency EQG 1dB 12 to 12dB Equalizer signal gain HSF F 4 0kHz 1 0 10 0kHz High shelving filter frequency HSF G 1 12 to 12dB High shelving filter gain Program 32 CHORUS2 This is a variation on program 31 The modulation is much thicker and shimmering Parameter Setting Freq 0 6Hz AM Depth 49 PM Depth 35 LSF F 220Hz LSFG Mod Dly 12 1ms EQF 560Hz EQG HSF 4 0kHz HSF G Same as program 31 Program 33 BROAD CHORUS This is a variation on program 31 with more spread and spaciousness Parameter Setting Freq 0 5Hz AM Depth 64 PM Depth 90 LSF F 180Hz LSFG 2dB Mod Dly 38 0ms EQF 560Hz EQG HSF 3 2kHz HSF G 2dB Range Same as program 31 Description Same as program 31 Description Same as program 31 O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 123 Program 34 FLANGE Stereo flanger Creates a rich swirling effect full of harmonics
10. O2R User s Guide Control Change Parameter Appendix MIDI 257 User Map MIC 6 MIC 7 MIC 8 MIC 9 MIC 10 MIC 11 MIC 12 MIC 13 MIC 14 MIC 15 MIC 16 LINE 17 18 LINE 19 20 LINE 21 22 LINE 23 24 EFF 1 EFF 2 ST MASTER MIC 1 MIC 2 MIC 3 MIC 4 MIC 5 MIC 6 02R User s Guide 258 Appendix MIDI Control Parameter Change User Map EFF 1 Lch EFF 1 Rch EFF 2 Lch EFF 2 Rch ST MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN 7 SEND 7 SEN X 7 SEN X 7 SEN N N X 7 SE X 7 SE X 7 SEN X 7 SEN X 7 SEN X 7 SEN X 7 SEN X 7 SEN N N N X 7 SE X 7 SE X 7 SE X 7 SEN NO ASSIGN 1 NO ASSIGN OF UO lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SO COP NN OD GM BR WwW N O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 259 Parameter to Control Change Table 03D amp Programmable Mixer 01 Maps Control Change NO ASSIGN Parameter Programmable Mixer 01 Map NEL NE NE NE NE NE NE MIC 8 MIC 9
11. 14 Basic eir pres eee webu eee ne waa Dae 15 Power ON OEBE dedo gt EE ERRARE ee E ets 16 Setting the 16 3 Introductory Recording Tutorial 19 Setting the Input 20 Applying EQ ace prs tae atten Dee pete e dae 24 Using the EQ 30 RAMMING ecard bad es Dip glade e T eee ues 38 4 Secondary Recording Tutoridl 41 Aux set dude REM eis 42 Setting the Aux Send 43 Creating a Monitor 45 Applying s ess 46 Recalling and Editing 49 Patching in a Dynamics 54 Using the Dynamics 57 Scene 62 02 Getting Started Guide il Contents Mixing and 67 What is 02R Automix 68 Real time 69 Editing Automix 76 Off line Automix 81 Using the Automix
12. STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE 00011001 1A fader remote type number DATA Oddddddd dd 32 surround x y Oxxxxxxx XX 0 127 Oyyyyyyy YY 0 127 edit grab ch EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive multiple O2Rs link STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE 00011011 1B multiple link type number DATA Ommfffff mf data format mm status 0 event command 4 setup memory change fffff contents if mm 0 switch fffff case 0x00 scene memory recall case 0x01 scene memory store with title case 0x10 automix memory recall case 0x11 automix memory store with title case 0x14 automix new case 0x15 automix undo case 0x18 automix transport AUTO RECORD case 0x19 automix transport RECORD case Ox1A automix transport PLAY case Ox1B automix transport STOP 0268 User s Guide Appendix MIDI 271 multiple O2Rs link case 0x1C automix transport ABORT else if mm 4 switch fffff case 0x00 setup memory change byte case
13. DATA NAME 01001001 49 T Ommmmmmm mm mm 0 63 Channel Library No 1 64 DATA Oddddddd dsH Channel Library Extended Memory 14 2 byte Oddddddd dsL Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Channel Library Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 n 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01001000 48 H Ommmmmmm mm 0 63 Library No 1 64 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Automix Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump GRLO 2078 1024x2 20 10 bytes O2R User s Guide 286 Appendix MIDI Automix Bulk Dump Format 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 rA DATA NAME 01000001 41 0000mmmm Om m 0 15 Automix 1 16 block co
14. 181 Grouping 182 Grouping Mutes 183 Pairing 184 MS 2 222 2 22222 2 4 186 Digital Setup and Utilities 187 Word Clock Select ic ey te wih dee ge dda hes 188 Input Signal Select 190 Cascade Configuration 0 6 6 cece eee eee 191 Dith t n eet s serere recie cette ded 193 Slot Output Select ccf ceu es ves me eec e Eus 194 SOLO ascent pte UTE REA P PICS deer 196 Preferences i see e de s Eee ade de dta 198 Aux Output Select esses edes 203 24 bit Recording 204 Input Patching iss eaten eters sana dented de ee 206 Oscillator 209 Emphasis 210 Channel Status 211 Battery Check as UI RICO eU eA 213 Communication 214 02R System 2 215 Installing Options 217 OR OPHONS cu ig ation er ance x deeds 218 Installing 02R Options 221 Analog I O Card AD DA 8 224 Analog I O Card A D 8 5 224 Dig
15. 2 E280 EHHBHEHEEEHBEEEEHBEEE BESS 2 2 5 2 5 2 2 0 02 2 5 0 0 0 EASE DORE BEEF VWOOOOOOOOOOOOOG Q 224 55 01011121314 15 15 E1 02R User s Guide 40 MIXING Display Functions wa oS e a gt O2R User s Guide The second page shown below contains the Routing controls for TAPE channels 1 to 16 and effects returns EFF 1 and EFF 2 and appears when one of these channels is selected Ce BSED EE C Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca C3 Ca Ca umn G tt GS GS G3 GS G G3 G0 C C G2 C 5 IGI GI GI 5 5 6 6 5 5 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 EEHHEHEEEHEHEEEHEEE z Sra s e 218 e noy uz nsqne EE ROUTING buttons You can also set the routing for the selected channel with the ROUTING buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL group A route is selected ON when its icon is highlighted on the display The routing buttons allow you to directly select the destination for the selected channel The LED in each the button illuminates to indicate the status of the channel Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust any of the buttons in this group the display switches to the ROUTING display function See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 41 Metering Use the METER button to The 02R features comprehensive signal level metering The mono and select the METER pages stereo input channels the tape
16. 02R Controls 03D Digital Mixing Console Faders MIC 1 16 Channel levels 1 16 17 18 Stereo input level STEREO Stereo output level Rotary encoders TAPE 1 16 Input channel pans 1 16 EFF1 amp EFF2 Effects returns levels 1 amp 2 ON buttons MIC 1 16 Channel on off 1 16 EFF1 amp EFF2 Effects returns on off 1 amp 2 17 8 Stereo input on off STEREO Stereo output on off Display functions Mix scene recall 03D Setup On the MIDI Setup page of the 03D set the various MIDI parameters as shown below Set the MIDI Receive and Transmit Channels to match those of the 02R PROGRAM CHANGE CONTROL CHANGE PARAMETER CHANGE CHANNEL BULK FADER START NOTE ON REALTIME MSG amp MTC OTHER COMMANDS DEVICE No i 026 User s Guide 174 MIDI O2R User s Guide There are two pages for 03D remote control Pages can be selected using the page icon at the right hand side of each page or by operating a control on that page For example operating fader 16 displays the first page while operating fader 17 18 displays the second page MIDI 5 5 MIC2 S CIID LIBLIBLIBLIBLIBL LIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIE LEVEL When the 02R or 03D is first connected or turned on use the CONNECT function to update the 02R controls so that they match those of the 03D When the CONNECT function is used the settings from the 03D are copied
17. please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to coaxial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA 90620 This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig THE UNITED KINGDOM handtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri Connecting the Plug and Cord af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED batteri tilbage til leverandoren IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with VARNING the following code Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anvand GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som BLUE NEUTRAL rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren BROWN LIVE Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens
18. 10000000000 1000000000 STEREO 4 I INPUTA INPUT A PUTA INPUTA er 088 OL 20 18 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 58 hbe 7 5 lom 4 oam 3 2 lose 3 5 m 9 a 5 ae EE 2 FON orr A A AE a QUT WORD CLOCK 2TR IN DIGITAL NE hime _cooe eur Jani DIO 02 Getting Started Guide Introduction to the O2R 5 Features Sonic Specifications Linear 20 bit 64 times oversampling A D convertors Linear 20 bit 8 times oversampling D A convertors 105 dB dynamic range typical 32 bit precision internal processing with a dynamic range of over 190 dB using Yamaha s 32 bit proprietary audio DSP General Features 40 input chan
19. Can t assign 2TR D2 2TR D2 cannot be routed to line 19 20 The signal at 2TR D2 is not syncing with the 02R or 2TR D2 has been selected in the mon itor section Can t select SLOT3 SLOT3 cannot be selected for digital input The I O card is not in SLOT3 Can t select SLOT4 SLOTA cannot be selected for digital input The I O card is not in SLOTA Can t select WORD CLOCK Not available as a word clock source Cannot Copy Title You cannot copy the title from the memory that has no data Cannot Paste Title You cannot paste the title to the memory that has no data Check Sum Error Check sum of the received bulk data is not correct Code Mismatch Product code for the received bulk data is not correct DIGITAL I O Error Incoming signal from SLOT DIO is not syncing with the 02R The synchronization system has not been configured successfully Or if the sync system has been configured this message may still appear if the clock sent from the MTR is unstable until the digital MTR enters CHASE status You can select whether this message will be shown or not see Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide Duplicate Grouping You cannot duplicate the group 02 User s Guide 252 Specifications Error Message Fixed Fragmentation Corrective Action The automix memory has been corrected Abnormal data may be generated in the memory if you tur
20. Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 Program 6 REVERB PLATE This simulates an old steel plate reverb and is effective on vocals or musical instruments especially percussion Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 026 User s Guide 114 Internal Effects Program 7 REV AMBIENCE This creates space a smaller space than created by the REVERB ROOM programs around instruments A small amount of these effects is effective on vocal and chorus as well as percussion instruments Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 Program 8 REV AMBIENCE2 This is a variation on program 7 Parameter Seiting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 Program 9 REV LIVE ROOMI This simulates reverberation in much larger rooms Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 115 Program 10
21. Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 1 2Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Modulation frequency Depth 2596 0 100 Modulation depth FB Gain 45 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect LSFF 63Hz 32Hz 1 0kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSF G 0dB 12 to 12dB Low shelving filter gain Mod Dly 14 6ms 0 0 255 0 5 Flange delay The delay time before modulation starts EQF 630Hz 160 2 8 2 Equalizer frequency EQG 2dB 12 to 12dB Equalizer signal gain HSF F 3 2kHz 1 0 10 0kHz High shelving filter frequency HSF G 0dB 12 to 12dB High shelving filter gain Program 35 SYMPHONIC This program creates a rich and grand chorus effect bigger than chorus alone Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 0 6Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Modulation frequency Depth 896 0 100926 Modulation depth Mod Dly 2 4ms 0 0 255 0ms Modulation delay The delay time before modulation starts LSFF 63Hz 32Hz 1 0kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSF G OdB 12 to 12dB Low shelving filter gain EQF 500Hz 160 2 8 2 Equalizer frequency EQG 12 to 12dB Equalizer signal gain HSF F 6 3kHz 1 0 10 0kHz High shelving filter frequency HSF G 2dB 12 to 12dB High shelving filter gain Program 36 TREMOLO A stereo tremolo just like on a classic guitar amplifier It creates a fat sound that is great with guitars Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 3 1Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Modula
22. MIC 9 MIC 10 MIC 1 MIC 11 MIC 1 MIC 12 MIC 1 MIC 13 MIC 1 MIC 14 MIC 1 MIC 15 MIC 1 MIC 16 MIC 16 LINE 17 18 J 3 3 9 9 D D LINE 17 18 EFF 1 EFF 2 19 20 AUX 7 AUX 8 NE 21 22 ST MASTER MIC 1 NE 23 24 MIC 2 MIC 3 MIC 4 MIC 5 MIC 6 MIC 7 MIC 8 MIC 9 ASSIGN MIC 10 BUS 1 BUS2 BUS 3 BUS 4 ST MASTER 026 User s Guide 260 Appendix MIDI Control Parameter Change Programmable Mixer 01 Map CHANNEL LINE 17 18 CHANNEL EFF 1 CHANNEL EFF 2 NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN ST MASTER MIC 1 MIC 2 EL MIC 15 EL CHA MIC 16 EL CHA LINE 17 EL CHA LINE 18 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL EFF 1 Lch NO ASSIGN CHANNEL EFF 1 Rch CHANNEL CHANNEL EFF 2Lch CHANNEL CHANNEL EFF 2 Rch CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL ST MASTER CHANNEL X 7 SEN MIC 1 CHANNEL X 7 SEN MIC 2 77777 7 7 IX O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 261 Control Parameter Change Programmable Mixer 01 Map LINE 17 18 AUX 7 SEN IC 13 AUX 7 SEN IC 14 AUX 7 SEN IC 15 AUX 7 SEN IC 16 AUX 7 SEN
23. Note You can customize your 02K to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the CLEAR operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the CLEAR operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the CLEAR operation will be automatically cancelled To clear the EQ program use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is cleared If you change your mind the cleared EQ program can be retrieved by recalling the Undo EQ program U COPY This icon is used to copy the name of a library program Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The program name is copied into an edit buffer PASTE This icon is used to paste a program name previously selected with the COPY operation into the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The program name is pasted from the edit buffer into the TITLE EDIT box for subsequent editing MIXING Display Functions 57 INS This icon is used to insert blank characters into the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button DEL This icon is used to delete characters from the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSO
24. EFFECT TYPE 39 5 CHANGE NO DATA 4 3 V0CAL DOUBLER TITLE EDIT linEnoLo 999099999900990900 if i2 13 14 15 16 02 Getting Started Guide 52 Secondary Recording Tutorial 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the TITLE EDIT box as shown below SS PHRSING EFFECT TVPE 39 5 CHANGE NO DATA 4 V0CAL DOUBLER TITLE EDIT I S 8 amp 76Onmt 3 Select the individual character positions with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select the characters You can create a name of up to 16 characters long It can contain any of the following characters PY 1 S 29 amp TC de 0111213145 6 8 9 A HH I J K L M 5 VIW X Y 2 1 m ylzi ti ll1l SS PHRSING EFFECT TYPE 393ST PITCH CHANGE NO DATA 46 VOCAL DOUBLER TITLE EDIT First Effecfl 02R Getting Started Guide Secondary Recording Tutorial 53 You can select the INS icon to insert a space blank at the cursor position in the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The DEL icon is used to delete the character at the cursor position Note The COPY and PASTE icons allow
25. 177Hz 354Hz 4 00kHz 4 23kHz G 0 0dB 5 5dB 0 0dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 8 2 0 7 7 F 88Hz 841Hz 2 11kHz 4 49kHz G 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 187Hz 1 00kHz 2 00kHz 6 72kHz 0 5dB 0 0dB 2 0dB 3 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 0 11 10 5 6 167Hz 236Hz 2 67kHz 6 72kHz G 2 0dB 5 0dB 2 5dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 118Hz 397Hz 2 67kHz 5 99kHz G 1 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 0 16 0 2 111Hz 334Hz 2 00kHz 6 72kHz G 7 0dB 1 5dB 1 5 2 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2 8 2 0 7 7 F 88Hz 841Hz 2 11kHz 4 49kHz G 2 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0dB Description Emphasizes the bright tones of an acoustic guitar This is a variation on program 20 You can also use it for the electric gut guitar Corrects arpeggio technique of an acoustic guitar This is a variation on program 22 Use with trumpets trombones or sax With one instrument adjust the HIGH or H MID frequency Use as atemplate for male vocal Adjust the HIGH or H MID setting according to the voice quality This is a variation on program 25 Use as a template for female vocal Adjust the HIGH or H MID setting according to the voice quality This is a variation on program 27 Use as a template for
26. The CD8 AD is used to connect an analog multitrack recorder or other analog devices to the 02R Installing the CD8 AD The CD8 AD is a double slot card For installation instructions see Double Slot Cards on page 222 of the User s Guide Before you install the CD8 AD you need to set the individual input and output level switches Set the switches to 10 dBv or 4 dB as appropriate Refer to the instructions included with the CD8 AD for more information Setup of the CD8 AD 1 Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page If the card was installed properly the 02R will identify it in the appropriate slot 2 Make the required connections between the 02R and your analog devices You should use the highest quality connecting cables you can afford to maintain the best possible signal quality Analog Card A D CD8 AD S The CD8 AD S card offers eight analog phone jack inputs Installing the CD8 AD S The CD8 AD S is a single slot card For installation instructions see Single Slot Cards on page 221 of the User s Guide Before you install the CD8 AD S you need to set the input and output level switches Set the switches to 10 dBv or 4 dB as appropriate Refer to the instructions included with the CD8 AD S for more information Setup of the CD8 AD S 1 Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page If the card was installed properly the 02R will identify it in the a
27. There are two different ways to access the auxiliary send channels DISPLAY ACCESS AUX buttons AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX3 AUX 4 e AUX 1 to AUX 6 buttons access the AUX 1 to 6 pages which RUG AUS AUC display the aux send level controls and pre post icons AU e The AUX 7 and AUX 8 buttons access the AUX 7 and 8 pages which are used with the internal effects processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 When an AUX button is pressed the faders and rotary encoders control aux send levels not channel levels SELECTED CHANNEL AUX controls These buttons and controls set the aux send levels for the selected channel e The AUX 1 to AUX 8 buttons allow you to select the aux buses you want to send the selected channel signal to gt a The SEND LEVEL rotary encoder is used to set the level indicated by the adjacent LED bargraph e The ON button is used to turn the send on or off o m z o Lr m 02 Getting Started Guide AUX 1 FADER STATUS INPUT V aux 1234 5678 Secondary Recording Tutorial 43 Setting the Aux Send Level In this tutorial MIC LINE 1 channel is sent to AUX 1 1 Press the AUX 1 button The AUX 1 1 1 page shown below appears 8 8 BE 1 SEs 1 im EE 1 AEs 1 Hs CB Cell 8 8 8 8 8 8 O H B 9 5 fel The faders change from channel level controls to aux send level controls To indicate
28. gt These buttons and controls set the auxiliary send levels for the currently selected channel gt The AUX 1 to AUX 8 buttons allow you to select the auxiliary buses you want to send the selected channel signal to gt e The SEND LEVEL rotary encoder is used to set the level indicated by the adjacent LED bargraph The ON button is used to turn the send on or off It allows you to make easy A B comparisons Ld O2R User s Guide Preset Effects Programs These are the preset effects programs No Program Name REVERB HALL1 Internal Effects 105 Program Name REVERSE GATE REVERB HALL2 DELAY gt EARLY REF REVERB ROOM1 DELAY L C R 1 REVERB ROOM2 DELAY L C R 2 REVERB STAGE CHORUS gt DLY LCR REVERB PLATE MONODLY gt CHORUS REV AMBIENCE1 STEREO INI DLY ECHO COLIN om A oO REV AMBIENCE2 ECHO 9 REV LIVE ROOM1 CROSS ECHO 10 REV LIVE ROOM2 CROSS DELAY 11 REVERB VOCAL1 CHORUS1 12 REVERB VOCAL2 CHORUS2 13 REV SN ROOM BROAD CHORUS 14 REV SN PLATE FLANGE 15 CHORUS gt REVERB SYMPHONIC 16 FLANGE gt REVERB1 TREMOLO 17 FLANGE gt REVERB2 AUTO PAN 18 EARLY REF 1 PHASING 19 EARLY REF 2 ST PITCH CHANGE 20 GATE REVERB VOCAL DOUBLER 026 User s Guide 106
29. 16 jack 6000 lines 3 6 dB 4dB 24dB 388mV 1 23V 12 3V a 50dB 40dB 20dB CH INPUT Ka Adames 2 45mV 7 75 77 5mV Phone Jack LINE 17 through 24 E 6dB 4 4 dB 424dB TRS 3 388mV 1 23V 12 3V INSERT IN MIC LINE 1 10dB 0dB 20dB Phone through 8 sn 6009 lines 5 5mv 775mV 7 75V Jack 4 dB 4dB 24dB Phone TEE 199 6002 lines 12 3 Jack 10dBV 10dBV 10 dBV RCA phono 6000 316mV 3 16V 1 Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of 4 dB 1 23V or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain All faders and level controls are maximum position 2 XLR type connectors are balanced 12 GND 2 HOT 3 COLD 3 MIC LINE INPUT and LINE INPUT phone jacks are balanced Ring COLD Sleeve GND 4 INSERT INPUT phone jacks are unbalanced Tip OUT Ring IN Sleeve GND 5 2 TRACK INPUT phone jacks are balanced 6 2 TRACK INPUT RCA phone jacks are unbalanced In these specifications when dB represents are specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 volts RMS In these specifications when dBV represents are specific voltage 0 dBV is referenced to 1 volts RMS O2R User s Guide Specifications 247 Output Specifications Actual For use Output level Output connection source with Max be Mixer con
30. Appendix MIDI 269 bus send level control receive only STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE 00011001 1A fader remote type number DATA Oddddddd 33 bus send level CH 0 15 mic 16 31 tape 32 35 line 36 37 eff 00hhhhhh L1 bus1 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus1 O0mmmmll L3 bus1 00111111 L4 bus1 00hhhhhh L1 bus2 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus2 OO0mmmmll L3 2 00hhhhhh L1 bus3 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus3 O0mmmmll L3 bus3 00111111 L4 bus3 00hhhhhh L1 bus4 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus4 O0mmmmll L3 bus4 00111111 L4 bus4 00hhhhhh L1 bus5 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus5 O0mmmmll L3 bus5 BA 5 00hhhhhh L1 bus6 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus6 O0mmmmll L3 bus6 00111111 L4 bus6 00hhhhhh L1 bus7 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus7 O0mmmmll L3 bus7 00111111 L4 bus7 00hhhhhh L1 bus8 24bit coefficient OOhhmmmm L2 bus8 O0mmmmll L3 bus8 O2R User s Guide 270 Appendix MIDI bus send level control receive only 00111111 L4 bus8 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive surround x y receive only
31. INPUT 17 INPUT INPUT 18 16 INPUT A INPUT A INPUT A INPUT A INPUT A INPUT A INPUT A INPUT A me eur Omeur INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INSERT NSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT INSERT INSER vo 1 0 10 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 i 8 We 7 ld 6 l 5 l4 82 l1 O2R User s Guide 48V ON OFF In addition the first eight channels not only have selectable input connectors XLR type or phone but they also have an insert connector allowing you to patch external signal processors before the input signal is converted to digital For monitoring the output of a stereo tape recorder or another similar analog device the 02R also has two pairs of 2TR IN phone connectors Phantom Power Phantom power provides a 48 V DC power source for condenser type microphones It is applied to the XLR type connectors INPUT A for input channels 1 through 8 The phantom power switch for each channel is used to turn it ON and OFF Phantom power is applied to each individual input Phantom power can only be applied to the XLR type connectors INPUT A for input channels 1 through 8 Select those connectors with the A B switch up for A down for B With phantom power set to ON non phantom powered microphones dynamic microphones and balanced line level sources can still be
32. PHONES LEVEL Control PHONES LEVEL This control is used to adjust the volume of a set of stereo headphones plugged into the connector just above the control O2R User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 31 MIXING Display Functions In this chapter Phase and 32 D l y edades eae Pad uer 34 Panand Balance iodo ertt eus 36 Pan Gane eea a alas Ee eae are Ratha Base 37 Stereo Wid th Soay Gols o 37 PAN caste eate etus eget aeterni 38 Routing adt ttd dott d e tM 39 ROUTING buttorns sac lin kek ret ade aaa ut 40 Metertng eM ak TRE ER eee EHE 41 VEW pa rp en eia DAUERN 44 Channel e toes 48 EQ E 51 us ALMAE ICD ds 53 Programs dee Re Praed 54 EOQ Library ihe ean adeste eM eh M Mo fo Mae 55 Preset EQ Program 58 02R User s Guide MIXING Display Functions Press the 2 button ATT page appears Select a channel using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons To change the phase press the ENTER button The NOR icon changes to REV and is
33. REV LIVE ROOM2 This is a variation on program 9 Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 Program 11 REVERB VOCALI This is useful for vocal and chorus Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 Program 12 REVERB VOCAL2 This has longer reverberation than program 11 This could be suitable for ballads Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 026 User s Guide 116 Internal Effects Program 13 REV SN ROOM This is a reverb variation to enhance the sound of a snare drum Parameter Setting Rev Time 1 35 Hi Ratio 0 9 Diff 8 Ini Dly 26 0ms Density 1 LPF 10 0KHz HPF 180Hz Rev Dly 4 0ms Rev Bal 90 Range Same as program 1 Program 14 REV SN PLATE This is also for snare drums similar to program 13 Parameter Setting Rev Time 1 7s Hi Ratio 0 9 Diff 2 Ini Dly 20 0ms Density 1 LPF 11 0KHz HPF 140Hz Rev Dly 6 0ms Rev Bal 90 Range Same as program 1 Program 15 CHORUS gt REVERB Stereo chorus followed by reve
34. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE BULK DUMP FOH 43H 0nH MIDI OUT BULK REQUEST FOH 43H 2nH PGM ECHO ON MIDI IN PROGRAM CHANGE CnH ACTIVE SENSE FEH 026 User s Guide 264 Appendix MIDI 5 Receive Condition PGM OMNI ON PGM R x ON CnH PROGRAM CHANGE PARAM R x ON SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE O __ F0H 43H 1nH PARAMETER CHANGE MIDI IN F0H 43H 3nH O77 PARAMETER REQUEST SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE FOH 43H 0nH BULK DUMP FOH 43H 2nH BULK REQUEST PGM ECHO ON CnH MIDI OUTPROGRAM CHANGE MTC IN F1H H MIDI QUARTER FRAME MESSAGE O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 265 Parameter Change and Request Format PARAMETER CHANGE basic format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE Ottttttt tt type number bit6 0 byte 1 bit operation Oddddddd data 0 n DATA Oddddddd EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive PARAMETER CHANGE REQUEST STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE Ottttttt tt type number bit6 0 byte Oddddddd address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address DATA Oddddddd ddl addr
35. The bottom of the page shows the controls for adjusting the parameters for the currently selected channel These control parameters change depending on the selected effects Use the cursor buttons to select the desired icon and adjust its value with the encoder wheel Note Only one effects program can run on an effects processor This means that all the channel auxiliary sends that are set to for example AUX 7 will be processed by the program that is currently running on Effect Processor 1 The current effect program can be stored in scene memory O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 109 1 Use the AUX 7 button to locate the AUX 7 3 3 page Recalling Effects Programs 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon and select an effects program with the encoder wheel 2 Press the ENTER button The effects program is recalled Storing Effects Programs 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STORE icon and select an effects program with the encoder wheel 2 Use the CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel to name the program 3 Press the ENTER button The 02R pops up a confirmation request 4 Select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button The effects program is stored Effects Library The Effects Library is used to access and store effects programs There are 40 preset effects programs 1 through 40 and 88 user effects programs 41 through 128 plus an UNDO buffer for you
36. There is also an indicator inside the Fs box that shows the current wordclock frequency or status Wordclock indicators No wordclock input Wordclock input However the input wordclock frequency is different from that of the selected wordclock E W CLK Wordclock input No discrepancy between the input and IN selected wordclock frequencies W CLK Wordclock input is selected The 02R is synchronized to the input wordclock frequency The wordclock input is selected but the wordclock signal is inappropriate E A 026 User s Guide Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 2 5 page DIGITAL 1 0 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired icons Change the setting by pressing the ENTER button Note If there is no digital I O card or signal present when you select a digital input the default analog selection will not be changed O2R User s Guide 190 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Input Signal Select The 02R has 24 built in analog input connectors the individual input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 and the stereo input channels LINE 17 18 through 23 24 You can route two of the 2 track digital inputs to the stereo input channels 2TR IN D1 to LINE 17 18 and 2TR IN D2 to LINE 19 20 You can also convert the individual input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 to tape return channels allowing you to perform 32 track mixdowns with the 02R Shown below is the DIGIT
37. This section explains how to position sounds using the ROUTING 3 4 page Sounds can also be moved along preset circle ellipse semicircle or diagonal trajectories on the ROUTING 4 4 page The ROUTING 3 4 page consists of three parts MIC LINE and TAPE and the three icons at the top of the page are used to select them These pages are selected automatically when the relevant SEL button is pressed All pages feature the timecode counter The MIC page shown below contains surround pan controls for MIC inputs 1 to 16 Initial Data ROUTING 3 4 MICI 1 The surround pan position for each channel is displayed two dimensional pan graph The pan position is indicated by a small circle Small speaker icons above and below the pan graph indicate the selected surround pan mode In this example two speakers at the front and two at the rear indicate that 2 2 surround mode is selected Below the pan graph are two parameters The left right parameter moves the sound from left to right The front rear parameter moves the sound from front to rear The LINE page shown below contains surround pan controls for LINE inputs 17 to 24 and the effects returns 3717 18 19 260 2127 22 nlm t Le Bs je 02R User s Guide 68 Surround Pan The TAPE page shown below contains surround pan controls for TAPE inputs 1 to 16 1
38. bd eb RITTER ARS 155 Event Edit CH ON PAN FADER 156 Signature Cee ere wa VRE AP Na s eem 156 026 User s Guide 138 Automix What is the Automix Function One of the most demanding jobs of the recording engineer is taking all the raw material produced during a multitrack recording session and mixing it all together into an artistically satisfying master recording The ability to setup portions of the mix and then have them playback automatically as you work on other portions is probably the most important feature of any digital recording studio The 02R has an on board automix system that memorizes fader positions switches individual channels on or off adjusts the equalization or pan positions and changes the auxiliary sends all based on timecode It can record and execute scene memory changes also determined by timecode This allows you to perform an entire mixing session and then edit individual channel settings until you have achieved a perfect mix 0 initial RUTOMIH 122 Time Code Free Size E C t 1k 00 00 00 00 479k 99 Undo Bk Offset INT Start Time 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frames ime Reference as O3e0025 O24 Esere Automix Overwri te OENABLE OFADER OCH oNOPAN O SURROUND Edit Out Fader Edit Mode OEND ORET BABSOLUTE CRELATIVE Ee FA AUTO REC REC PLAY TOP ABORT O000
39. trae 24 Using the EQ Library 30 ROUTING iio ated a Hat ad NR ERREUR Rte T E Rd 35 Panning e soe ree EH Ree te e nd 38 02R Getting Started Guide 20 Introductory Recording Tutorial 8 STEREO DIM m m Setting the Input Level Assuming that the 02R is powered ON and your music source is playing the very first thing you need to do is set up a basic control room monitor mix When you recall Scene Memory 0 0 Initial Data all the channel faders are set to the 0 dB mark Setting Fader Levels If the faders are not set to 0 dB you should perform the following steps to optimize the input signal level for the best performance 1 Set the fader for MIC LINE 1 to the 0 dB mark The 0 dB fader position is a good place to start when setting fader levels It is a good setting with regard to signal level and noise performance and it leaves room for you to raise the level later if necessary 2 Set the STEREO fader to the 0 dB mark The stereo output meters are indicating the stereo output level The stereo mix signal is now being output to the digital and analog STEREO OUT connectors Selecting a Monitor Source Before you can hear anything through your monitor amplifier and speakers you have to select a Control Room source 1 Press the ST button of the CONTROL ROOM buttons group This selects the stereo bus for monitoring in t
40. 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 e 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 rA DATA NAME 01000001 41 0000mmmm Om m 0 15 Automix 1 16 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive O2R User s Guide Glossary 289 Glossary A D converter The conversion of analog signals into digital signals The analog signal is sampled every few milliseconds and its level is quantized into a digital word The larger the digital word the more accurate the representation of the analog value See Quantization and Sampling frequency The 02R uses 20 bit linear analog to digital converters for most of its analog inputs Aliasing A form of distortion which can occur during the conversion of analog signals into digital If the input signal is more than one half the sampling rate only portions of the signal will be present when the system samples the waveform A false image of the waveform based on the components that were actually sampled is created A system which samples at 48 KHz can correctly process signals of up to 24 kHz To remove signals above the Nyquist frequency see Nyquist Sampling Theorem all A D converters employ anti aliasing filters The 02R employs over sampling A D converters to allow the anti aliasing filter to be performed in the digital domain See over sampling Attenuation After the signal has been converted to digital the 02R can apply numerous forms of signal
41. 2 CH 3 Level a CH 1 MODE 327831139 RESET 026 User s Guide 170 MIDI O2R User s Guide There are two pages for Programmable Mixer 01 remote control Pages can be selected using the page icon at the right hand side of each page or by operating a control on that page For example operating fader 16 displays the first page while operating fader 17 18 displays the second page MIDI S s 2 Pragrammable Mixer OF 1223456 LIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIE m When the 02R or Programmable Mixer 01 is first connected or turned on use the CONNECT function to update the 02R controls so that they match those of the Programmable Mixer 01 When the CONNECT function is used the settings from the Programmable Mixer 01 are copied to the 02R Scene memories on the Programmable Mixer 01 can be recalled from either page To do this use the PGM parameter to select a MIDI Program Change from 0 to 127 When the RCL icon is pressed the corresponding scene memory is recalled on the Programmable Mixer 01 and the 02R controls move to their new positions The SCENE number and TITLE parameters do not change until the scene is recalled Then they display the scene memory number and title The 02R fader positions correspond to fader positions on the Programmable Mixer 01 Likewise the indicators in the 02R ON buttons show which channels on the Programmable Mixer 01
42. AUTOMIX memory names can be up to 16 characters long and can contain any of the following characters 1 7 1 7 amp tix s fe 112131415 6 78 91 1 gt 2 7 47 dje f g hj i j kl m qir s 2 1 1 1 COPY This icon is used to copy the name of an AUTOMIX program Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The program name is copied into an edit buffer PASTE This icon is used to paste the AUTOMIX program name previously selected with the COPY operation into the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The program name is pasted from the edit buffer into the TITLE EDIT box for subsequent editing INS This icon is used to insert blank characters into the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button DEL This icon is used to delete characters from the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button AUTOMIX Memory Edit Functions STORE This icon is used to store the current AUTOMIX program to the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select an AU
43. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not instruktion correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin Havita symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which mukaisesti is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE MUSIC U K LTD NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back up up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing Yamaha Service Center as follows Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Kanaalweg
44. Graphical display This is the 320 x 240 pixel CFL backlight graphical display It displays the system functions and their parameter values both graphically and numerically Stereo output level meters These stereo meters consist of 21 elements per channel Contrast control This control adjusts the contrast of the graphical display Controls and Connections 7 SELECTED CHANNEL controls 19 20 21 22 SELECTED CHANNEL 09 KUNA L ODD R EVEN ODD LOW HPF H MID HIGH LPF EQUALIZER ROUTING buttons These buttons set the routing for the currently selected channel AUX buttons and controls These buttons and controls set the auxiliary send channel and level for the currently selected channel PAN buttons and controls These buttons and controls set the pan position for the currently selected channel EQ buttons and controls These buttons and controls set the equalization for the currently selected channel 026 User s Guide 8 Controls and Connections
45. Hold 0 02 ms to 1 96 sec 48 kHz 0 02 ms to 2 13 sec 44 1 kHz 0 03 ms to 2 94 sec 32 kHz 216 points Decay 5 ms to 42 3 sec 48 kHz 6 ms to 46 0 sec 44 1 KHz 8 ms to 63 4 sec 32 kHz 160 points CompanderH CompanderS Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 1 dB steps Ratio 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 15 points Out gain 18 dB to 0 dB 0 5 dB steps Width 1 dB to 90 dB 1 dB steps Attack 0 ms to 120 ms 1 ms steps Helens 5 ms to 42 3 sec 48 kHz 6 ms to 46 0 sec 44 1 KHz 8 ms to 63 4 sec 32 kHz 160 points Delay 0 to 2600 samples Phase NORMAL REVERSE Channel ON OFF 1 to 20 Channel SEL 1 to 20 Fader 1 to 20 Aux send 100 mm motorized INPUT FADER AUX1 AUX2 AUXS AUXA AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ON OFF AUX 1 PRE POST FADER external effects AUX 2 PRE POST FADER external effects AUX 3 PRE POST FADER external effects AUX 4 PRE POST FADER external effects AUX 5 PRE POST FADER external effects AUX 6 PRE POST FADER external effects AUX 7 PRE POST FADER internal effects AUX 8 PRE POST FADER internal effects O2R User s Guide Specifications 243 Input channel MIC LINE 1 through 24 Pan 33 positions L 16 to 1 C 16 to 1 Routing BUS 1 through 8 ST DIRECT ON OFF Solo Pre fader After pan Peakhold ON OFF Meter 12 points di
46. O2R User s Guide Surround Pan 63 Surround Pan In this chapter About Surround Pan ogee Rete ERE 64 Selecting a Surround 65 Panning Sounds 67 Panning Sounds Using the Trajectories 69 Linking Channels for Surround 72 CSR Center Side 73 026 User s Guide 64 Surround Pan About Surround Pan The 02R Surround Pan function supports 2 2 3 1 and 3 2 1 surround modes making it ideal for sophisticated surround sound production Sounds can be moved freely around a two dimensional sound space or along preset circle ellipse semicircle or diagonal trajectories Surround channels can be transferred directly to a digital multitrack recorder via YGDAI DIGITAL I O 5 5 In addition surround channels can be output via the analog aux sends SETUP 2 4 Output Assignments The following table shows how the surround channels are assigned to the 02R bus outs in each mode Connect the bus outs that correspond to the mode you are using to a surround sound monitoring system or recorder Use the DIGITAL I O 5 5 page to set the bus out to I O card assignments See Slot Output Select on page 194 Mode BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 242 FL FR RL RR fr
47. Scene Scene Change Scene Scene 1 1 44 44 87 87 2 2 45 45 88 88 3 3 46 46 89 89 4 4 47 47 90 90 5 5 48 48 91 91 6 6 49 49 92 92 7 7 50 50 93 93 8 8 5 51 94 94 9 9 52 52 95 95 0 10 53 53 96 96 1 1 54 54 97 0 2 12 55 55 98 3 13 56 56 99 4 14 57 57 100 5 15 58 58 101 6 16 59 59 102 7 17 60 60 103 8 18 61 61 104 9 19 62 62 105 20 20 63 63 106 21 21 64 64 107 22 22 65 65 108 23 23 66 66 109 24 24 67 67 110 25 25 68 68 111 26 26 69 69 112 27 27 70 70 113 28 28 71 71 114 29 29 72 72 115 30 30 73 73 116 31 31 74 74 117 32 32 75 75 118 33 33 76 76 119 34 34 77 77 120 35 35 78 78 121 36 36 79 79 122 37 37 80 80 123 38 38 81 81 124 39 39 82 82 125 40 40 83 83 126 Al 41 84 84 127 42 42 85 85 128 43 43 86 86 026 User s Guide 256 Appendix MIDI Parameter to Control Change Table 02R amp User Maps Control Parameter Change User Map NO ASSIGN EL EL EL EL EL EL EL lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 17 18 19 20 LINE 21 22 LINE 23 24 EFF 1 EFF 2 ST MASTER AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 J 3 AAA A A A A A ALA AA AA A A A A ALA A A iTi NO ASSIGN EL EL EL EL EL
48. You can select the INS icon to insert a space blank at the current cursor position Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The DEL icon is used to delete the character at the cursor position Note The COPY and PASTE icons allow you to select the title from another EQ program and paste it into your program These icons only copy the title not the actual EQ settings See Icons on page 55 of the User s Guide 6 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STORE icon and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected EQ program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02K to prevent the dialog box appearing during STORE operations In this case the program is stored without confirmation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information 02 Getting Started Guide 34 Introductory Recording Tutorial 02 Getting Started Guide CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The EQ program is stored Note Ifyou decide you don t like an EQ program after you have stored it it is very easy to overwrite
49. 026 User s Guide 297 Index 48V switches 26 02R block diagram 15 dimensions 248 front panel 2 initializing 215 MIDI remote 171 options 218 rear panel 11 03D MIDI remote 173 parameter to control change assign 164 2 2 surround pan 65 20dB pad switches 27 24 bit recording 204 2TR IN ANALOG connectors 12 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 14 3 1 surround pan 66 3 2 1 surround pan 66 A ABORT icon automix 147 AC 3 Dolby 66 ADAT I O card installation 227 Adding I O cards 221 AES EBU 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 14 channel status monitor 211 emphasis monitor 210 I O card installation 225 STEREO OUT DIGITAL connectors 13 Analog I O card installation 224 Analog input controls 3 Analog inputs 26 Analog outputs 29 ATT 1 1 page 33 Attenuation 32 Auto AUTOMIX Display 198 Auto EQ Display 198 Auto EQ Edit In 201 Auto Inc TC Capture 202 Automix about 138 absolute fader edits 152 AU AU AU AU AU AU bulk dump 161 enable 145 END mode 152 event copy 153 making new 150 memory capacity 139 MOTOR ON 151 offset 145 overwrite 146 recalling 148 relative fader edits 151 RET mode 152 storing 148 titling 148 transport controls 147 undo 146 what s stored 138 TOMIX 1 7 page 144 TOMIX 2 7 page 148 TOMIX 3 7 page 151 TOMIX 4 7 page 153 TOMIX 5 7 page 155 TOMIX 6 7 page 156 Automix Store Undo 202 Auto PAN Display 198 AU TO REC icon automix 147 Auto ROUTING Display 198 Auto SOL
50. 28 Solo Vocal2 CMP Compressor Outgain dB 1 5 Knee 3 Release ms 331 Threshold dB 9 Avariation on program 27 intended 1 17 for chorus vocals Attack ms 39 29 Chorus CMP Compressor Outgain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 10 A template for the hard knee Ratio 1 35 compander program Attack ms 1 30 Compander H CPH CompanderH Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 6 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 8 A template for the soft knee Ratio 1 4 compander program Attack ms 25 31 Compander S CPS CompanderS Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 24 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 33 Expander to remove click track Ratio 1 2 sounds that may bleed out of the monitor headphones the ttack ms ici f 32 Click Erase EXP Expander IMS Outgain dB 2 0 Knee Release ms 284 Threshold dB 14 Hard compander reduces the Ratio 1 25 level during the interval between POT the words making the voice ttack ms 33 Announcer CPH CompanderH sound even Outgain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 26 A template for the gate program Range dB 56 34 Easy Gate GAT Gate Attack ms 0 Hold ms 2 56 Decay ms 331 O2R User s Guide No 35 36 37 38 39 40 Name BGM Ducking Limiter1 Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 Total Comp3 DUK CMP CMP CMP CM
51. 48 Secondary Recording Tutorial By default assuming you are still working with Scene Memory 0 0 Initial Data the effect return channel is routed to the stereo bus Note Although you cannot route the effect return channel to the direct outputs you can route it to the same bus that the input channel is routed to allowing you to record the effect together with the input signal Many engineers prefer to add effects only during the final mix It is very easy to apply effects but difficult to remove it once it has been recorded You may want to send the effect to the monitor mix however especially when recording a vocalist many vocalists dislike hearing their voice dry in the monitors 5 Select the EQ graph with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The 02R will automatically switch to the EQ 1 2 page Follow the steps detailed in Applying EQ on page 24 of the Getting Started Guide to set the EQ for the effect return channel EFF 1 RTN Note Many engineers prefer to hold off applying EQ to a recording until they are ready to mixdown Again it is much easier to apply EQ than to subsequently remove it 02 Getting Started Guide Secondary Recording Tutorial 49 Recalling and Editing Effects Once you have applied effects to MIC LINE 1 you need to know how to recall effects programs from the effects library and to adjust their parameters in order to create your own effect programs Reca
52. 8 00 2 S E 026 User s Guide Auxiliary Channels 101 Stereo Input Channels Input channels 1 through 16 are mono inputs The stereo input channels 17 through 24 are paired together and handle two signals left and right Before feeding a stereo input signal to the auxiliary level controls the left and right signals are summed to form a mono L R mix AUX ON Button The auxiliary sends can be turned on or off for quick A B comparisons by using the ON button in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls When the send for a channel is turned off the send level icon for that channel continues to show the current level setting for the channel but the text underneath the icon switches to OFF giving you a quick visual indicator of the channel send status OFF co co 5 s 00 00 00 Q 00 co pos pes pos Pas s ele mats 6 The LED inset in the ON button is illuminated when the send for a channel is turned on Note The ON button of the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX controls is the only way to turn the channel send on or off AUX Pre or Post The auxiliary sends can be configured as pre fader or post fader This setting can be changed by selecting a channel with a SEL button or the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button for that channel If you select a channel with a SEL button or the CURSO
53. Effects are organized into programs There are 40 preset effects programs 1 through 40 and 88 user effects programs 41 through 128 plus an UNDO buffer for you to store your own settings Setting the Send Levels The process for applying effects is similar to the steps as detailed in Setting the Aux Send Level on page 43 of the Getting Started Guide The following example shows applying effects to MIC LINE 1 using AUX 7 1 Use the AUX 7 button to locate AUX 7 1 3 page shown below 1 Es Es 5 Qo The faders automatically move from the channel level positions to the aux send level positions Even though the fader has changed positions the 02R remembers the channel signal levels Note Avoid blocking the fader movements when the faders move to their aux send positions by placing objects on the 02 It is possible to damage the faders 2 Select MIC LINE 1 using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons Turn the aux send on by pressing the AUX 7 button and then the ON button in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls 3 Press the ENTER button to change the aux send from pre to post fader VIEW Secondary Recording Tutorial 47 Sends to the effects are usually post fader This means the signal level feed into the effects processor follows the dry channel level 4 Adjust the fader for MIC LINE 1 until the desired signal level is obtained Adjusting the Ef
54. Loc QU Gl Gl B E 20 00 00 4 S 5 5 i 123455 80 88 08 49 10 1019 80 00 00 REMOTE O2R User s Guide MIDI 169 Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 02R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 Parameters on the 02R Controls Programmable Mixer 01 Faders 1 16 Channel levels 1 16 17 18 Stereo input level STEREO Stereo output level Rotary encoders TAPE 1 16 Input channel pans 1 16 EFF1 amp EFF2 Effects returns levels 1 amp 2 ON buttons MIC 1 16 Channel on off 1 16 EFF1 amp EFF2 Effects returns on off 1 amp 2 17 8 Stereo input on off STEREO Stereo output on off Display functions Mix scene recall Programmable Mixer 01 Setup On the Programmable Mixer 01 s MIDI SETUP page set the PROGRAM CONTROL and BULK parameters as shown below Set the Tx Ch and Rx Ch parameters to match the MIDI Transmit Channel and Receive Channel settings on the 02R s MIDI 1 5 page MIDI l IDI SETUP Tx Ch 8 Rx Ch 1 MEMORYG1 TX T YOMNIYECHo 01m ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 0 CH 1 LIN LIN x EXIT On the Programmable Mixer 01 s CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN page set the Control Change mode to REGISTER as shown below MIDI CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN 8 d C89 1 RnBHE IE8NK NO MEMORY 1 _CH 1 Level 8 8 amp 1 1 1 CH 2 Level
55. RECORD automix transport PLAY automix transport STOP automix transport ABORT data format address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address data H high 4 bits of 8 bits data data L low 4 bits of 8 bits data 0000dddd 0268 User s Guide Appendix MIDI 273 Bulk Dump and Request Format The data format is as following For example Internal data ds d1 d2 dx de dx is 1byte data dxH dx 16 AND OFh dx AND 0Fh To calculate the check sum add the data from BYTE COUNT LOW to just before the CHECK SUM multiplying 1 2 s complement resetting MSB bit7 check sum sum amp Ox7F Scene Memory Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 4074 2016x2 32 10 bytes 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 n 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01001101 4D Ommmmmmm mm m 0 96 127 Scene Memory No 0 96 current Oates S 1 id 1 Oiiiiiii ii id 16 Ottttttt tt title1 DATA Ottttttt tt title16 Oddddddd dsH Oddddddd dsL Scene Memory 2016x2bytes Oddddddd deH Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L
56. SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 and 2TR icons in the upper part of the page to select the information you wish to monitor If you select one of SLOTs 1 4 and any card other than the CD8 AE AES EBU card is installed in the corresponding slot or no card is installed the page is grayed out and you cannot monitor the information The table in the center of the page shows the contents of the channel status of the selected signal Each indication has the following meaning e Fs This is the sampling frequency information One of 32k 44 1k 48k None unknown and UNLOCK will appear UNLOCK means that no signal is being input or the input signal is invalid In this case the Emphasis Category and Copy columns will show e Emphasis This shows the status of emphasis of the control bit ON OFF or unknown will be shown e Category his shows the status of the category bit which is implemented only for the IEC958 Part2 Consumer format The following items are included General Used temporarily Laser Optical Laser optical device D D Conv Digital to digital converter and signal processor 02R User s Guide 212 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Magnetic Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device D Broadcast Digital broadcast reception Instruments Musical instruments microphones and the sources that generate the original signal A D Conv A D Conve
57. These switches turn the 48 V DC phantom power ON and OFF for the XLR 3 31 connectors 2 A B switches channels 1 to 8 These switches select between the XLR 3 31 connectors and the phone connectors 3 20 dB pad switches channels 1 to 16 These switches attenuate the input signal by 20 dB 4 GAIN controls These controls adjust the gain of the input preamp The analog input controls are not controlled or stored by the 02R automix and scene memory functions To allow easy recall of the gain setting the controls are detented 5 PEAK LED This red LED illuminates when the input signal exceeds 3 dB below clipping It is acceptable if this LED illuminates occasionally However if it is continuously illuminated the input preamp is being overloaded and clipping distortion will result 6 SIGNAL LED This green LED illuminates when the input signal exceeds 10 dB below nominal 02R User s Guide 4 Controls and Connections Analog output controls T B LEVEL o 10 STUDIO PHONES LEVEL LEVEL o EET 7 8 re T B LEVEL control and microphone This control sets the volume level of the built in talkback microphone STUDIO LEVEL control This control sets the level of the signal sent to the STUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT connectors PHONES LEVEL control and connector This control sets the level of signal output to a pair of stereo headphones plugged into the connector DISPLAY ACCESS controls
58. With a fast attack time the signal is compressed almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the compressor s output signal level Compression tends to reduce the average signal level Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path 026 User s Guide 78 Dynamics O2R User s Guide Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Release determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold If the release time is too short the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be compressed incorrectly Output Level Output Level Expansion ratio 2 1 Knee hard Threshold 10dB Expansion ratio 2 1 Knee knee5 Threshold 20dB Dynamics 79 Expander expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold the expander reduces low level
59. With this option checked the 02R will request you confirm any scene memory or library store or clear operations The initial setting is checked You should leave this option in its default state when your 02R is going to be operated by an inexperienced person Forcing them to respond to a confirmation message may prevent the accidental loss of your valuable data O2R User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 199 When you confirm a STORE or CLEAR operation any existing data in the selected program location will be overwritten or cleared YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX Recall Confirmation With this option checked the 02R will request you confirm any scene memory or library recall operation Remote Talkback C3 With this option checked you can enable the Talkback system by sending a MIDI Note On message for C3 You disable the Talkback system by sending a MIDI Note Off message for C3 Transmit Key Remote With this option checked when you operate any buttons controls or faders the 02R will transmit system exclusive parameter change messages from its MIDI OUT connector This is intended to be used to remotely control another 02R Insert Tx Bulk Wait With this option checked Bulk Dump data is transmitted at intervals When another device cannot receive 02R Bulk Dump data correctly turning this option on may help Fast Meter Fall Time With this option checke
60. and appears the SEL buttons or the when one of these channels is selected CURSOR buttons 3 change the pan position rotate the encoder wheel until the desired value is shown The second page shown below contains the Pan controls for TAPE channels 1 to 16 effects returns EFF 1 and EFF 2 and the stereo output balance and appears when one of these channels is selected OOOO C 262 Es ae gla ale ola ED aajn ale ale OSOS L16 R16 116 R16 EFF 1 EFF2 The number of the selected channel is highlighted Channel pan positions are indicated by marker lines just like the ones on real knobs The current pan value is displayed under the panpot icon Note When a stereo channel 17 to 24 is stored to the channel library pan settings for both the left and right channels are stored If such a channel program is recalled to a mono channel the pan settings of the left channel are used 026 User s Guide Press the PAN button PAN Select a channel using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons Press the ENTER button to connect the odd and even channels together Pans can also be linked by pressing the PAN L ODD and R EVEN buttons at the same time MIXING Display Functions 37 Pan Positions Including center there are 33 pan positions L16 L15 L2 L1 C gt 2 R15 R16 Pan Gang When channels are configured as a stereo
61. e MIX Update Confirmation With this option checked a confirmation dialog box appears after performing an automix edit asking whether or not you want to keep the new edit thereby updating the automix e Recall Safe Faders With this option checked you can record fader movements even though the faders are set to Recall Safe e Fader Flip Recall Safe With this option checked the FLIP button is not affected when a mix scene is recalled Touch Sense Select With this option checked adjusting a fader or rotary encoder displays the corresponding page or selects the channel allowing for quick operation Touch Sense Edit With this option checked and the FADER Overwrite option on the AUTOMIX 1 7 page checked simply moving a fader during automix recording automatically selects that fader for recording You may find this more convenient than using the SEL buttons to select faders Be careful however because if an Overwrite parameter other than FADER is selected because data recorded before the edit start point will be deleted e Auto EQ Edit In With this option checked adjusting the EQ affects only the selected band For example adjusting the HIGH EQ does not affect the LOW EQ e Restore Last Edit Ch With this option checked the channel edited last is automatically selected for subsequent edits In Rec Ready mode the last channel edited is selected for subsequent edits In Auto Rec mode selecting one of the
62. milliseconds with the CURSOR buttons Press the ENTER button to turn the delay on or off See Delay on page 34 of the User s Guide Note The fine tuning procedure is not available from this display function See Fine Tuning the Delay on page 35 of the User s Guide Meter Source Point When the cursor is located at this part of the display as you press the ENTER button you can cycle through the meter source points PRE EQ POST EQ or POST FADER There are also level meters for the channel pair selected and its corresponding even or odd mate See Metering on page 41 of the User s Guide 02R User s Guide 46 MIXING Display Functions O2R User s Guide Groups and Channel ON Use the CURSOR buttons to select the fader and mute group icons Each time you press the ENTER button the selected group will alternately be set or cancelled Remember that a channel can only belong to one fader group and one mute group See Grouping Faders on page 182 and Grouping Mutes on page 183 of the User s Guide Press the ON button to turn the channel on or off See ON Buttons on page 28 of the User s Guide Beside the fader and mute group icons is the fader position icon You cannot adjust this from the display but it accurately reflects the current position of the channel fader Displayed below the icon is the fader position in dB See Faders on page 28 of the User s Guide Auxiliary Sends Select an
63. the originally selected LEDs are illuminated again You can monitor input channels in isolation by pressing the SOLO button Note Ifthe 02R is connected to other units with the digital cascade kit CD8 CS only the SOLO button on the cascade master unit is valid See Digital Cascade Kit CD8 CS on page 229 of the User s Guide TALKBACK Buttons The talkback system allows you to talk to musicians in the studio without leaving the 02R Press the T B button and start talking The SLATE TALKBACK button sends the talkback signal to the main buses as well as the stereo bus for example allowing you to record a memo before recording a take You can also record 100 Hz 1 kHz and 10 kHz sine waves and white noise tones by using the oscillator function See Oscillator on page 209 of the User s Guide for details Monitor Level Controls C R LEVEL Control This control is used to adjust the volume output through the control room LEVEL monitor outputs T B LEVEL Control 1 10 This control adjusts the volume of the talkback signal The talkback signal aerate is picked up by the built in microphone right below the control STUDIO LEVEL Control Q3 This control is used to adjust the overall volume output through the studio o 10 monitor outputs STUDIO If you are using a headphone amplifier to provide studio monitoring you may need a unit that allows individual adjustment of each set of headphones
64. the expander reduces low level noise or expands the dynamic range of the recorded material See Dynamics Processor F frequency The center frequency of an EQ band See EQ Fader calibration The motorized faders occasionally require re calibration in order to maintain the highest performance possible G gain The signal gain of an EQ band See EQ Gain and 20dB pad The analog input pre amplifier controls These controls are used to optimize the signal from the input connectors The pad switch is used to reduce the channel gain for line level signals Gate A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones See Dynamics Processor 958 Part 2 Consumer A digital interface protocol that is used to transfer digital audio data between consumer type digital audio equipment such as CD players and DAT DCC and Mini Disc recorders Two channels of digital audio left right are carried a single line A coaxial phono RCA jack connection is typical but some systems use optical interconnects IEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional A digital interface protocol that is used to transfer digital audio data between professional digital audio equipment such as PCM and DAT mastering recorders modular multitrack recorders and other equipment Two channels of digital audio are c
65. these programs for stereo inputs or external effect returns This is a variation on program 1 The low and mid range is removed This is a variation on program 3 It creates rather thick sound This is a variation on program 5 Emphasizes the mid and high range This is a variation on program 13 Use for the low range of the piano sound when it is recorded in stereo Use with program 38 02R User s Guide 62 MIXING Display Functions Parameter NET No Name Description LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use for the high range of 10 63 22 0 1 the piano sound when it is 38 Piano High recorded in stereo Use 187Hz 397Hz 6 72kHz 5 65kHz with program 37 5 1 5dB 5 0dB 3 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Use for recording to or 45 18 from cassette tape to 39 Fine EQ Cass make the sound clearer 74Hz 1 00kHz 4 00kHz 12 6kHz 1 5dB 0 0dB 1 0dB 3 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Use for recording a voice 4 7 0 63 reading a text 40 Narrator 105Hz 707Hz 2 52kHz 10 0kHz 4 00 1 00 2 0dB 0 0dB Note The EQ programs were programmed for recording acoustic musical instruments If you are using them for a sampler synthesizer or rhythm machine adjust the parameters accordingly Note Programs 33 to 40 contain preset programs and are listed in the table above However you can store your own settings to these programs
66. to apply reverb and equalization to the monitor signal you send to your vocalist while you record the performance dry You can select any combination of the ST AUX 5 and AUX 6 buttons including none CONTROL ROOM Buttons The buttons select the monitor signal sent to the control room monitor system This is usually a large pair of near field loudspeakers Many studios also use a smaller speaker system such as the YAMAHA NS 10M to monitor a typical listening environment You can select one of five 2TR IN inputs three of which are digital the 2TR D1 to 2TR D3 buttons These inputs are used for monitoring two track source signals for example the return of your master recorder When you press any of these buttons the current setting is cancelled When you press the button again the previous setting is restored You can also monitor the signal on the stereo bus with the ST button or select the auxiliary channels AUX 5 or AUX 6 You can select any combination of the ST AUX 5 and AUX 6 buttons including none Convert the monitor signal to monaural by pressing the button or mute the output by 20 dB by pressing the DIM button 02R User s Guide 30 Mixing and Monitoring SOLO Button The LEDs in the center of the selected channel ON buttons are SOLO extinguished You select the channel s you want to solo by pressing the corresponding ON button When you press the SOLO button again
67. to the 02R Scene memories on the 03D can be recalled from either page To do this use the PGM parameter to select a MIDI Program Change from 0 to 127 When the RCL icon is pressed the corresponding scene memory is recalled on the 03D and the 02R controls move to their new positions The SCENE number and TITLE parameters do not change until the scene is recalled Then they display the scene memory number and title The 02R fader positions correspond to fader positions on the 03D Likewise the indicators in the 02R ON buttons show which channels on the 03D are turned on and which are turned off Initial Data MIDI 5 5 2 REMOTE REMOTE 5 5 CONNECT 8 REMOTE MIDI 175 General MIDI Tone Generator 02R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a General MIDI compatible tone generator Parameters on the 02R Controls GM Tone Generator Faders MIC 1 16 Part levels 1 16 Rotary encoders TAPE 1 16 Selectable Control Changes for 1 16 ON buttons 1 16 Part on off 1 16 There is one page for General MIDI tone generator remote control The TAPE 1 16 rotary encoders can be assigned to various MIDI Control Changes using the CONTROLLER ASSIGN parameter REMOTE REMOTES REMOTES 1 CONTROLLER RSSIGN j CONNECT 8 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 1 2 3 4 25 5 7 8 5605600000000000 4 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1
68. trajectory from the front left to the rear right Width depth and offset can be set for this trajectory The following illustrations show some typical trajectories O2R User s Guide Surround Pan 71 Left to right semicircle The sound moves from left to right on a semicircular trajectory Use the width and depth parameters to set the size and shape of the semicircle The shape can be adjusted from a semicircle to a narrow oval Use the offset parameters to offset the trajectory to the left right front or rear The following illustrations show some typical trajectories Front to rear semicircle The sound moves from front to rear ona semicircular trajectory Use the width and depth parameters to set the size and shape of the semicircle The shape can be adjusted from a semicircle to a narrow oval Use the offset parameters to offset the trajectory to the left right front or rear The following illustrations show some typical trajectories Circle The sound moves on a circular trajectory Use the width and depth parameters to set the size and shape The shape can be adjusted from a perfect circle to a narrow oval Use the offset parameters to offset the trajectory to the left right front or rear The following illustrations show some typical trajectories 026 User s Guide 72 Surround Pan 1 Use the ROUTING button to locate the ROUTING 4 4 page ROUTING 2 Use the SEL buttons to select a
69. 02R automix and scene memory functions To assist in easy recall of the gain setting the GAIN controls are detented You should note the analog settings on a copy of the User Settings Sheet at the back of the manual SEL Buttons The SEL buttons are used to select a channel in order to perform some action on it When a channel is selected the LED set in the corresponding button lights up and its name appears in the Selected Channel area of the display Stereo pair channels are selected together Note You can use the SEL buttons to create stereo pair channels Refer to Pairing Channels on page 184 of the User s Guide The SELECTED CHANNEL controls are set to the current status of the selected channel Depending on which display function is active the selected channel may be highlighted or the entire display may be dedicated to its parameters 02R User s Guide 28 Mixing and Monitoring ON Buttons The ON buttons are used to turn channels on and off The input channel tape return channel effect return channel and stereo output ON buttons ON turn their respective channels on and off When a channel is turned on the LED set in the corresponding button lights up When it is turned off the LED goes off Stereo pair channels are turned on and off together Faders 02R s faders are motorized This means that they can be positioned automatically You can group or pair faders together so all faders i
70. 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio LPF THRU 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Ini Dly 0 1ms 0 1 320 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections Program 24 DELAY L C R 2 This is a variation on program 23 Parameter Setting DIy L 250 0ms DIy R 500 0ms DIy C 1000 0ms Level C 57 FB Dly 1000 0ms FB Gain 17 Hi Ratio 0 8 LPF THRU HPF THRU Ini Dly 0 1ms Range Same as program 23 Description Same as program 23 02R User s Guide 120 Internal Effects Program 25 CHORUS gt DLY LCR Chorus effect is followed by a three part delay L C R with feedback Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 0 8Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Chorus modulation frequency Depth 2496 0 100 Chorus depth The amount of modulation Mod Dly 5 9ms 0 0 255 0 5 Chorus delay The delay time before modulation starts Dly L 26 4ms 0 1 1000 0 5 Left channel delay time Dly R 33 2ms 0 1 1000 0 5 Right channel delay time DIy C 13 1ms 0 1 1000 0ms Centre channel delay time Level C 60 100 to 100 Centre delay volume level FB Dly 40 5ms 0 1 1000 0ms Feedback delay The delay time before feedback starts FB Gain 4896 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect Hi Ratio 0 1 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio Program 26 MONODLY gt CHORUS Mono feedback d
71. 1 or AUX 2 Note As you change the KEY IN parameter the icons in the KEY IN block on the display also change You should select either SELF PRE EQ or SELF POST EQ 5 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the compressor parameters 6 Adjust the value of each parameter by rotating the encoder wheel To compress the stereo output signal try settings similar to those in the following table Threshold 10 dB Knee 2 Ratio 2 1 Attack 60 ms Out Gain 0 dB Release 1 02 sec 1 1 This value is obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz or 48 KHz The above settings provide 2 1 compression above 10 dB This means for every 1 dB change in input signal level above 10 dB there will be a 0 5 dB change in the output level You can increase the output level without as much risk of clipping The overall effect is the output signal sounds louder essentially because you have limited or compressed the dynamic range Experiment with the settings until you get an effect that you like DYNAMICS Secondary Recording Tutorial 57 Using the Dynamics Library Once you have applied a dynamics processor to the stereo bus you need to know how to recall dynamics programs from the library and to adjust the parameters to create your own dynamics programs Recalling Dynamics Programs 1 Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the DYNAMICS 2 2 page shown below POST 2 E Attack Release S3ms TITLE EDIT V
72. 1 through 2 Routing BUS 1 through 8 ST ON OFF Solo Pre fader After pan Peakhold ON OFF Meter 12 points displays of the pre EQ post EQ post fader levels of all channel input are displayed on the screen Outputs STEREO OUT Dynamics parameters are the same as MIC LINE input dynamics 4 band parametric parameters are the same as MIC LINE input equalizer equalizer Fader 100 mm motorized ON OFF Meter 21 elements x 2 LED meter pre fader post fader D A converter 20bit linear 8 times oversampling BUS OUT BUS1 through BUS8 Dynamics parameters are the same as MIC LINE input dynamics Level rotary encoder Meter 12 points displays of the pre post fader levels of all channel input are displayed on the screen option ANALOG ADAT TASCAM AES EBU YAMAHA AUX OUT AUX1 through AUX8 Level rotary encoder Meter 12 points displays of the pre post fader levels of all channel input are displayed on the screen D A converter Select switch 18bit linear 8 times oversampling AUX1 through AUX6 CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT 2TR A1 2TR A2 2TR D1 2TR D2 2TR D3 AUX5 AUX6 ST Mono ON OFF DIM ON OFF D A converter 20bit linear 8 times oversampling Emphasis Auto ON OFF Level control Phone level O2R User s Guide Specifications 245 STUDIO MONITOR OUT Select switch AUX5 AUX6 ST_ D A converter 18bit lin
73. 108 Effects Libraty cocos Re eir I Ree rege 109 Preset Effects Program 112 026 User s Guide 104 Internal Effects About Effects The 02R features two internal multi effects stereo processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 These are fed by AUX 7 and AUX 8 and the processed signals are returned via EFF 1 RTN and EFF 2 RTN respectively The auxiliary sends can be configured pre fader or post fader Effects can be applied to input channels the tape return channels or the stereo output channel Effects are organized into programs There are 40 preset effects programs 1 through 40 and 88 user effects programs 41 through 128 plus an UNDO buffer for you to store your own settings There are two different ways to access the internal effects sends DISPLAY ACCESS AUX buttons AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 the recording console g These buttons access the AUX pages that set the auxiliary send levels for AUX5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AU EFF1 AUX The AUX 7 and AUX 8 buttons are routed to the internal effects unit Use them to set the send levels to the corresponding effects unit and select pre or post fader These buttons also allow you to select and set the effects parameters The channel aux send level controls for each aux send are displayed on two pages The first page shows MIC LINE aux controls The second TAPE and effects returns aux controls SELECTED CHANNEL AUX controls
74. 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 L Duros E es e ns pna pns ne This display allows you to watch the fader movements as dynamic bargraphs Several features make this display convenient to use while you perform detailed fader encoder edits 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select Fader Edit Out RET and press ENTER to change its value If the RET check box is not selected you may want to move the fader back to its previously recorded level before you punch out If the RET check box is selected the fader will automatically return to the previously recorded level when you punch out The time it takes to return to the previous level is controlled by the Time field 5 Select the REC icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The REC icon will flash 6 Start the device that is providing the timecode The 02R will remain in AUTOMIX RECORD READY status 7 Monitor the recording At the punch in location press the SEL button for the tape return channel you want to edit Recording will begin from where you pressed the SEL button 8 While monitoring the recording adjust the fader you want to edit As you operate the fader the display shows the previously recorded position as well as the new position An arrow in the display indicates the 02 Getting Started Guide 80 and Automix direction the fader has to be moved to return to the previously recorded position i 1 If
75. 2 0 aa Mic MARCHO rers moy za rs ne 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ooo a C E S E 5 90909 Doo 7 0 210 0 0 The faders are listed in two main rows with the four group icons below each channel number On the right side of the page are the Enable group select icons You can adjust the level balance within a group by turning the group on or off by selecting the corresponding icon a group is ON when its icon is highlighted and pressing the ENTER button The LEDs inset in the SEL buttons of the faders in the group will flash and they will be ungrouped temporarily allowing you to adjust the individual fader levels If you try to operate multiple faders the first fader you select will have priority It is possible to upset the relative positions of the faders if you attempt to operate more than one at a time Note A fader can only be assigned to one group If you attempt to assign a fader to more than one group the message Duplicate Grouping appears Groups and Pairs 183 1 Use the GROUP button to locate the GROUP 2 2 page GROUP Use the CURSOR buttons to select from group E through H Use the SEL buttons to add or remove channels to and from the selected group Another method is to use the CURSOR buttons to select the channels and press the ENTER button Note Stereo pair channels are added o
76. 80 95 undo tape 96 99 undo line 100 101 undo eff 102 undo st mas 0 35 38 39 46 bus aux 64 95 102 103 110 undo bus aux 36 37 100 101 0 37 64 101 0 62 from host 0 0 38 62 64 102 0 35 38 39 46 62 64 95 102 103 110 36 37 62 100 101 0 37 62 64 101 Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only Tx only 026 User s Guide 268 Appendix MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE key remote STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE 00011001 19 key remote type number DATA Oddddddd dd0 key No H high 7 bits Oddddddd 1 key No L low 7 bits Oddddddd dd2 key on 1 off 0 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive PARAMETER CHANGE fader remote STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE 00011001 1A fader remote type number DATA Oddddddd ddo No 0 20 fader 1 21 st mas 64 87 encoder tape1 16 rtn1 2 aux pan q f g entry Oddddddd ddl data fader 0 127 encoder 64 63 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive O2R User s Guide
77. CD8 CS WORD CLOCK SLOT 2 IN siora 85854 laiolela o iom aa 522222222252 Ba OSGOOD OO DOCG OOOO ioa lololol iolalal NN 02R cascade slave Word clock slave 02R cascade slave Word clock slave 750 switch ON 750 switch ON Installing the CD8 CS The cascade I O CD8 CS is a single slot card At least one cascade I O card should be installed in each 02R If you are connecting more than two 02Rs the middle units should have two cards The cascade I O cards should be installed in SLOT3 or SLOT4 You should reserve SLOT1 and SLOT2 for digital I O cards For installation instructions see Single Slot Cards on page 221 of the User s Guide 1 Set the IN OUT switch of the cascade I O card installed in the first O2R to the IN position This 02R will be the cascade master 2 Set the IN OUT switch of the cascade I O card installed in the second O2R to the OUT position This O2R will be the cascade slave 02R User s Guide 230 Installing Options Use a BNC cable to plug the WORD CLOCK OUT connector on the back o
78. DISPLAY ACCESS SCENE DIGITAL MEMORY 1 0 UTILITY e AUTOMIX 5 ROUTING YNAMIC AUX6 AUX 7 AUX 8 EFF1 EFF2 CONFIGURATION buttons These buttons access the corresponding Display function Button Description SCENE MEMORY Store and recall mix scenes DIGITAL I O Define the digital interconnections and word clock source cascade parameters and dith er characteristics SETUP Set SOLO status and preferences UTILITY Define oscillator check battery status AUTOMIX Store and recall automix programs MIDI Set the MIDI channels and tables Control bulk data transfers GROUP Set up the fader groups PAIR Set up channel pairs O2R User s Guide 11 Controls and Connections 5 MIXING buttons These buttons access the corresponding Display function Button Description O ATT Set phase and attenuation DELAY Set the channel delay PAN Set the pan position ROUTING Set the channel routing METER Meter the levels from the individual input channels the tape and effect return chan nels the 8 main busses and the 8 auxiliary busses VIEW View and set all the parameters for
79. ENTER button to switch it on The automix system will not function unless this check box is enabled 6 Select the desired Overwrite items with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button This field allows you to select the types of events that will be recorded Only the items selected will be recorded Choose from the following e FADER channel level operations fader or encoder including auxiliary send levels e CH ON ON button selections for each channel e PAN pan position for each channel e EQ EQ selections for each channel e SURROUND surround pan events Note Scene memories and all library recall operations will be recorded regardless of the settings of the Overwrite options The other options on this page are also important but not for the purposes of this tutorial See Automix Main on page 144 of the User s Guide for more details Creating a New Automix To record an entire mixing session with the 02R automix system you must first create a new automix When a new automix is created the contents of the current automix referred to as events are deleted and the current automix is returned to its default settings 02R Getting Started Guide AUTOMIX STORE RECALL SCENE MEMORY Mixing and Automix 71 If you want to keep the contents of the current automix store them into an available memory location before proceeding 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX
80. Edit Mode OEND ORET AABSOLUTE ORELATIVE UNDO pm IN p Rm REC Bp JP VDOOOOVOOOOOOOO 12 13 14 15 16 E1 2 The top row of this page consists of the timecode counter the current free memory size shown in a bargraph kilobytes and percentage and the size of the current memory buffer and the undo buffer The second row has automix offset and internal timecode generator start time parameters In the third row you set the frame rate 30 30D drop frame 25 or 24 and select the Time Reference SMPTE MTC INT internal SMPTE or MIDI MIDI Clock The fourth row allows you to set the Automix ENABLE and select the real time edit Overwrite status FADER CH ON PAN EQ SURROUND In the fifth row you set the Edit Out END RET and select the Fader Edit Mode ABSOLUTE or RELATIVE At the end of the row is the UNDO icon which allows you to undo the last edit operation The bottom row contains the automix transport icons Select from the following e AUTOREC recording starts when the 02R receives timecode e REC places the 02R in record ready mode PLAY starts playback of the automix program when timecode is received e STOP stops recording or playback e ABORT stops recording and discards any data recorded Automix 145 Time Code Counter The timecode counter displays the incoming timecode Time Code For the SMPTE MTC and INT time references 00 00 00 00 timecode is displayed in
81. Eg e a E EE 11 e a Em EN Em e a En Em is e a En Fine Tuning the Delay You can adjust the delay either samples Smpl or milliseconds mSEC with coarse or fine precision just by the placement of the cursor on the selected channel For example if the cursor is positioned over the thousands digit of the samples Smpl field when you rotate the encoder wheel the values increase or decrease by thousands of samples H pm If the cursor is positioned over the hundreds or tens digit of the samples field when you rotate the encoder wheel the values increase or decrease by hundreds or tens of samples kl Eg e a Em The same is true when the cursor is positioned over the ones digit of the samples field or the tens ones or decimal digits of the milliseconds mSEC field Dee 20 2 Em E e 3 6 6 Bn Bm I zs e Em 026 User s Guide 36 MIXING Display Functions Pan and Balance 1 Press the PAN button The PAN display function is used to pan and balance signals The input channels including the stereo input channels and the tape and effect returns can be panned and the stereo output can be balanced PAN The PAN display Pan Pages function appears There are two pages to the PAN 1 1 function The first page shown below 2 Selectachannelusing contains the Pan controls for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24
82. G The power of the 02R user interface means that there are two ways of adjusting the EQ for MIC LINE 1 One method is to use the EQ 1 2 page The more convenient method is to use the buttons and controls of the EQUALIZER block of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls LOW HPF L MID EQUALIZER Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust a control of the EQ block of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls the EQ 1 2 page automatically appears See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information The default setting is to automatically display the EQ page The rest of this tutorial describes the operation of the EQ 1 2 page Turning the EQ ON OFF 1 Press the SEL button for MIC LINE 1 When you press the SEL button for a channel the LED and numeric indicators of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls change to reflect the status of the channel you selected 2 Press the EQ button Introductory Recording Tutorial 25 The EQ 1 2 page appears showing the EQ curve and settings for MIC LINE 1 3 Use the CURSOR butions to select the EQ ON icon If the EQ is ON the icon will be highlighted The LED inset in the EQ ON button of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER block controls will also be illuminated 4 To turn the EQ either on or off press the ENTER button or the EQ ON button The ON icon will change to OFF The LED inset in the EQ ON button will no longer be illuminated Turn the EQ
83. Guide User Interface 19 e The DIGITAL I O button is used to select the word clock source define the digital input output connectors control the cascade configuration and set the word dither SETUP button is used to control the solo function and defines system preferences e The UTILITY button is used to set the oscillator function and check the battery emphasis and channel status monitors e The AUTOMIX button is used to set and control the automix parameters e The MIDI button is used to select the MIDI channels and MIDI functions e The GROUP and PAIR buttons are used to create fader and mute groups and pair channels together MIXING group DELAY PAN ROUTING These buttons access the Display Functions that set mixer parameters for the entire recording console EQ DYNAMICS MIXING The ATT button is used to reverse the phase and attenuate the signals after they have been converted to digital e The DELAY key is used to apply a small delay to the input signal for example to compensate for the gap between the record and playback heads of your multitrack recorder e The PAN button is used to adjust the pan position for a group of channels The ROUTING button selects the routing page large visual patch bay The METER button is used to meter the individual channels e The VIEW button is used to adjust all the parameters for the selected chann
84. I O 3 5 194 DIGITAL I O 4 5 193 DIGITAL I O 5 5 191 DYNAMICS 1 2 83 DYNAMICS 2 2 87 EQ 1 251 EQ 2 2 55 GROUP 1 2 182 GROUP 2 2 183 02R User s Guide 300 METER 1 2 41 METER 2 2 41 METER 3 3 42 MIDI 1 5 159 MIDI 2 5 160 MIDI 3 5 161 MIDI 4 5 164 MIDI 5 5 166 PAIR 1 2 184 PAIR 2 2 185 PAN 1 136 PHASE 1 1 33 ROUTING 1 2 39 ROUTING 2 2 65 ROUTING 3 4 67 ROUTING 4 4 69 SCENE 1 5 131 SCENE 2 5 135 SCENE 3 5 136 SCENE 4 5 206 SCENE 5 5 204 SETUP 1 4 196 SETUP 2 4 203 SETUP 3 4 198 SETUP 4 4 201 UTILITY 1 4 209 UTILITY 2 4 210 UTILITY 3 4 211 UTILITY 4 4 213 214 VIEW 1 2 44 VIEW 2 2 48 PAIR 1 2 page 184 PAIR 2 2 page 185 Pairing channels 184 Pan controls 24 38 gang 37 using 36 PAN 1 1 page 36 Parameter change data format 262 receive enable 159 transmit enable 159 Peak hold 42 PEAK indicators 27 Phantom power 26 Phase 32 PHASE 1 1 page 33 PHONES LEVEL control 30 PLAY icon automix 147 POWER switch 13 Pre EQ Direct Out 199 Pre Fader Direct Out 199 Preferences 198 Presets dynamics programs 90 effects programs 105 112 EQ programs 58 Program change assign to scene memories 160 data format 262 receive enable 159 transmit enable 159 Programmable Mixer 01 MIDI remote 169 parameter to control change assign 164 Programs bulk dump 161 channel 48 dynamics 76 90 effects 105 112 EQ 54 58 ProR3 MIDI remote 178 Protecting scene memories 134 Pro Tools MIDI remote 180 R Rea
85. Internal Effects Press the AUX 7 button The AUX 7 page appears Select a channel using the SEL buttons or the cursor buttons To turn the send on press the ON button in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls The LED inset in the button illuminates Note The ON button is the only way to turn the send on or off To change the aux send from pre to post fader press the ENTER button The icon is highlighted and the text changes to POST when the signal is post fader Note Pre or post fader selection can only be made from the AUX pages To change the signal level adjust the fader or rotary encoder until the desired value is obtained Note AUX 7 and AUX 8 are identical O2R User s Guide AUX 7 and AUX 8 The AUX functions for AUX 7 and AUX 8 set the channel send levels to either of these effects buses Similar to the functions for AUX 1 through AUX 6 you select an effect bus and then set the levels of a group of input channels You can also select whether to send the signals pre or post fader Fader Status When the AUX functions are selected the faders change from channel level controls to auxiliary send level controls The faders automatically move to the corresponding auxiliary send levels Note Avoid blocking the fader movements when the faders move to their auxiliary send positions by placing objects on the 02 R It is possible to damage the faders The AUX LED of the
86. Memory Full Automix memory is full MIDI Ch Mismatch The device number of the received bulk data is not correct No Aux Send There is no AUX send from EFF1 to AUX7 or EFF2 to AUX8 No Time Code Time code is not being input Preset is read only You cannot store data to the preset memory Redone The previous operation was redone Scene 0 is read only You cannot store data to Scene 0 Scene Memory Protected Scene memory is write protected Select Channel A channel for extract has not been assigned Select Parameter The parameter for extract has not been assigned Set Overwrite Set the overwrite parameter SOLO Ready The track is ready for solo SOLO Slave You cannot change the solo status and the Solo key is disabled if the unit is a cascade slave SUB gt MAIN Disconnected Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center SUB SCIO Framing Err Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center SUB SCIO OverRun Err Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center O2R User s Guide Specifications 253 Error Message SUB 5 0 Party Err Corrective Action Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center SUB SCIO RxBuf Full MIDI data being transmitted is too large SUB SCIO TxBuf Full MIDI data being received is too large SUB 5 Framing Err Check the MIDI connection SUB SCI1 OverRun Err Check the MIDI conne
87. O24 MTC nT OMID Automix Overwri te OO ENABLE OFADER OCH ON OPAN OER OSURROUN Edit Out Fader Edit Mode OenND ORET BABSOLUTE ORELATIVE UNDO RUTO REC REC PLAY STOP ABORT 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired Overwrite items and press the ENTER button Note Ifyou double click the ENTER button on a selected Overwrite item only that item will be selected and the other items will be switched off 3 Select the REC icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The REC icon will flash 4 Press the SEL buttons for the tape return channels you want to overwrite It is very important that you be careful when you select the type of events and channels that will be overwritten If you select the same channel and the same type of event as the last session the previously recorded events will be deleted the moment the automix recording begins 5 Start the device that is providing the timecode It should have been rewound and again start from a location before the music starts The previously recorded automix will playback AUTOMIX Mixing and Automix 77 6 While monitoring the recording adjust the parameters you want to overwrite 7 When you have completed the automix overwriting session use the CURSOR buttons to select the STOP icon and press the ENTER button You may find it faster and more convenient to stop the automix recording session by
88. SEL buttons 1 to 16 CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel To remind you of this the message gt gt gt gt REMOTE lt lt lt lt flashes at the bottom of the MIDI 5 5 page The various remote configurations are explained on the following pages MIDI 167 BUS AUX Master Bus Aux Master page is not really a MIDI Remote page because it controls the bus out aux send and stereo master levels of the 02R itself Although similar to the METER 3 3 page this page allows you to use the O2R faders instead of the encoder wheel to set the levels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 ST 40 EMOTE Ean e BUS AUX Master 18 11 1 516 ST 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 EBESIESIESTESTESIEDIES EDIZIESTESTESOESYETIES E LW BUS While the BUS AUX Master page is selected channel SEL buttons 1 to 14 can be used to make and break bus and aux pairs To make a pair press and hold the SEL buttons of both channels When the Make Pair dialog box appears select EXECUTE to pair the channels Which channel s settings are copied to the other channel depends on which SEL button you press first For example if you press the MIC 1 SEL button and then MIC 2 SEL button the settings of the bus 1 channel are copied to the bus 2 channel and vice versa The Make Pair dialog box shown below indicates in which direction the channels settings will be c
89. Seiting Range Description Dly L 220 0ms 0 1 500 0ms Left channel delay time FB G L 44 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain DIy R 180 0ms 0 1 500 0ms Right channel delay time FB G R 55 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain Hi Ratio 0 2 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio LPF THRU 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Ini Dly 0 1ms 0 1 320 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections L gt R Bal 096 0 100 Feeds left channel signal back to the right channel R gt L Bal 0 0 100 Feeds right channel signal back to the left channel Program 29 CROSS ECHO The echo feedback signal crosses from left to right and from right to left Parameter Setting DIy L 200 0ms FB G L 40 Dly R 350 0ms FB G R 40 Hi Ratio 0 4 LPF THRU HPF THRU Ini Dly 0 1ms L gt R Bal 34 R gt L Bal 34 Range Same as program 28 Program 30 CROSS DELAY The echo feedback signal crosses completely Parameter Setting DIy L 220 0ms FB G L 44 Dly R 180 0ms FB G R 55 Hi Ratio 0 2 LPF THRU HPF THRU Ini Dly 0 1ms L gt R Bal 100 R gt L Bal 100 Range Same as program 28 Description Same as program 28 Description Same as program 28 026 User s Guide 122 Internal Effects Program 31 CHORUSI A stereo chorus Creates a rich thickening effect
90. Send Level on page 43 of the Getting Started Guide 1 Press the AUX 5 button 2 Select MIC LINE 1 using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons Turn the aux send on by pressing the AUX 5 button and then the ON button in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls You should leave the send pre fader This will allow the musicians to continue to hear each other independently of anything you may be doing in the control room 3 Press the AUX 5 button of the STUDIO buttons group You should also press the AUX 5 button of the CONTROL ROOM buttons group so you can hear the results of adjusting the levels 4 Adjust the fader for MIC LINE 1 until the desired signal level is obtained Use the Talkback system to check with your musicians to see if they are content with the signal levels you have set When you finish setting the studio monitor levels press the ST button of the CONTROL ROOM buttons group for monitoring in the control room 02 Getting Started Guide 46 Secondary Recording Tutorial 02 Getting Started Guide Applying Effects The 02R features two internal multi effects stereo processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 These are fed by AUX 7 and AUX 8 and the processed signals are returned via EFF 1 RTN and EFF 2 RTN respectively When you use the internal effects the signal gets processed without ever leaving the digital domain Effects can be applied to input channels or the tape return channels
91. TAPE 1 2 box the first box in the SLOT1 row and press the ENTER button The current wordclock source is indicated by a highlighted icon See Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide for further details Installing Options 227 Digital O Card ADAT CD8 AT The digital I O card CD8 AT is used to connect Alesis ADAT compatible modular digital multitrack recorders to the 02R Installing the CD8 AT The ADAT digital I O card CD8 AT is a single slot card For installation instructions see Single Slot Cards on page 221 of the User s Guide 1 Connect the ADAT modular digital multitrack recorder to the 02R using the appropriate connectors ojojojojojojo conn ALESIS ADAT 2000 Word clock master oona 02R Word clock slave Wi k sl 750 Switch ON RDI Cle sae o Use the special ADAT optical cables to plug the IN connector of the CD8 AT to the OPTICAL OUT connector of the ADAT modular digital multitrack recorder Plug the OUT connector of the CD8 AT to the OPTICALIN connector of the ADAT recorder If you have installed more than one CD8 AT in the 02R and have more than one ADAT recorder c
92. User s Guide Installing Options 233 Solo function When two or more 02R units are cascaded together only the SOLO button on the cascade master continues to function When you press the SOLO button on the cascade master however you can solo individual channels on the cascade slaves 1 On the 02R cascade master use the SETUP button to locate the SETUP 1 4 page Select the Mode field with the CURSOR buttons to set the solo function status You can only set this status on the cascade master See Solo on page 196 of the User s Guide for further details On the 02R cascade master press the SOLO button The LEDs inset in the ON buttons of all the cascaded 02R units will flash Press the ON button of the channel or channels that you want to solo In Recording mode the channel signal is sent to the Solo bus on the cascade master and you can monitor the signal using the monitor system connected to the cascade master In Mixdown mode the channel signal is sent to the Stereo bus 026 User s Guide 234 Installing Options Digital I O Card TDIF 1 CD8 TDII The TDIF 1 digital I O card CD8 TDII is used to connect TASCAM TDIF 1 modular digital multitrack recorders such as the DA 88 to the 02R Installing the CD8 TDII The TDIF 1 digital I O card CD8 TDII is a single slot card For installation instructions see Single Slot Cards on page 221 of the User s Guide 1 Connect
93. and effect returns and the auxiliary sends and buses are all metered using the METER display function The control room output is metered using the dedicated 21 segment LED meters Peak hold is available for all meters METER Select a channel using Meter Paaes the SEL buttons or the 9 CURSOR buttons There are three pages to the METER function The first page shown below Use the CURSOR buttons contains the meters for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 and appears when one to select the PEAK HOLD these channels is selected icon and press the ENTER button to switch the function on or off Select one of the meter source point icons PRE EQ POST EQ or POST FADER with the 5 CURSOR buttons Make it the current meter point MN by pressing the ENTER utton The second METER page shown below contains the meters for TAPE channels 1 to 16 and effects returns EFF 1 and EFF 2 and appears when one of these channels is selected PEAK HOLD PRE EQ iss POST EG 2 POST FRD 9 026 User s Guide 42 MIXING Display Functions Setting the Bus Out and The third METER page contains the meters for the bus outs aux sends and Aux Send Levels 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select one of the fader icons 2 Adjust the level by rotating the encoder wheel the stereo output plus the master faders for the bus outs and aux sends and appears when one of these chan
94. as program 20 Description Same as program 20 O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 119 Program 22 DELAY gt EARLY REF This effect creates early reflection sound after a delay Parameter Setting Range Description Delay 256 0ms 0 1 320 0ms Delay time FB Gain 43 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect Hi Ratio 0 3 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio Type Random ER type Choose S Hall L Hall Random Reverse Plate or Spring RoomSize 6 8 0 1 20 Time interval between the early reflections Liveness 4 0 10 Rate at which reflected sounds fade or decay Diff 3 0 10 Reverb diffusion Ini Dly 8 0ms 0 1 200 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections ER Num 12 1 15 Number of early reflections Depth 4796 0 100 Reverb depth The amount of reverb Program 23 DELAY L C R 1 A three part delay with independent delay time parameters for left right and center Parameter Setting Range Description Dly L 125 0ms 0 1 1000 0ms Left channel delay time DIy R 250 0ms 0 1 1000 0ms Right channel delay time DIy C 500 0ms 0 1 1000 0ms Centre channel delay time Level C 57 100 to 100 Centre delay volume level FB Dly 125 0ms 0 1 1000 0ms Feedback delay The delay time before feedback starts FB Gain 20 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect Hi Ratio 0 8 0
95. auxiliary channel with the CURSOR buttons Each time you press the ENTER button the setting alternates between pre and post fader To adjust the signal or to turn the send on or off you need to use the AUX controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL group The SEND LEVEL control adjusts the signal level and the ON button turns the send on or off See The AUX Buttons on page 99 as well as AUX 7 and AUX 8 on page 106 of the User s Guide EQ When the cursor is on the ON icon pressing the ENTER button will turn the EQ on or off When the EQ is on the icon text is ON and is highlighted Use the CURSOR buttons to select the EQ curve icon and press the ENTER button The 02R will switch to the EQ display function See EQ on page 51 of the User s Guide To return to the VIEW display function press the VIEW button again You may find using the EQUALIZER controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL group a more convenient way to set the equalization See EQ controls on page 53 of the User s Guide Dynamics When the cursor is on the OFF icon pressing the ENTER button will turn the dynamics processor on or off When the dynamics processor is off the icon text is OFF and is displayed in normal video Use the CURSOR buttons to select the dynamics curve and press the ENTER button The 02R will switch to the DYNAMICS display function See DYNAMICS Display Function on page 83 of the User s Guide To return to the V
96. can create a Program Change Assign table and save it to a data storage device such as a MIDI data filer by executing the Program Change Assign table Bulk Dump command Use the MIDI button to locate the MIDI 3 5 page MIDI Select the TYPE of data you want to dump or request with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select the NUMBER field and use the encoder wheel to select the desired program or memory Select the EXECUTE command with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button to execute the MIDI bulk dump or request MIDI 161 Bulk Dump Request The 02R uses MIDI Bulk Dump and Request messages to store or recall scene memories automix memories system setup and program change tables and effects dynamics EQ and channel library programs Shown below is the MIDI 3 5 page MIDI Bulk Dump amp Request SE MIDI Bulk Dump amp Reauest 86 NUMBER SCENE AUTOMIX EG LIB DV LIB EXECUTE BULK DUMP BULK REQUEST DUMP ALL 5 ALL STATUS Type This function allows you to select eight types of 02R data to Bulk Dump or Bulk Request Scene Memories e Automix Memories e Channel Library Programs e Dynamics Library Programs e Effect Library Programs e EQ Library Programs e System Setup e Program Change Assign Table Number For all of the data types except the System Setup and Program Change Assign Table
97. channel 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the ST LINK icon and then press the ENTER button 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the PATTERN parameter and the encoder wheel to select a pattern Linking Channels for Surround Pan For stereo input channels 17 to 24 or mono input channels configured as a stereo pair you can select one of eight patterns and move both sounds together The following illustration shows how the two channels are panned with the various patterns and trajectories x M M P pl MCN 27 795 se 1 1 eu e 1 E Note ST LINK settings are not stored in channel library programs So when channel program is recalled and the destination channel is using ST LINK the surround settings of the other linked channel are changed to match Also when the surround settings of a stereo channel are stored only the settings of the selected channel are stored By default ST LINK is turned on for stereo channels Note that if just the ST LINK parameter is turned off it is possible to overwrite the pan movements of the other channel during subsequent automix recording O2R User s Guide Use the ROUTING button to locate the ROUTING 4 4 page ROUTING Use the CURSOR buttons to select the CSR control Use the encoder wheel to set the CSR ratio Surround Pan 73 CSR Center Side Ratio For the 3 1 and 3 2 1 surround modes that use a ce
98. circle Small speaker 9 a a icons above and below the pan graph indicate the trajectory selected surround pan mode In this example two When the FAST icon is speakers at the front and two at the rear indicate that highlighted sounds can 242 surround mode is selected Next to each speaker is be moved at high a signal level meter indicating the master bus out level speed ma Selecting a speaker icon and then pressing the To return to the ROUTING 5 hen ENTER button makes the sound jump to that speaker 3 4 page select the EXIT In 3 2 1 mode a subwoofer level control is available icon and press the on this page ENTER button To quickly move a sound to the default position select the left right trajectory icon and double click the ENTER button 02R User s Guide 70 Surround Pan Trajectories The following surround pan trajectories are available Left to right The sound moves from left to right The following illustrations show some typical left to right trajectories Ea Front to rear The sound moves from front to back The following illustrations show some typical front to rear trajectories Rear left to front right diagonal The sound moves on a diagonal trajectory from the rear left to the front right Width depth and offset can be set for this trajectory The following illustrations show some typical trajectories Front left to rear right diagonal The sound moves on a diagonal
99. customize your 02R so that when you adjust any of the controls in this group the display switches to the ROUTING page See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide AUX controls The AUX buttons allow you to select the auxiliary buses you want to send the selected channel signal to The SEND LEVEL rotary encoder is used to set the level indicated by the adjacent LED bargraph The ON button is used to turn the send on or off This allows you to make quick A B comparisons 02R User s Guide 24 User Interface PAN controls mom L ODD R EVEN DD EVEN These controls allow you to set the pan position of the selected channel The L ODD and R EVEN buttons select the left odd and right even channels Use the rotary encoder to adjust the pan position The current position is indicated on the adjacent LED bargraph Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust any of the controls in this group the display switches to the PAN page See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide EQUALIZER controls LOW HPF L MID H MID EQUALIZER These controls allow you to adjust the EQ of the selected channel Select the band you want to adjust with one the buttons in the top row LOW HPF L MID H MID or HIGH LPF The three LED indicators will reflect the status of the selected band Adjust the val
100. data you can select the number of the program or memory you want to dump or request The list shows the program number and its corresponding name Execute There are four commands you can execute 02R User s Guide 162 MIDI O2R User s Guide BULK DUMP the data of the selected type and number will be output to the connected MIDI device BULK REQUEST the 02R will request the selected type and number from the connected MIDI device e DUMP ALL all the programs or memories of the selected data type will be transmitted to the connected MIDI device e REQUEST ALL the 02R will request all the programs or memories of the selected data type from the connected MIDI device When you execute one of the above commands the 02R displays its current status in the STATUS field at the bottom of the display You can abort a bulk data transmission by moving the cursor with the CURSOR buttons Important Do not turn off the 02R while transmitting or receiving Bulk Dump data Doing so may damage the data stored in the 02R MIDI 163 Fader Start When the Fader Start preference is checked Preferences on page 198 a MIDI Note On message velocity 127 is transmitted when a fader is raised from infinity 00 When the fader is moved back to infinity a corresponding MIDI Note Off message velocity 0 is transmitted This can be used in conjunction with a MIDI to trigger interface box to automatically sta
101. demo song e Amplifiers and speakers or headphones e Amwultitrack recorder and a stereo master recorder e Audio connecting cables Making the Connections 1 Connect your sound source to input channel 1 If you are using a stereo sound source connect it to input channel 2 as well A stereo source is not essential and for most of the tutorials it will probably be easier to work with just one channel If your sound source has XLR type connectors connect it to the XLR type connectors on the 02R Otherwise use the phone jacks and select INPUT B with the A B switch 2 Connect the MONITOR OUT connectors to the inputs on your power amplifier If you are using headphones connect them to the PHONES jack 3 Connect your multitrack recorder to the appropriate optional input output card You can also connect your stereo master recorder to either the digital or analog STEREO OUT connectors 4 Plug the O2R into a suitable AC receptacle 02R Getting Started Guide Getting Started 15 Basic Setup The following illustration shows how to set up a minimal system that will allow you to perform the following tutorials Amplifier Sound Source Multitrack recorder Jo a o jo Jo Jo
102. effect on the input signal 02R User s Guide 86 Dynamics KEY IN and LINK Indicators The channel KEY IN settings and LINK settings are shown below DYNAMICS KEVIN SELF POST EG ST LINK OFF TRPE 000000202202 BASSI Threshold Ratio Out Gain 220500020 0 Q 0 SGOT G2 03 04105 06 ams Sms hard Attack Release Knee VOOOOOOOOOOOOO 2 3 4 3 673 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 The settings can be changed with the CURSOR buttons and the encoder wheel or the ENTER button The following table shows the meaning of the KEY IN icons Icon Meaning SELF POST EQ the trigger is taken from the current channel after the equalization SELF PRE EQ the trigger is taken from the current channel before equalization LEFT POST EQ the trigger is taken from the left channel after the equalization LEFT PRE EQ the trigger is taken from the left channel before equalization 1 AUX 1 the trigger is taken from the first auxiliary channel EE SENE E A2 AUX 2 the trigger is taken from the second auxiliary channel The KEY IN icons duplicate the KEY IN prompt giving you a faster visual indication of the channel status When the cursor is on a KEY IN icon press the ENTER button to select that channel The only way you can select the output buses 1 through 8 is with this method The LINK icons duplicate the ST LINK prompt giving you a faster visual i
103. for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 and TAPE channels 1 to 16 The same source can be selected for several channels Bus outs can be patched through to the TAPE channels for bus out monitoring and subgrouping To prevent a feedback loop you cannot select bus outs to which a channel is routed or route a channel to the bus selected as its signal source In either case a warning message appears Shown below is the TAPE 1 8 page of SCENE 4 5 On this page you can select a card input from 1 to 8 or the corresponding bus out for TAPE channels 1 to 8 SEE Input Patchins SERE Card Slot 1 4 6B Channel 5 m D im APE APE APE IJI 2 23 21 23 2 mi D a T 20 m u en en o2 Shown below is the TAPE 9 16 page of SCENE 4 5 On this page you can select a card input from 9 to 16 or the corresponding bus out for TAPE channels 9 to 16 SEE Input Patchins SE Card Slot 2 Channel 2 SHIGE TAPE E APEI APEI RPET RPE1 RPE1 In 24bit MODE you cannot select individual buses If you attempt to select a bus the confirmation dialog box shown here appears Choose EXECUTE to assign all buses to the card inputs Please Confirm Rssisn all Busses CANCEL EXECUTE 026 User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 207 Likewise if a slot is configured for 24bit MODE all buses are assigned to the card inputs and you Please Confirm A 1 1 ancel
104. from 96 dB to 0 dB Watch the level meters to ensure you are not driving the 02R into digital clipping Wave Form These icons allow you to select the wave form you want output The 02R can generate four different wave forms Sine 100 2 Sine 1kHz Sine 10kHz and Noise e BUS Assign Select the output buses 1 through 8 e Stereo Assign Select the stereo bus e Aux Assign Select the auxiliary buses 1 through 8 026 User s Guide 210 Digital I O Setup and Utilities 1 Use the UTILITY button to locate the UTILITY 2 4 page UTILITY Emphasis Monitor This function allows you to monitor the emphasis information of the digital inputs If an input digital signal was recorded with emphasis a technique used in early digital recordings to compensate for the deficiencies of the hardware of the period similar to Dolby or dbx noise reduction for analog the 02R can compensate by applying de emphasis to the signal before further processing Note When the 02R receives data that has been processed with emphasis ON it will automatically process the data by applying de emphasis It will continue processing the signal internally and will subsequently out put the data with emphasis OFF Regardless of whether a signal has been received with emphasis ON the 02R will always output the signal with emphasis OFF Shown below is the UTILITY 2 4 page Emphasis Monitor 1 2 3 4 TAPE 9 10 1
105. gus ER este 37 PAN controls he Na eae ae M 38 ROUNE utei ete e eder 39 ROUTING buttons e 40 026 User s Guide iv Contents Metering ado aio ened a ena ein E e e E RARE Rd 41 ede oed apt aA M o Me 44 Channel Library 060 ie ea 48 ose DURER e CR a a od 51 EQ controls zii E REN ed bate aa 53 EQ Programs ciu fee sada ae oed uus eae t le nas 54 EQ Libraty i etes epe ec epa da med 55 Preset EQ Program 58 Surround 63 About Surround 64 Selecting a Surround 65 Panning Sounds 67 Panning Sounds Using the 69 Linking Channels for Surround Pan 72 CSR Center Side 73 DYNGOMICS sos 75 Dynamics Processors 76 Preset Dynamics Programs 76 CompressoE A eo d te e e eis 77 Expanders et e RP e 79 srne ei ei ard eben
106. hours minutes seconds and frames If you select INT internal timecode the timecode counters starts straightaway For MIDI Clock timecode is displayed in bars beats Bar Beat and MIDI clocks l 1 00 Offset Using an offset automix events can be moved backwards or forwards relative to the incoming timecode For the SMPTE MTC and INT time references offset is specified in hours minutes seconds a and frames For MIDI it s specified in bars beats MIDI clocks and Time Signature LC 24 Timecode and Frame Rate Select the timecode type from the following list e SMPTE timecode e MITC MIDI Timecode e INT internal SMPTE MIDI MIDI Clock Select the timecode frame rate from the following list e 24 frames per second e 25 frames per second e 29 97 frames per second 30 drop frame 30 frames per second 29 97 30 non drop frame Automix ENABLE When the 02R receives timecode during enable status box checked it will start playback of the AUTOMIX or recording if it is in REC ready mode If the 02R is in disable status the AUTOMIX will not function 02R User s Guide 146 Automix O2R User s Guide Overwrite Mode The Overwrite check boxes can be used to select certain parameters for automix recording These are FADER CH ON PAN EQ or SURROUND The FADER check box includes rotary encoders and AUX send levels The following parameters are not
107. individually Since it is relatively easy to set them at this point take time and care If you have to adjust them later in the mixing process you may need to adjust the faders auxiliary sends and other levels as well Channel ON OFF The channel ON buttons are used to turn channels ON or OFF This function is sometimes called MUTE When you recall Scene Memory 0 0 Initial Data all the channels are turned ON 1 Press the channel ON button for MIC LINE 1 The sound is cut and the LED inset in the ON button switches off Note Even though you can no longer hear the sound source the meter for MIC LINE 1 continues to be displayed This is because the meter signal is sourced before the ON button 2 Press the ON button again to turn the channel back ON The LED inset in the ON button illuminates again and you will be able to hear the sound source again SCENE MEMORY LED The 2 digit 7 segment LED shows the currently selected scene memory It also contains the Edit Indicator which will start flashing when you adjust the first digital parameter of the current scene memory See Scene Memories on page 62 of the Getting Started Guide 02 Getting Started Guide 24 Introductory Recording Tutorial SEL 02 Getting Started Guide Applying EQ The next step is to apply EQ to MIC LINE 1 Each 02R channel features a four band fully parametric EQ with variable bandwidth Q frequency F and gain
108. input channel and the stereo master channel utilizes a 100 mm motorized fader When a scene memory is recalled the faders position themselves automatically to the levels stored Fader movements are replayed automatically in synchronization with timecode automix during playback The faders allow you to quickly and accurately set the levels for the selected channels By pressing the FLIP button you can transfer fader control over your tape returns as well Faders can be grouped into one of four fader groups for control of multiple faders from a single control There are also four mute groups which allow you to toggle a group of channels on or off You can also control two adjacent channels in stereo with the pair operation using only one fader Internal Stereo Effects The 02R features eight aux sends two of which are routed to the internal multi effects stereo processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 Using the power of Yamaha s proprietary effects processor chip the 02R has a startling range of special effects available to apply to your mix Shimmering reverbs clean and precise delays flanging and chorus and a myriad of other effects are available built right into this mixer The effects are processed entirely within the digital domain ensuring the signal quality is the finest that a digital system can provide External effects processors can be patched into the system using the 02R s analog AUX send outputs which feature 18 bit linear 8 t
109. last channels edited automatically selects all the channels that were edited last for subsequent edits e Surround X Y Edit With this option checked surround pan X and Y movements can be recorded in an automix The Extract Copy and Move functions on the AUTOMIX 4 7 page only affect the X and Y data when this box is checked e Surround CSR Edit With this option checked surround pan CSR movements can be recorded in an automix The Extract Copy and Move functions on the AUTOMIX 4 7 page only affect the CSR data when this box is checked 026 User s Guide 202 Digital I O Setup and Utilities O2R User s Guide Surround SWF Edit With this option checked surround pan SWF subwoofer level movements can be recorded in an automix The Extract Copy and Move functions on the AUTOMIX 4 7 page only affect the SWF data when this box is checked Link Surround Master With this option checked the surround master level can be controlled using the STEREO fader Auto Inc TC Capture With this option checked the timecode capture memory is incremented automatically as timecode addresses are captured Compact Automix Bulk With this option checked automix data is compressed before Bulk Dump transmission so it uses less memory on the storage device Data is automatically uncompressed when it s dumped back to the 02R Do not use this function when transmitting automix data to a Version 1 02R Compact Scene Bulk With th
110. levels for the tape return channels can be operated by the faders You can also use the rotary encoders to set the tape return levels The effect return levels can only be adjusted with the rotary encoders Note When you press the FLIP button the faders will automatically move to the levels of the opposite channels from input levels to tape return levels Avoid blocking the fader movements when the faders reposition by placing objects on the O2R It is possible to damage the faders SELECTED CHANNEL Controls You can use the SEND LEVEL encoder in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls to set the signal level to the auxiliary bus The method of working with these controls is different than working with the DISPLAY ACCESS AUX buttons 02R User s Guide 100 Auxiliary Channels Select a channel with the SEL buttons Select the auxiliary bus with the AUX 1 through AUX 8 EFF 2 buttons Turn the send on or off with the ON button Adjust the send level with the SEND LEVEL encoder QO SEND LEVEL AUX Pages The channel aux send level controls for each aux send are displayed on two pages The first page shown below shows aux controls for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 Select this page using a MIC LINE SEL button BE 3i EB The second page shows aux controls for TAPE channels 1 to 16 and effects returns 1 and 2 Select this page using a TAPE or EFF RTN SEL button ABs Es
111. memories automix programs and clears all user library programs from the channel dynamics effect and EQ libraries Note Ifyou just want to reset the current mix settings recall Scene Memory 0 See Initial Data and UNDO Memory on page 129 of the User s Guide Initialization consists of e Clearing all user RAM settings all scene memories except Scene Memory 0 automix programs and user library programs from the channel dynamics effect and EQ libraries e Initializing the Edit Buffer See What is the Edit Buffer on page 129 of the User s Guide e Initializing the Program Change table list of scene memories to MIDI Program Change numbers See Program Change Assign on page 160 of the User s Guide e Coping Scene Memory 0 to the Edit Buffer Initializing the input and output ports e Calibrating the faders Note Avoid blocking the fader movements by placing objects on the 02 while the faders are calibrating themselves It is possible to damage the faders e Refreshing the display The SCENE 1 1 page appears Fader Calibration This operation allows you to calibrate the faders 1 Turn off the O2R 2 Press and hold the ENTER button then turn the 02R back on The faders are calibrated Note Avoid blocking the fader movements by placing objects on the 02R while the faders are being calibrated It is possible to damage the faders 02R User s Guide Installing Options 217 Instal
112. mind you can restore the deleted events using the Undo function You can undo only the last operation AUTOMIX Mixing Automix 87 Using the Automix Library Storing an Automix An automix can be stored in one of the 16 automix memories available on the Memory Management page shown below 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 2 7 page RUTOMIH 2 7 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the TITLE EDIT box 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to move the cursor within the title and the encoder wheel to select the characters Automix titles can be up to 16 characters long and the following characters are available 0111213145167 8191 1531 1 E 1 5 2 pq rst z 1 You can select the INS icon to insert a space at the cursor position in the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The DEL icon is used to delete the character at the cursor position in the TITLE EDIT box Note The COPY and PASTE icons allow you to select the title from another automix program and paste it into your program for subsequent editing These icons only copy the title See AUTOMIX Name Edit Functions on page 149 of the User
113. ms 133 Threshold dB 10 1 3 5 Attack ms 9 Outgain dB 3 0 Knee hard Release ms 250 Dynamics 91 Description Gate for the same purpose as program 5 Soft compander for the same purpose as program 5 Expander for acoustic toms automatically reduces the volume when the toms are not played helping to differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly Soft compander to emphasize the attack and ambience of cymbals using overhead microphones It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played helping differentiate the bass and snare drums clearly Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a finger picked electric bass guitar Compressor to equalize the attack and volume level of a slap electric bass guitar Compressor to adjust and or emphasize the level of a synth bass O2R User s Guide 92 Dynamics No Name Type Parameter Value Description Threshold dB 9 Compressor to brighten the tonal Ratio 1 25 color of a piano Attack ms 17 14 Pianoi CMP Compressor Outgain dB 1 0 Knee hard Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 A variation on program 14 Ratio 1 3 5 adjusting the attack and entire 5 level using deeper threshold Attack ms 7 15 Piano2 CMP Compressor Outgain dB 6 0 Knee 2 Release ms 174 Threshold dB 8 Compressor for backing Ratio 1 35 pe
114. on for the remainder of this tutorial Setting the Gain 1 Select the gain icon for the LOW band using the CURSOR buttons Alternatively press the LOW HPF button of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls 2 Rotate the encoder wheel clockwise to boost the gain Alternatively you could use the EQUALIZER G control 02 Getting Started Guide 26 Introductory Recording Tutorial 02 Getting Started Guide The gain increases in 0 5 dB steps and the EQ curve on the EQ page changes to reflect this 3 Rotate the encoder wheel counterclockwise to reduce the gain The gain decreases in 0 5 dB steps Alternatively you could use the EQUALIZER G control 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the gain G icon for the L MID band and adjust its level with the encoder wheel Select the other bands as well You can also select the EQ bands using the LOW HPF L MID H MID and HIGH LPF buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls Note Applying a lot of EQ boost may increase the signal level sufficiently to cause distortion If this does occur reduce the amount of EQ boost or adjust the attenuation level to compensate the ATT icon You can switch back to the METER 1 3 page and select POST EQ to monitor the signal levels Note You can reset the gain of each band to 0 0 dB by double clicking the corresponding LOW HPF L MID H MID or HIGH LPF buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER
115. or by operating a control on that page For example operating fader 16 displays the first page while operating fader 17 18 displays the second page MIDI 5 5 MIC2 E 2 REMOTES When the 0265 are first connected or turned on use the CONNECT function to update the controlling 02R so that its controls match those of the remote 02R When the CONNECT function is used the settings from the remote 02R are copied to the controlling 02R Scene memories on the remote 02R can be recalled from either page To do this use the PGM parameter to select a MIDI Program Change from 0 to 127 When the RCL icon is pressed the corresponding scene memory is recalled on the remote 02R and the controlling 02R controls move to their new positions The SCENE number and TITLE parameters do not change until the scene is recalled Then they display the scene memory number and title The controlling 02R fader positions correspond to fader positions on the remote 02R Likewise the indicators in the controlling 02R ON buttons show which channels on the remote 02R are turned on and which are turned off REMOTE2 i ENOTES REMOTES E A MIDI CH l CL RTN2 O2R User s Guide Yamaha 03D Digital Mixing MIDI 173 Console 02R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a Yamaha 03D Digital Mixing Console
116. pair pan controls remain independent Using the Gang function pan controls of adjacent channels can be ganged together indicated by dotted lines between the two controls as shown below a ala ala 59060 mole wale m To cancel the Gang function press the ENTER button again The dotted lines between the pan controls disappear Stereo Width When channels are configured as a stereo pair the width of a stereo signal can be set using the pan controls When the pan controls are set hard left and hard right the stereo width is 100 With both pans set to center the stereo width is 0 Setting the controls to a position in between allows you to set the stereo width from 0 to 100 To maintain a central balance however you must set both controls to a corresponding left and right values For example L5 and R5 or L10 and R10 02R User s Guide 38 MIXING Display Functions O2R User s Guide Switching to Gang mode allows you to reposition the stereo signal within the stereo field For example you could set L5 and R10 before you Gang the channels After you press ENTER adjusting either channel moves the other a corresponding amount If you set the left channel to L7 the right channel would adjust to R8 TAPE6 OOOO RIG R8 olf ole m n o ool ala ale m 16 Ri6 116 Ri6 EFF 1 EFF2 PAN controls You can also adjust the pan position or balance of the se
117. parameters FADER CH ON PAN EQ SURROUND aux send level or MIDI Remote RET works only with fader events RELATIVE In Relative mode real time fader edits are recorded relative to existing fader events i e the new fader movements are added to or subtracted from existing events 02R User s Guide 152 Automix ABSOLUTE In Absolute mode real time fader edits are recorded as is i e the new fader movements overwrite the existing events RET Return With the RET option on the fader returns to the position previously recorded at the point recording stops You can specify the return time from 0 0 to 3 0 seconds The RET option works when automix recording is stopped using the STOP icon the incoming timecode is stopped or the channel is dropped out of recording using a SEL button END Write to End With the END option on the fader CH ON PAN EQ SURROUND aux send level or MIDI Remote remains at the position where recording stops and remains there all the way to the end of the automix i e data up to the end of the automix is rewritten to accommodate the new fader position The END option works only when automix recording is stopped using the STOP icon or the incoming timecode is stopped It has no effect if a channel is dropped out of recording using a SEL button With both the END and RET options on the fader returns to the position previously recorded at the point recording stops and remains at th
118. processing such as equalization or effects Some of these processes may boost the signal to digital clipping The 02R allows you to attenuate the digital signal to reduce the chances of clipping Automix system The 02R has an on board Automix system that memorizes fader positions switches individual channels on or off adjusts the equalization or pan positions and changes the auxiliary sends all based on timecode It can recall scene memories and programs from the EQ effects dynamics and channel libraries also determined by the recorded timecode You can record an entire mixing session and then edit the individual channel settings in multiple passes You can punch in to fine tune a specific parameter or you can use one of the event editors to adjust the timecode position of channel settings or scene and library changes Automix Memory The Automix system records each parameter change and the associated time as an event The parameters that are recorded include fader movements channel status and EQ changes and library recalls The more complicated the mix the more memory it consumes The 02R has a default of 480 kbytes of Automix memory Auxiliary send The auxiliary sends are used to feed signals from the input or tape return channels to external effects processors amplifiers or multitrack recording equipment The 02R has eight auxiliary sends Two of the sends feed the internal effects processors See Internal Effects 026
119. recording session by selecting the ABORT icon with the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button However the events recorded during the automix session will be discarded Note The ABORT function must be used before an automix recording has stopped Once the recording has stopped the automix data will be updated and a new current mix is created At this point after stopping an automix recording the UNDO function can be used to retrieve the previous automix data In most cases punch in edits or using the event editors can correct minor errors 7 Stop the device that is providing the timecode 02 Getting Started Guide 76 Mixing and Automix AUTOMIX WARNING careful that previously recorded events are not accidentally overwritten when you make these selections 02 Getting Started Guide Editing Automix Events Overwriting Events You can overwrite the events that have been recorded into the current automix You can alter events on an already recorded channel or you can record new events onto another channel For example you may first record the faders for the rhythm section to the automix and then overwrite the fader operations for the lead parts and vocals 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 1 7 page RUTOMIH 1 7 TAPE 1 Time Code Free Size ax C t 1k 00 00 00 00 479k 99 Undo Bk Offset INT Start Time 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frames Time Reference O3e0025
120. s Guide 02 Getting Started Guide 88 and Automix 02 Getting Started Guide 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STORE icon Use the encoder wheel to select an automix and press the ENTER button The 02R will display a popup confirmation request message asking if you want to store your settings in the selected automix program The popup has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The automix is stored Automix Memory Automix memory is shared between the current automix and the stored automixes This means that a Memory Full error message could appear even though there are empty automix locations A complex automix containing many events may exceed the memory capacity If this occurs backup and delete any unused automixes and attempt the STORE operation again The default capacity of the 02R automix memory is 480K You can expand this to 1 5 MB or 2 5 MB by installing the optional ME4M memory expansion kits Mixing Automix 89 Recalling an Automix 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 2 7 page AUTOMIX SE Memory Management 86 Automix Overwri te O ENABLE OFADER OCH ON OPAN OEO OSURRO
121. sec 2 8 ms to 63 4 sec 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 KHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Ratio controls the amount of companding the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level The hard compander CPH has a fixed ratio of 5 1 for expansion and the soft compander CPS has a fixed ratio of 1 5 1 for expansion Attack controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is companded almost immediately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the compander s output signal level Width is used to determine the distance in decibels between the expander and the compressor With a width of 90 dB the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor limiter With a smaller width 30dB and a hig
122. selected by the CONTROL ROOM buttons STEREO OUT ANALOG 1 and 2 connectors STEREO OUT 1 are balanced XLR 3 32 type connectors with a 4 dB nominal output level STEREO OUT 2 are unbalanced phono jacks with a 10 nominal output level These connectors output the main stereo signals for recording and can be connected to cassette and other analog recorders 2TR IN ANALOG 1 and 2 connectors 2TR IN 1 are balanced phone jacks with a 4 dB nominal input level 2TR IN 2 are unbalanced phono jacks with a 10 dBV nominal input level Signals input here are fed through to the CONTROL ROOM buttons 24 and are monitored in the control room or the studio The outputs of a 2 track master recorder can be connected here for confidence monitoring and playback Stereo input channels 17 to 24 These are pairs of balanced 1 4 phone jacks with a 40 to 4 dB nominal input level You can connect the return from a stereo effects unit to these input channels The signals from 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 can be routed to channels 17 18 and the signals from2TR IN DIGITAL 2 can be routed to channels 19 20 Input channels 9 to 16 These are balanced phone jack connectors The nominal input level is 60 dB to 4 dB Wiring is sleeve ground tip hot and ring cold They can be used with balanced or unbalanced plugs Input channels 1 to 8 INPUT A 1 to 8 are balanced XLR 3 31 type connectors The nominal input level 15 60 d
123. sound recorded on tape recorder The 02R supports four types of timecode e SMPTE timecode e MITC MIDI timecode e Internal timecode for leaning Automix MIDI MIDI Clock When you synchronize the 02R to an external device such as a multitrack recorder or MIDI sequencer the external device will provide SMPTE or MTC timecode to allow the automix to synchronize with the data on the recorder or sequencer Using SMPTE Timecode SMPTE timecode is a synchronization signal developed for the film and television industries Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers It is normally implemented as timing pulses converted into an audio signal and recorded onto tape or film Some devices are able to transmit SMPTE timecode directly SMPTE indicates an absolute time in hours minutes seconds frames There are four basic formats depending on the number of frames that a second is divided into e 24 frames per second e 25 frames per second e 29 97 frames per second 30 drop frame 30 frames per second 29 97 30 non drop frame Use SMPTE timecode when you want to synchronize an 02R automix with video recorders a multitrack recorder or other film and video post production recorders Automix 141 Connections If the connected device can directly output SMPTE timecode use an audio cable to connect the output to the TIME CODE INPUT SMPTE connector on the back of the 02R If the connected device does not hav
124. status monitor and the battery level check MIDI Set the MIDI channels build the program change table and control MIDI bulk data trans fers AUTOMIX Create store recall and play automix programs GROUP Set up the fader and mute groups PAIR Set up channel pairs O ATT Set phase and attenuation DELAY Set the channel delay PAN Set the pan position ROUTING Set the channel routing METER Meter the levels from the individual input chan nels the tape and effect return channels the 8 main busses and the 8 auxiliary busses VIEW Set all parameters for the selected channel and access the channel library EQ Set the equalization and access the EQ library DYNAMICS Set the dynamics processor and access the dynamics library AUX 1 to 6 Set the channel levels to the auxiliary busses AUX 7 and 8 Set the channel levels to the auxiliary busses and set the internal effect parameters User Interface 23 SELECTED CHANNEL Controls These controls are very similar in setup to the controls of an analog mixer You may find working with the buttons and controls of this section of the 02R is much faster and more intuitive than working through the pages of the DISPLAY ACCESS functions ROUTING buttons a o gt 9 ROUTING The routing buttons allow you to directly select the destination for the selected channel The LEDs in the buttons illuminate to indicate the status of the channel Note You can
125. stopping the device that is providing the timecode The effect is the same as if you selected the STOP function on the 02R The REC icon will change to normal and the STOP icon is highlighted The events recorded during the overwriting session will be added to the current automix memory 8 Stop the device that is providing the timecode Punch in Automix Data If you made a mistake in just one portion of the automix you can replace the erroneous data with a punch in 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 1 7 page 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired Overwrite items and press the ENTER button 3 Select the REC icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The REC icon will flash 4 Start the device that is providing the timecode It should have been rewound and again start from a location before the music starts The previously recorded automix will playback however because you have not selected any channels the 02R will remain in AUTOMIX RECORD READY status 02R Getting Started Guide 78 Mixing and Automix AUTOMIX 02 Getting Started Guide 5 Monitor the recording At the punch in location press the SEL buttons for the tape return channels you want to fix Recording will begin from the location where you pressed the SEL button Note From this point new events will be recorded and previously existing events will be deleted 6 While
126. the ENTER button The previous settings are restored Program Name Channel program names can be up to 16 characters long and can contain any of the following characters 1 7 2 99 amp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt 2 tu 2 O2R User s Guide Use the EQ button to select the EQ 1 2 page EQ Select a channel using the SEL buttons Use the CURSOR buttons to select the EQ ON icon Press the ENTER button to turn the EQ on or Off The icon changes from ON to OFF When the EQ is on the icon is highlighted Select a icon using the CURSOR buttons for example the F control for the H MID band To change the value of the selected item rotate the encoder wheel until the desired value is shown MIXING Display Functions 51 EQ The 02R is equipped with a four band fully parametric EQ with variable bandwidth center frequency gain and ON OFF parameters EQ can be applied to the input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 LINE 17 18 through 23 24 the tape and effect return channels TAPE 1 through 16 EFF1 and EFF2 and the stereo output For stereo channels the equalization curve is applied equally to both channels Shown below is the EQ 1
127. the CURSOR buttons and the ENTER button to operate the automix transport Fader Edit The Fader Edit page displays fader positions relative to previously recorded data and is convenient for real time fader edits 00 08 00 H Fader Edit sn 0298 ROTOR On Lure eser II s ne STEREO L Durga ns n pes ne ic Fader Edit Out Fader Edit Mode OEND ORET Time 8 68 GIABSOLUTE O RELATIVE The top half of the display shows the current fader positions graphically for the input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 LINE 17 18 through 23 24 the tape and effect return channels 1 through 16 EFF1 and EFF2 and the stereo output There is also the MOTOR ON icon The bottom of the display consists of two rows The first row allows you set the Fader Edit Out to END or RET set the Return time from 0 0 to 3 0 seconds and select the Fader Edit Mode ABSOLUTE or RELATIVE The last row contains the automix transport icons AUTOREC REC PLAY STOP or ABORT MOTOR ON When you select this icon the icon is in highlighted and the text reads MOTOR OFF the fader motors are switched off during playback of an automix The fader levels will still change according to the recording but the faders will not move Fader Edit amp Fader Edit Out Modes Real time fader edits can be performed in either Absolute or Relative mode and can also be combined with the END and RET Edit Out options The END option works with the Overwrite
128. the TASCAM DA 88 modular digital multitrack recorder to the 02R using the appropriate connectors CD8 TD WORD CLOCK IN DIGITAL yo TASCAM DA 88 Word clock Master SLOT 1 SLOT 2 20000 EE Ilaaiaepnpaaoonoaoogngnpo po Pelee miete ee eiaeaen ee eae lelali 21 Ea 02R Word clock slave Word clock slave 75Q switch ON Use the special cable to plug the connector of the CD8 AT to the DIGITAL I O connector of the TASCAM DA 88 recorder If you have installed more than one CD8 TDII in the 02R and have more than one TASCAM DA 88 recorder connect it in the same manner as the first unit The TASCAM DA 88 recorder is equipped with a WORD SYNC OUT connector Use a BNC cable to plug it into the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the back of the 02R If you are using more than one TASCAM DA 88 recorder make the first unit the wordclock master There are SYNC IN SYNC OUT connectors on the DA 88 recorders that allow them to run together DA 38s can not be used as wordclock master because they do not have aSYNC OUT connector O2R User s Guide Installing Options 235 Wordclock Selection 1 Power
129. the bus slot inside the 02 Make sure the card is properly secured with the screws that held the cover plate in place Turn on the O2R Verify that the card has been recognized by the 02R on the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page see Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide If the card was installed properly the 02R should correctly identify it in the appropriate slot Installing Options 223 Peak Meter Bridge and Wooden Side Panels 1 Turn off the 02 TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK ENSURE THE 02R IS TURNED OFF BEFORE YOU FASTEN ANY CONNECTORS OR UNDO ANY SCREWS Note Before you install the MBO2 on the 02R be certain to turn the power off Not only do you risk electrical shock you can also damage either the 02R or the MBO2 You may also invalidate any warranties for the 02R or the Peak Meter Bridge 02 2 Install the Peak Meter Bridge and or Wooden Side Panels as shown in the following diagram 3 Turn on O2R Verify that the 02 is functioning correctly Memory Expansion Kit The Memory Expansion Kit MEAM is a dealer service center installed option only Any attempt by a customer to install this option will invalidate any warranties for the 02R or the MEAM Please take your 02R to your YAMAHA dealer or a YAMAHA service center to have the Memory Expansion Kit MEAM installed in the 02R 026 User s Guide 224 Installing Options O2R User s Guide Analog I O Card AD DA CD8 AD
130. the se lected channel and access the channel li brary EQ Set the equalization and access the EQ li brary DYNAMICS Set the dynamics and access the dynamics library AUX buttons These buttons access the corresponding Display function Button Description AUX 1 to 6 Set the channel levels to the auxiliary bus ses AUX 7 and 8 Set the channel levels to the auxiliary bus ses and set the effect parameters 026 User s Guide 6 Controls and Connections O2R User s Guide Display and related controls 13 14 15 16 17 18 Edit Indicator Minne SCENE MEMORY indicator This 2 digit 7 segment LED shows the currently selected Scene Memory program It also contains the Edit Indicator which will start flashing when the current mix scene is first adjusted FADER STATUS indicators These LED indicators show the status of the faders When you select the AUX buttons AUX 1 through AUX 8 the AUX LED will illuminate to indicate the faders are used to set the auxiliary send levels The currently selected AUX button is also indicated here Normally the INPUT LED is illuminated SELECTED CHANNEL indicators The 2 digit 7 segment LED shows the currently selected channel number for the SELECTED CHANNEL controls The three LEDs below indicate the status of the selected channel MIC LINE or OUTPUT
131. the selection Select the ID option with the CURSOR buttons and rotate the encoder wheel to specify the cascade ID number Use the CURSOR buttons to select the cascade input attenuator icons Rotate the encoder wheel to change the attenuation level Select the 2TR D2 to Stereo Bus option with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button to ENABLE Rotate the encoder wheel to change the attenuation level Digital I O Setup and Utilities 191 Cascade Configuration Just like the modular digital multitrack recorders it is intended to work with the 02R was designed to be easily expandable from a basic 16 track 40 input system up to a 64 track 160 input system It uses Cascade Digital I O card kits CD8 CS to accomplish this For installation details see Section 14 Installing Options on page 217 of the User s Guide specifically Digital Cascade Kit CD8 CS on page 229 Shown below is the DIGITAL I O 5 5 page Cascade Configuration E Cascade Confisuration Sm Cascade Rux Bus Rssisn ID Aux A 2 1 2 OAux3 4 DlRux5 6 DlRux 8 0 Aux OAuxi 2 HAux3 4 OAux5 6 DlRux 8 Cascade Input Attenuator Bust Bus2 Bus3 Bus4 BusS Bus6 Bus Bus8 9 59 Q Q Q Q dB dB dB dB AuxB Stereo Solo 2TR D2 to Stereo Bus O O O Attenuator AdB AdB AdB AdB Dees AdB Q 00000000000000090 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 026 User s Guide 192 D
132. very low frequencies O2R User s Guide No 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Name E Bass 2 Syn Bass 1 Syn Bass 2 Piano 1 Piano 2 E G Clean E G Crunch 1 E G Crunch 2 E G Distortion 1 E G Distortion 2 MIXING Display Functions 59 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 0 1 5 6 3 111Hz 111Hz 2 24kHz 4 00kHz G 3 0dB 0 0dB 2 5 0 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 0 1 8 4 5 F 83Hz 944Hz 4 00kHz 12 6kHz G 3 5dB 48 5dB 0 0dB 0 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 1 6 8 2 2 125Hz 177Hz 1 12kHz 12 6 2 G 2 5dB 0 0dB 1 5dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 8 0 9 94Hz 944Hz 3 17kHz 7 55kHz 6 0dB 0 0dB 2 0dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 6 10 0 7 223Hz 595Hz 3 17kHz 5 33kHz G 3 5dB 8 5dB 1 5dB 3 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 0 18 10 6 3 F 265Hz 397Hz 1 33kHz 4 49kHz G 2 0dB 5 5dB 0 5dB 2 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 8 4 5 0 63 9 F 140Hz 1 00kHz 1 88kHz 5 65kHz 4 5dB 0 0dB 4 0dB 2 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 8 0 4 0 16 F 125Hz 445Hz 3 36kHz 19 0kHz G 2 5dB 1 5dB 2 5dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 9 10 354Hz 944Hz 3 36kHz 12 6 2 G 5 0dB 0 0dB 3 5dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 10 4 315Hz 1 05
133. 0 FB G 2 10 Delay 60 0ms Range Same as program 39 Same as program 39 Description 026 User s Guide Scene Memories 127 Scene Memories In this chapter What are Scene Memories 128 What is Stored Scene 129 What is the Edit Buffer 129 Initial Data and UNDO 129 Storing MixScenes 130 Naming a Scene 131 Recalling Scene Memories 134 Fader Recall Safe es ER dr e Ree 135 Fade Dime Ce eese ete EC e 136 026 User s Guide 128 Scene Memories 4 STORE 2 RECALL SCENE MEMORY What are Scene Memories Scene memories are a snapshot of all the 02R mixer setting There are 96 mix scene memory locations Each can be titled for easy identification They can be stored and recalled manually using the STORE and RECALL buttons They can also be recalled by the automix AUTOMIX system or by using MIDI Program Changes from a computer MIDI sequencer or MIDI footswitch You can also save scene memories to a MIDI data filer The title and number of the current scene memory are shown at the top left side of the display Scene Memory Number and Title The number and sta
134. 000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01010100 54 T 00100000 20 d DATA Oddddddd dsH Setup Extended Memory 64 2 byte Oddddddd dsL O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 279 Oddddddd deH Setup Memory Extended Data Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Setup Memory Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C 7 01001101 4 00100000 20 D 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 7 DATA 01010011 53 5 00100000 20 x EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 026 User s Guide 280 Appendix MIDI Effect Library Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Channel 1 16 01111110 7 Universal Bulk Dump 72 23x2 16 10 bytes 01001100 4C L 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 n 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01000101 4
135. 000000 00 LL 44 9x2 16 10 bytes 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 jw 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 7 O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 283 Dynamics Library Bulk Dump Format 01011001 59 Y DATA NAME Ommmmmmm mm m 0 127 Dynamics Library 1 128 Ottttttt tt title1 ttttttt tt title16 Oddddddd dsH DATA Oddddddd dsL Dynamics Library Memory 9x2bytes Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Dynamics library receive is effective for programs 41 128 only Dynamics Library Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 B 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 7 DATA NAME 01011001 59 Ye Ommmmmmm mm m 0 127 Dynamics Library 1 128 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Dynamics library transmission from the 02R is possible for programs 41 128 only Channel Library Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manu
136. 0000900000009 60 What is Stored AUTOMIX Memory An AUTOMIX memory starts with a scene memory and a start time As each parameter is adjusted the adjustment and the associated time is recorded in memory The following parameters can be recorded in an automix Some parameters can only be recorded when the corresponding overwrite check box is checked on the AUTOMIX 1 7 page Other parameters can be recorded at any time e FADER Input and output level events faders rotary encoders FADER overwrite check box ON Channel on off mute events CH ON overwrite check box e PAN pan events PAN overwrite check box e EQ EQ events EQ overwrite check box e SCENE Scene memory recall events e AUX 1 8 Channel aux send events faders rotary encoders FADER overwrite check box O2R User s Guide Automix 139 e REMOTE 1 4 MIDI Remote events SURR Surround pan events SURROUND overwrite check box e EOLIB EO library program recall events e CHLIB Channel library program recall events e DYLIB Dynamics library program recall events EFLIB Effects library program recall events To record a mix scene or library program recall in real time start automix recording and then recall the scene or program as normal The recall action will be recorded by the automix as a recall event and can then be edited on the AUTOMIX 5 7 page What is the 02R Memory Capacity The 02R has a current AUTO
137. 0x08 setup memory change bit Oddddddd data 0 Oddddddd ddl data 1 EOX 11110111 F7 Scene Memory recall DATA Scene Memory store DATA Automix Memory recall DATA Automix Memory store DATA 00000000 00 Ommmmmmm mm 00000001 01 O0mmmmmmm mm ttO Ottttttt 111 Ottttttt 1116 00010000 10 Ommmmmmm mm 00010001 11 Ommmmmmm mm Ottttttt 10 Ottttttt 111 Ottttttt 111 Ottttttt 1116 End Of Exclusive scene memory recall mm 0 96 Scene Memory No 0 96 0x7e scene memory store mm 0 96 Scene Memory 0 96 0 7 memory title 0 1 16 automix memory recall mm 0 15 automix Memory No 1 16 automix memory store mm 0 15 automix Memory 1 16 memory title 0 H 0 L 1 H 16 L O2R User s Guide 272 Appendix MIDI Automix new DATA Automix undo DATA automix transport DATA automix transport DATA automix transport DATA automix transport DATA automix transport DATA 00010100 14 00010101 15 AUTO RECORD 00011000 18 RECORD 00011001 19 PLAY 00011010 1A STOP 00011011 1B ABORT 00011100 1C setup data format DATA 0000dddd TX FORMAT 01000000 40 Oddddddd ddO Oddddddd dd1 Oddddddd dd2 Oddddddd dd3 40 1B aa aa automix new automix undo automix transport AUTO RECORD automix transport
138. 1 12 HIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 MIC 9 10 11412 13 14 2TRD1 2TRD2 2TRD3 This page allows you to monitor the emphasis information of the signal input from each digital input jack of optional slots 1 4 and 2TR DIGITAL IN 1 3 connectors One of the following three icons will appear depending on the status of the input signal No signal or an invalid signal is being input Valid digital audio signal is being input De emphasis is not required and is off for the signal Valid digital audio signal is being input De emphasis is ON required and is set to on for the signal O2R User s Guide Use the UTILITY button to locate the UTILITY 3 4 page UTILITY Use the CURSOR buttons to select an input signal SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 or 2TR and press the ENTER button If applicable the O2R will show the channel status information for the selected input Digital I O Setup and Utilities 211 Channel Status Monitor This function shows the channel status information of digital audio signal Channel status information is only present in IEC958 digital audio signals Shown below is the UTILITY 3 4 page Channel Status Monitor 3 4 5 6 7 8 TAPE TAPE This page allows you to monitor the channel status information from a digital audio signal using the IEC958 Part3 AES EBU Professional format or IEC958 Part2 Consumer format Select one of the SLOT1
139. 1 ECE BEI C3 Ca ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Ca Co C3 Ca Ca onna GI GIG 3 23 22 22 22 23 2 22 22 C22 2121212 et tt ft 83 83 83 93 33 aa C G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 C2 C2 C2 C C ats eese e npn o es aaa 6 6 6 6 2 52 6 6 1 6 6 6 6 6 AAAA EHEEHBHEHEEHEEEBEEE EHE E E 53 53 02 2 23 5 0 2 2 2 0 0 0 93 2 1L S Ee L2 LS 1 9 aont nz Tra 1r rAd 5 i3 11 i2 13 14 15 16 2 Use ROUTING buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls to route the MIC LINE 1 channel As you press the ROUTING buttons the LED inset in the button illuminates and the corresponding icon on the ROUTING page appears highlighted You can also operate the routing using the CURSOR buttons to move to the desired routing icon and pressing the ENTER button Note When you select a route the signal from the channel will be routed to the selected bus The output from that bus will appear at the corresponding outputs of all the I O cards installed in the 02 The only exception is when you are using I O cards in slots 1 and 2 for direct output See Routing on page 39 of the User s Guide for further details 02 Getting Started Guide 38 Introductory Recording Tutorial PAN Panning There are two ways to use the Pan function One method is to use the PAN 1 1 page The more convenient method is to use the buttons and controls of the PAN block of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls mms C L ODD R EV
140. 1 and 03D Digital Mixing Console are provided Use these maps when controlling the 02R from one of these consoles See Parameter to Control Change Table 03D amp Programmable Mixer 01 Maps on page 259 for more information MIDI 165 MIDI Remote The MIDI Remote function allows you to control other MIDI equipment from the 02R Connection is made using the MIDI IN and OUT connections Remote equipment can be controlled using the 02R faders rotary encoders ON buttons CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel MIDI Remote operations are recorded by the automix so real time adjustments on other MIDI equipment can be automated The following MIDI equipment can be controlled from the 02R e Bus Aux Master controls bus and send levels on 02R e MIDI Machine Control Digital mixers Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 02R 03D GM tone generator e tone generator e Digital effects processors Yamaha ProR3 REV500 Pro Tools MIDI Remote Connections Remote equipment is connected to the 02R using the MIDI IN and OUT connections Two typical setups are shown below MIDI IN REV500 02R User s Guide 166 MIDI Use the MIDI button to locate the MIDI 5 5 page MIDI The FLIP button flashes To get to the MIDI 5 5 quickly hold down the FLIP button for about one second Use the CURSOR buttons to select a REMOTE icon and press the ENTER button to activate it Use the CURSOR buttons t
141. 101 4D 00100000 20 v 00100000 20 B 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 Y DATA NAME 01001101 4D Ommmmmmm mm m 0 96 127 Scene Memory No 0 96 current EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Scene memory transmission from the 02R is possible for programs 1 96 only Program Change Assignment Table Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 00000010 02 266 128 2 10 01001100 4C 01001101 4 00100000 20 D 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01010000 50 00100000 20 O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 277 Program Change Assignment Table Bulk Dump Format Oddddddd dsH Oddddddd dsL DATA Program Change Table 128x2bytes Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Program Change Assignment Table Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110
142. 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Address Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL Tel 030 2828425 UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste Important Information i Important Information Please read the following before operating your 02R Digital Recording Console Precautions Installing the 02R The unit should be connected only to an AC receptacle of the type described in the owner s manual or as marked on the unit Be careful to prevent the 02R from getting wet do not allow water to enter the 02R especially when raining or snowing or near a body of a water Otherwise fire or electrical shock may result Do not block the ventilation holes on the 02R The 02R has ventilation holes on the top rear front and bottom panel to prevent the inside temperature from rising If the ventilation holes are blocked the heat will remain inside resulting in fire In particular avoid the following situations Do not orient the 02R upside down face down or sideways Do not place the 02R in a narrow non ventilated space such as in a bookcase or closet Use a dedicated rack Do not place a table cloth on top of the 02R do not place the 02R ona carpet or mattress Do not place heavy objects on the power cord If the cord is damaged fire or electrical shock may result In particular it is possible that one might accidentally place a he
143. 2 Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 8 Outgain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 12 Threshold dB 23 1 2 Attack ms 0 Outgain dB 0 5 Knee 2 Release ms 151 Description Compressor that gives the best results with an acoustic bass drum Expander for the same purpose as program 1 Gate for the same purpose as program 1 Hard compander for the same purpose as program 1 Compressor that gives the best results with an acoustic snare drum Expander for the same purpose as program 5 O2R User s Guide No Name A Dr SN A Dr SN A Dr Tom A Dr OverTop E B finger E B slap Syn Bass GAT CPS EXP CPS CMP CMP CMP Type Gate CompanderS Expander CompanderS Compressor Compressor Compressor Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Range dB 23 Attack ms 1 Hold ms 0 63 Decay ms 238 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 11 Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 10 Release ms 128 Threshold dB 20 11 Attack ms Outgain dB 5 0 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 38 Outgain dB 3 5 Width dB 54 Release ms 842 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 15 Outgain dB 4 5 Knee 2 Release ms 470 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 6 Outgain dB 4 0 Knee hard Release
144. 2 7 page RUTOMIH 277 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons to select your starting scene memory and press the RECALL button The selected scene memory is recalled Your mixdown scene memory should be stored with the FLIP button pressed so that the faders operate the tape returns rather than the input channels Note You can customize your 02R so that the FLIP button status is ignored during scene memory recalls In this case you may need to press the FLIP button before you start recording your automix See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information 3 Set your starting levels for the mixdown and press the STORE button to update the scene memory The 02R will display a popup confirmation request message Select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the NEW icon and press the ENTER button The 02R will display a popup confirmation request message asking if you want to make a new automix The popup has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Please Confirm Make New Automix EXECUTE 02 Getting Started Guide 72 Mixing and Automix 02 Getting Started Guide CANCEL is the default To cancel the NEW operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the NEW operation will be automatically cancelled To create the new automix use the CURSOR buttons to se
145. 2 page Similar to the VIEW display function the EQ display function shows the equalization for the currently selected channel only The top of the display shows the EQ library icon the equalization curve and a level meter for the currently selected channel pair The vertical dotted line in the equalization curve indicates the center frequency of the selected band The bottom of the display contains the icons for adjusting the parameters for the currently selected channel e ATT The attenuator rotary icon is used to attenuate the channel level Operation for input channels 17 to 24 and MIC or TAPE channels configured as stereo pairs is as follows since only one attenuation control is displayed on the EQ page the attenuation functions of each channel are linked to preserve their relative settings If the channel whose control cannot be seen reaches the minimum or maximum attenuation setting a message appears The indicators in the PAN L ODD and R EVEN buttons indicate whether the left or right channel of a pair is selected 02R User s Guide 52 MIXING Display Functions O2R User s Guide This control duplicate Attenuation function See Phase and Attenuation on page 32 of the User s Guide Note The attenuator rotary icon is adjusting the same parameter as in the ATT display function When you boost the gain of the equalization curve you may cause the overall signal level to reach CLIP Watch the l
146. 20 n 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mm m 0 127 Equalizer Library 1 128 Ottttttt tt title1 Ottttttt tt title16 DATA Oddddddd dsH Oddddddd dsL Equalizer Library Memory 18x2bytes Oddddddd Oddddddd deL 02R User s Guide 282 Appendix MIDI Equalizer Library Bulk Dump Format CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Equalizer library receive is effective for programs 33 128 only Equalizer Library Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 OOITOLldg 37 7 DATA NAME 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mm m 0 127 Equalizer Library No 1 128 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Equalizer library transmission from the 02R is possible for programs 33 128 only Dynamics Library Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 00
147. 3 14 15 16 on onon E EET ESI ET ESI ET ETSI 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 When the 02R or General MIDI tone generator is first connected or turned on use the CONNECT function to update the tone generator controls so that they match those of the 02R When the CONNECT function is used the settings displayed on the 02R are transmitted to the General MIDI tone generator The Part On Off function controlled using the 02R ON buttons is not in the GM specification To turn a tone generator part off the 02R transmits a Volume message wit zero value To turn a tone generator part on the 02R transmits a Volume message with a value corresponding to the VOL fader displayed on the 02R If you use this page to control a MIDI sequencer for example the Yamaha 700 on the MIDI 1 5 page of the 02R disable the Program Change Control Change parameters 026 User s Guide 176 MIDI XG Tone Generator 02R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of an XG compatible tone generator 02R Controls Parameters on the XG Tone Generator Faders MIC 1 16 Part Volumes 1 16 17 32 LINE 17 18 Part Volume AD 1 LINE 19 20 Part Volume AD 2 LINE 21 22 Part Volume Reverb return LINE 22 23 Part Volume Chorus return STEREO Part Volume MASTER Rotary encoders TAPE 1 16 Part PAN Reverb or
148. 3 dB below clipping Signal indicator LED green illuminates when post HA level reaches 10 dB below nominal Insert MIC LINE 1 through 8 pre A D Pad switch 0 20 dB attenuation MIC LINE 1 through 16 AD converter 20 bit linear 64 times oversampling option ADAT TASCAM YAMAHA MIC LINE 1 through 16 Attenuator 0 to 96 dB 1 dB step Filter DC cut filter de emphasis 4band parametric equalizer ON OFF LOW HPF L MID H MID HIGH LPF 10 to 0 1 Peaking 41 steps Q Low shelving High shelving HPF LPF slope 12 dB oct slope 12 dB oct 1 12 octave steps 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz 48 kHz and 44 1 kHz 21 Hz to 15 1 kHz 32 kHz 18 dB 0 5 dB steps HPF ON OFF LPF ON OFF O2R User s Guide 242 Specifications Input channel MIC LINE 1 through 24 Compressor Expander Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 1 dB steps 1 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 5 6 8 10 20 16 points Out gain 0 dB to 18 dB 0 5 dB steps Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 steps Attack 0 ms to 120 ms 1 ms steps Release 5 ms to 42 3 sec 48 kHz 6 ms to 46 0 sec 44 1 kHz 8 ms to 63 4 sec 32 kHz 160 points Gate Ducking Threshold 54 dB to 0 dB 1 dB steps Range 70 dB to 0 dB 1 dB steps Dynamics Attack 0 ms to 120 ms 1 ms steps
149. 5 E Ommmmmmm mm m 0 127 Effect Library 1 128 Ottttttt tt title1 Ottttttt tt title16 DATA Oddddddd dsH Oddddddd dsL Effect Library Memory 23x2bytes Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M 4 dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Effect library receive is effective for programs 41 128 only Effect Library Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 281 Effect Library Bulk Dump Request Format 01001100 4C ju 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 DATA NAME 01000101 45 E Ommmmmmm mm m 0 127 Effect Library No 1 128 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Effect library transmission from the 02R is possible for programs 41 128 only Equalizer Library Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 00000000 00 IGNES 62 18x2 16 10 bytes 01001100 4 01001101 4 00100000
150. 69 Titling automixes 87 dynamics programs 59 effects programs 51 EQ programs 32 scene memories 63 Top panel 4 turning channels on off 23 Turning the 02R on off 16 02 Getting Started Guide Z2 E DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE fernor Z User s Guide E Contents at a Glance i Contents at a Glance 1 Controls and 1 2 UserInteiface reos 17 3 Mixing and 0 25 4 MIXING Display Functions 31 5 Surround oo xci ch os ace nee a cR RE n 63 6 Dynamics 5 5 555 5555555 lt 345 lt 3563 75 7 Auxiliary 1 5 97 8 Internal Effects eo ae e 103 9 Scene 127 AUIOMIN sts a sce qu SS 137 11 MIDI S S UM Unt E 157 12 Groups and Pairs 181 13 Digital I O Setup and Utilities 187 14 Installing Options 217 15 Specifications E eee eS 239 16 2 2 be Be be be pe Be Behe Be RR 289 NAX ios shes ws a as oe 297 026 User s Guide Contents iii Contents 1 Controls and 1 Front Panels enrere ex mE VP SC 2 Rear Panel oe eite et d e ERRAT 11 Block Diagramm iiie ett Re pater RE oa eR eun 15 2 User 17 About the
151. 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 5 00100000 20 di 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 s DATA NAME 01010000 50 00100000 20 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Setup Memory Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n 0 15 Channel 1 16 01111110 7 Universal Bulk Dump 00000000 00 EUER 266 128x2 1 0 bytes 026 User s Guide 278 Appendix MIDI Setup Memory Bulk Dump Format 01001100 4C 01001101 4 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01010011 53 5 00100000 20 5 51 DATA Setup Memory 128x2bytes Oddddddd deH Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M 4 dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Setup Memory Extended Data STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 FORMAT NO 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT H 00000001 01 Total 138 64 2 10 BYTE COUNT L 00001010 0A 01001100 4C 01001101 4 00100000 20 B 00100000 20 00111
152. 8 O3e0025 O24 Esmere Automix Overwri te O ENABLE OFADER OCH ON OEG O SURROUND Edit Out Fader Edit Mode Oeno ORET BABSOLUTE ORELATIVE UNDO ABORT 12345 6 7 S 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 EI E2 Automix Memory The 02R has a current automix buffer and 16 automix memories There is also an undo buffer Only the current mix can be played back and recorded You can store the current mix in any of the 16 automix memories AUTOMIX Mixing and Automix 69 Real time Automix These tutorials have assumed you are using your 02R with one or more of the optional I O cards installed and a multitrack recorder connected In this section you will be synchronizing your multitrack recorder to the 02R There are three basic ways of doing this If your multitrack recorder is equipped with a SMPTE timecode output connector you use an audio cable to connect it to the SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT jack on the rear panel of the 02R Use an external SMPTE timecode generator if your multitrack recorder cannot output SMPTE time You need to record timecode onto one of the tracks of your multitrack recorder and connect the output from that track directly to the SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT jack on the rear panel of the 02R Use a MIDI sequencer to send MTC MIDI timecode or MIDI Clocks to the 02R as well as your multitrack recorder Connect a MIDI cable to the MTC TIME CODE INPUT jack on the rear panel of the 02R There is an additiona
153. 9 4 INPUT A INPUT INSERT 10 1 INPUT A linpur INSERT loos 7 INPUT 16 INPUT INPUT 15 14 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT 13 12 11 10 INSERT i 6 SLOT SLOT ONAorF METER COAXIAL AES EBU STEREO OUT DIGITAL OUT IN COAXIAL AES EBU 2 1 6 amp 6 9 750 ON WORD CLOCK 2TR IN DIGITAL TIME CODEINPUT MIDI I 1 TO HOST 2 9 TEM Lo 6 STUDIO MONITOR OUT connectors These are balanced 1 4 phone jacks with a 4 dB nominal output level They output the monitor signals for the studio and can be connected to the inputs on a monitor or headphone amplifier The monitor signal source is determined by the STUDIO buttons The output level is set using the STUDIO LEVEL control AUX SEND connectors These are unbalanced 1 4 phone jacks with a 4 dB nominal output level They output the signals from AUX buses 1 to 6 and can be used to feed external effects processors foldback amplifiers or multitrack recording equipment 02R User s Guide 12 Controls and Connections O2R User s Guide C R MONITOR OUT connectors These are balanced 1 4 phone connectors with a 4 dB nominal output level They are wired TRS They output the signal
154. AKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 2 4 5 0 11 132Hz 1 00kHz 3 17kHz 5 04kHz 0 5dB 0 0dB 3 0dB 4 5dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 10 0 7 0 1 177Hz 334Hz 2 37kHz 4 00kHz G 1 5dB 8 5dB 2 5dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 210Hz 667Hz 4 49kHz 6 35kHz G 2 0dB 7 2 0dB 1 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 8 0 9 105Hz 420Hz 1 05kHz 13 4kHz 2 0dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 3 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 5 1 94Hz 420Hz 2 82kHz 7 55kHz G 4 0dB 2 5dB 1 0dB 0 5 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 4 5 0 56 F 99Hz 397Hz 2 82kHz 16 9kHz 4 5dB 0 0dB 2 0dB 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 5 4 5 F 35Hz 111Hz 2 00kHz 4 00kHz G 7 4 5dB 2 5 0 0dB Description Emphasizes the low range of the bass drum and the attack created by the beater Creates a peak around 80Hz producing a tight stiff sound Emphasizes snapping and rimshot sounds Emphasizes the ranges of that classic rock snare drum sound Emphasizes the attack of tom toms and creates a long leathery decay Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals extending the sparkling decay Use on a tight high hat emphasizing the mid to high range Emphasizes the attack and clarifies the high range of instruments such as shakers cabasas and congas Makes a tight electric bass sound by cutting
155. AL I O 2 5 page Input Signal Select 0 Initial Data DIGITRLI 02 5 TAPE16 SEE Input Sisnal Select m Bus TE INT Bus TE H INT There are four boxes on this page The first box is for MIC 1 8 MIC LINE 1 through 8 You can select CARD SLOT 3 or INT ANALOG the default If there is no digital I O card in slot 3 the selection will fail The second box is for MIC 9 16 MIC LINE 9 through 16 You can select CARD SLOT 4 or INT ANALOG the default If there is no digital I O card in slot 4 the selection will fail The third box is for LINE 17 18 You can select BUS 1 2 2TR IN D1 or INT ANALOG the default If there is no digital signal no wordclock present at the 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 1 the selection will fail The fourth box is for LINE 19 20 You can select BUS 3 4 2TR IN D2 or INT ANALOG the default If there is no digital signal no wordclock present at the 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 2 the selection will fail Note You cannot select 2TR IN D1 or 2TR IN D2 for digital input output if the corresponding switch 2TR D1 or 2TR D2 for either connector has been selected with the CONTROL ROOM monitor switches Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 5 5 page DIGITAL 1 0 Use the CURSOR buttons to specify which of the internal auxiliary buses the cascade AUX A and AUX B buses will be assigned to Press the ENTER button to make
156. B to 4 dB They are wired according to the IEC 268 standard Pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold 9 Phantom powering is available for condenser type microphones Note Make sure that the balanced devices you plug into the input connectors also use pin 2 hot pin 3 cold wiring If they are wired differently undesirable phase shifts may occur However you can invert the phase of an input signal with the 02R INPUT B 1 to 8 are balanced phone jack connectors The nominal input level 15 60 dB to 4 dB Wiring is sleeve ground tip hot and ring cold They can be used with balanced or unbalanced plugs See the note above 10 11 12 13 14 15 Controls and Connections 13 INSERT I O 1 to 8 are unbalanced phone jack connectors Both the nominal output and input levels are 0 dB Wiring is sleeve ground tip out and ring in Connect external dynamic processors and other analog devices here POWER switch This is a push type power switch It is recessed to prevent accidental operation Press once to power ON press again to power OFF METER connector This 15 pin Dsub connector sends the meter information from each of the input channels tape and effect return channels auxiliary channels etc to the optional meter bridge 02 TIME CODE INPUT SMPTE connector This phone jack is a nominal 10 dB 10kQ connector It accepts standard SMPTE timecode to synchronize the 02R to an external t
157. Chorus 1 16 17 32 EFF 1 Part PAN Reverb or Chorus AD 1 EFF 2 Part PAN Reverb or Chorus AD 2 ON buttons MIC 1 16 Part on off 1 16 17 32 LINE 17 18 Part on off AD 1 LINE 19 20 Part on off AD 2 LINE 21 22 Part on off Reverb return LINE 22 23 Part on off Chorus return STEREO Part on off MASTER There are two pages for XG tone generator remote control Pages can be selected using the page icon at the right hand side of each page or by operating a control on that page For example operating fader 16 displays the first page while operating fader 17 18 displays the second page The PART icon is used to select parts 1 to 16 and parts 17 to 32 The TAPE 1 16 rotary encoders can be assigned for use with Pan Reverb or Chorus This setting is made using the PAN REV and CHO icons magma FUNCTION 7 8 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 15 9JE PRRT DEVICE NO RNDRNO RND RND RND RND RND RND RND RD RND RND RND RND RND RND ART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1801112 13 14 15 16 dddddddddddddddd When the 02R or XG tone generator is first connected or turned on use the CONNECT function to update the 02R controls so that they match those of O2R User s Guide MIDI 177 the XG tone generator When the CONNECT function is used the settings from the XG tone generator are copied to the 02R EEROTEZ 0 PART FUNCTION DEVICE NOE C2 I CoE
158. D H MID HIGH LPF Q LOW SHELF Peak 0 7 Peak 0 7 HIGH SHELF 125 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 10 0 kHz G 0dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 02 Getting Started Guide 30 Introductory Recording Tutorial EQ Using the EQ Library The EQ Library is used to access and store EQ settings stored as programs There are 32 preset programs 1 to 32 for you to recall and 96 user programs 33 to 128 plus UNDO for you to store your own EQ settings First you need to know how to recall EQ programs then how to store your own Note The programs 33 to 40 contain preset programs and are listed in the EQ Programs on page 54 of the User s Guide However you can store your own settings to these programs Recalling an EQ Program 1 Use the EQ button to locate the EQ 2 2 page shown below 1 Drum 2 Bass Drum 2 TITLE EDIT 4 Snare Drum 2 S3Tom tom 1 kt STORE J RECALL CLERR COP PASTE QUOOOUODOOGOOUOQOQOO0 OO 2 3 4 3 6 7 9 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 The top of the page shows the EQ curve for the selected channel and a level meter for the channel and its adjacent pair 2 Press the SEL button for MIC LINE 1 This step is required only if you have selected another channel 3 Select the RECALL icon with the CURSOR buttons In order to scroll through the list of EQ programs the cursor must be on the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY or PASTE icons 4 Usethe encoder wheel to select an EQ prog
159. DI Program Change Messages 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons to select the desired scene memory When you select a different scene memory the number displayed in the SCENE MEMORY LED indicator flashes 2 Press the RECALL button The selected scene memory is recalled Note When recalling mix scenes be aware that volume levels may change suddenly as channels are switched ON and faders moved The 02R has a feature that allows you to fade the levels as a scene memory is loaded but it cannot compensate for the sudden burst of a channel suddenly being switched on See Fade Time on page 136 of the User s Guide for further information When the scene memory is recalled the number displayed in the SCENE MEMORY LED indicator stops flashing If you attempt to recall a scene memory that is empty the 02R displays an error message indicating that the selected memory location is not available for recall 02 Getting Started Guide Mixing and Automix 67 Mixing and Automix In this chapter What is 02 68 Real time Automix 69 Editing Automix 76 Off line Automix Editing 81 Using the Automix Library 87 02 Getting Started Guide 68 Mixing and Automi
160. Drum 2 3 Snare Drum 1 4 Snare Drum 2 S3Tom tom 1 I ERE 7 QUOOOUOODOODOOUDOODOODO Q er es ee RCNH 2 Select the STORE icon with the CURSOR buttons In order to scroll through the list of EQ programs the cursor must be on the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY or PASTE icons 3 Use the encoder wheel to select an EQ program If you select one of the preset programs 1 to 32 an error message appears when you attempt to store your program Select a program from the 96 user programs 33 to 128 You cannot store your settings to the U program either 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the TITLE EDIT box 2 Bass Drum 2 TITLE EDIT 33Snare Drum 1 4 Snare Drum 2 SsTom tom 1 kta 02R Getting Started Guide Introductory Recording Tutorial 33 5 Select the individual character positions with the CURSOR buttons and rotate the encoder wheel to select the characters You can create a name of up to 16 characters long It can contain any of the following characters er 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt YIZ cdj e f g hj i j kl m pq rst z 1 38 Piano Hish 39 F i ne EQ Cass 46 Narrater TITLE EDIT Ny EQ Progr a Qt 7 7 QUOODOUOODOGOUUOOQOOO0 Q 23435 6739 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1
161. E 17 18 AUX 8 SEN IC 1 NEL LINE 23 24 AUX 8 SEN IC 2 NO ASSIGN AUX 8 SEN IC 3 NO ASSIGN AUX 8 SEN A A A A A A A NO ASSIGN NEL LINE 19 20 NO ASSIGN NEL LINE 21 22 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL UX 8 SEN CHANNEL UX 8 SEN NO ASSIGN UX 8 SEN NO ASSIGN UX 8 SEN NO ASSIGN UX 8 SEN NO ASSIGN UX 8 SEN CHANNEL ST MASTER UX 8 SEN UX 7 SEN MIC 1 NO ASS UX 7 SEN MIC 2 NO ASS UX 7 SEN MIC 3 NO ASS UX 7 SEN MIC 4 NO ASS UX 7 SEN UX 7 SEN UX 7 SEN UX 7 SEN UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN 1 UX 7 SEN NO ASSIGN NO ASS 1 BALANCE ST MASTER NO ASS OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF O OF z z z z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 2 Z 2 SO COP GM BR WwW NO 02R User s Guide 262 Appendix MIDI MIDI Data Format 1 General remarks 11 This section describes the MIDI functionality of the 02R 12 Electrical characteristics and message formats in compliance with MIDI standard 1 0 2 Messages transmitted and received 2 1 Program change Transmission reception can be turned ON or OFF using the MIDI Setup display function see Setup on page 159 of the User s Guide When a memory recall occurs the program
162. ELF POST GdB Batla Out Gain ams Sms Attack Release 2 Press the SEL button for STEREO Note If one of the icons B1 through B8 in the KEY IN section of the display is highlighted it means the corresponding output bus is selected To select the stereo bus move the cursor to the STEREO icon using the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button By default assuming you are still working with Scene Memory 0 0 Initial Data the dynamics processor is set to a compression program with all parameters set to the default value as shown in the table below Threshold dB Knee hard Ratio 1 1 Attack 0 ms Out Gain 0 dB Release 5 ms 1 1 This value is obtained when the sampling frequency is 48 KHz The processor is OFF 02 Getting Started Guide 56 Secondary Recording Tutorial 02 Getting Started Guide 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DYNAMICS OFF icon and press the ENTER button to turn the processor on The icon is highlighted with the text changed to ON Being able to easily turn the dynamics processor on and off allows you to perform quick A B listening tests 4 Select the KEY IN parameter with the CURSOR buttons Rotate the encoder wheel or press the ENTER button to select the trigger source for the processor By default the STEREO channel is triggered by itself pre EQ SELF PRE EQ You can select post EQ or the signal on the aux buses AUX
163. EN op EVEN PAN Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust a control of the PAN block of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls the PAN 1 1 page automatically appears See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information Adjusting the Pan 1 Press the PAN button The PAN 1 1 page shown below appears 2 Press the SEL button for MIC LINE 1 and rotate the PAN control The LED inset in the L ODD button will be illuminated The current pan position is indicated on the adjacent LED bargraph As an alternative you can use the CURSOR buttons to select the PAN icon for MIC LINE 1 and rotate the encoder wheel You can adjust the pan position from extreme right even R16 through the center C to extreme left odd L16 There are 33 pan positions to choose from 02 Getting Started Guide Introductory Recording Tutorial 39 Ganging Pans You can gang the pan controls of two adjacent channels for simultaneous pan adjustment 1 Press the SEL button for MIC LINE 1 You can also select the MIC LINE 1 icon using the CURSOR buttons 2 Press the ENTER button to connect the channels together You can also gang channels together by simultaneously pressing the L ODD and R EVEN buttons of the PAN block of the SELECTED CHANNEL group Ganged pan is indicated by a pair of dotted lines between the pan controls as shown below When you adjust one channel the ganged channel also m
164. ER button The program is stored Note When a scene memory is stored all the previous data in the selected scene memory is overwritten The 02R has an UNDO function but you should still be careful not to overwrite an important scene memory YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX Reorganizing Scene Memories By recalling a scene memory and then storing it to another location you can copy and reorganize your scene memories Use the SCENE MEMORY button to locate the SCENE 1 5 page SCENE MEMORY Use the CURSOR buttons to select the title edit box Select the individual character positions with the CURSOR buttons Rotate the encoder wheel to select characters for your title Press the STORE button Respond to the confirmation dialog box by selecting EXECUTE and pressing the ENTER button The scene memory is stored Scene Memories 131 Naming a Scene Memory Scene memories can be titled on the SCENE 1 5 page shown below Scene memories can be named before being stored or after In the latter case you must first recall the scene memory name it and then store it U initial OCENE 1 5 TAPE 1 Binitial Data I ERE Chet ws 8123456789 lt gt PRBCDEFGHI JKLNNO PORSTUUHXVZIXI _ abcdefshiijklmno Parstuvuxyzii INSERT DELETE PASTE The left side of the page shows a list of the scene memories The name of the scene memory un
165. EREO OUT 105 dB typical A D to D A MIC LINE IN to STEREO OUT Hum amp Noise 20 Hz to 20 kHz Rs 1500 Input gain max Input pad z 0 dB Input sensitivity 60 128 dB Equivalent input noise 88 dB residual output noise STEREO OUTPUT STEREO OUT PUT off 88 dB 92 dB S N STEREO OUTPUT Master fader at nominal lev el and all channel faders at minimum level 64 dB 68 dB S N STEREO OUTPUT Master fader at nominal lev el and one input fader at nominal level Maximum Voltage Gain 74 dB MIC LINE 1 through 16 IN to STEREO OUT 74 dB MIC LINE 1 through 16 IN to AUX SEND 1 2 3 4 5 6 via PRE INPUT FADER 74 dB MIC LINE 1 through 16 IN to MONITOR OUT via STEREO bus 54 dB LINE 17 through 24 IN to STEREO OUT Crosstalk 1kHZ 70 dB adjacent input channels 70 dB input to output Hum amp Noise are measured with a 6 dB octave filter 12 7 kHz equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with an infinite dB oc tave attenuation Sampling Frequency Internal 48 kHz O2R User s Guide Specifications 241 Inputs Phantom switch Input channel MIC LINE 1 through 24 1 to 8 Select switch XLR B phone MIC LINE 1 through 8 Gain trim 44 dB 60 to 16 MIC LINE 1 through 16 44 dB 40 to 4 LINE 17 18 through 23 24 Peak indicator LED red illuminates when post HA level reaches
166. EXECUTE and press the ENTER button The mix scene is stored O2R User s Guide Storing Mix Scenes The 02R has 96 scene memory locations You can save additional scenes to a MIDI data filer Scene memories can be titled for easy identification When you are about to store a scene memory make sure there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store Maybe some settings have been adjusted accidentally or by someone else If you are not sure about the Edit Buffer s exact contents first recall the last scene memory make the adjustments that you really want and then store You may want to store the current mix settings to an unused scene memory just in case Storage Confirmation When you save the mixer settings to a scene memory location the 02R displays a confirmation dialog box with two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE as shown below Please Confirm Store to Scene 1 EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the dialog box appearing during the STORE operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled A prompt indicating the operation has been cancelled will flash momentarily on the display To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENT
167. FADER STATUS indicator will illuminate to indicate the fader status The number indicator corresponding to current the AUX button is also illuminated FADER STATUS O INPUT V aux 1234 5678 The send levels for the input channels are operated by their faders Press the FLIP button and the send levels for the tape return channels can be operated by the faders You can also use the rotary encoders to set the tape return levels The effect return levels can only be adjusted with the rotary encoders Note When you press the FLIP button the faders will automatically move to the levels of the opposite channels from input levels to tape return levels Avoid blocking the fader movements when the faders reposition by placing objects on the O2R It is possible to damage the faders SELECTED CHANNEL Controls You can use the SEND LEVEL encoder in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls to set the signal level to the auxiliary bus The method of working with these controls is different than working with the DISPLAY ACCESS AUX buttons Select a channel with the SEL buttons Select the auxiliary bus with the AUX 1 through AUX 8 EFF 2 buttons Turn the send on or off with the ON button Adjust the send level with the SEND LEVEL encoder o END LEVEL 107 Internal Effects The channel aux send level controls for each aux send are displayed on two pages The first pag
168. IEW display function press the VIEW button again MIXING Display Functions 47 If the selected channel is one of the effect return channels dynamics is replaced by the EFFECT TYPE display It shows the name of the current effects program for the channel Use the CURSOR buttons to select the effects program name and press the ENTER button The 02R will switch to the EFFECT display function See Effects on page 108 of the User s Guide To return to the VIEW display function press the VIEW button again Library When the cursor is located on the LIB icon press the ENTER button to access the channel library You can also press the VIEW button again to achieve the same thing 026 User s Guide 48 MIXING Display Functions 1 Use the VIEW button to select the VIEW 2 2 page VIEW Storing Channel Programs 1 Select the STORE icon with the CURSOR button and use the encoder wheel to select a program number 2 Use the CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel to name the program 3 Press the ENTER button The 02R pops up a confirmation request 4 Select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button The channel program is stored Recalling Channel Programs 1 Select the RECALL icon with the CURSOR buttons 2 Use the encoder wheel to select a channel program 3 Press the ENTER button The channel program is recalled Channel Library The Channel Library is used to access and sto
169. M 4 dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Scene memory receive is effective for programs 1 96 only 026 User s Guide 274 Appendix MIDI Scene Memory Extended Data STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 FORMAT NO 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT H 00001100 0 Total 1546 768 2 10 BYTE COUNT L 00001010 0A 01001100 4C 01001101 4 00100000 20 00100000 20 d 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01001110 4E N Ommmmmmm mm mm 0 96 127 Scene Memory No 0 96 Current DATA Oddddddd dsH Scene Extended Memory 768 2 byte Oddddddd dsL Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Control Change Assign Table STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 FORMAT NO 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT H 00000100 03 Total 466 228 2 10 BYTE COUNT L 01001010 52 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 275 Control Chan
170. MIDI Clock as the automix Time Reference or assign a MIDI Remote page Since MIDI Remote page assignments are stored in scene memories the SUB CPU may boot when a scene memory containing MIDI Remote parameters is recalled Turning on the Force SUB Boot check box will prevent this Preferences 1 Factory Settings Option Setting Auto EQ Display Option Setting Fast Meter Fall Time OFF Auto PAN Display CR Level to MB02 OFF Auto ROUTING Display Pre Fader Direct Out OFF Auto AUTOMIX Display Pre EQ Direct Out OFF Auto SOLO Display Slate Tone OFF Auto WORD CLOCK Display TC Drop Warning OFF OFF Store Confirmation DIO Warning OFF OFF Recall Confirmation MIDI Warning OFF OFF Remote Talk Back C3 Initial Data Nominal OFF Transmit Key Remote Fader Start OFF Insert Tx Bulk Wait Force SUB Boot OFF O2R User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 201 Preferences 2 Shown below is the SETUP 4 4 page Preferences 2 Urdate Confirmation LlRuto Inc TC Capture Recall Safe Faders E Compact Automix Bulk Fader Flie Recall Safe Compact Scene Bulk O Touch Sense Select E Show Compact Size O Touch Sense Edit E Automix Store Undo O Auto EG Edit In OCory Initial Faders O Restore Last Edit Ch OTx 2R Link Message Surround gt Edit 82R Link Messase O Surround CSR Edit Surround SWF Edit OLink Surround Master
171. MIX buffer and 16 AUTOMIX memories There is also an undo buffer Only the current mix can be played back and recorded You can store the current mix in any of the 16 automix memories The default memory capacity of the 02R is 480K Total size of the current mix and the 16 AUTOMIX memories should be under 480K If you find yourself running out of memory you can download unused AUTOMIX memories to a storage device such as a MIDI data filer then clear the memories You can also expand the available memory with 1 MB expansion kits MEAM You can install up to two of these kits in the 02R resulting in a maximum memory size of approx 2 5 MB What is the Current Buffer The only automix program that can be recorded or played back is the current AUTOMIX buffer When you perform edits to the current buffer its previous state is saved in an undo buffer You can always undo the last edit operation Note You cannot undo a STORE operation Once you have confirmed the operation the previous AUTOMIX memory contents have been overwritten 026 User s Guide 140 Automix O2R User s Guide What is Timecode Timecode is a signal that contains a chronological record of the absolute time in a recording It is used for synchronizing different recorders It can be used for electronic editing Timecode was initially invented for the motion picture business as a method of synchronizing the pictures recorded in the frames of a camera to the
172. MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE Oltttttt tt type number bit6 1 bit operation Oddddddd address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address DATA Oddddddd ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd dd2 data bit0 3 change bit0 7 bit4 0 reset 1 set EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive You can modify two or more bits in same address data PARAMETER CHANGE recall store STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE 00011000 18 recall store type number Oddddddd instruction DATA Oddddddd ddl number Oddddddd dd2 channel EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 267 instruction 0x00 scene recall 0x01 eq lib recall 0x02 dynamics lib rcl 0x03 eff lib recall 0x04 channel lib rcl 0x10 scene store 0x11 eq lib store 0x12 dynamics lib str 0x13 eff lib store 0x14 channel lib str number 0 96 memory 0 96 0x7e undo 0 127 library 1 128 0 127 library 1 128 0 0 127 library 1 128 0 0 63 library 1 64 0 1 96 memory 1 96 0x7e undo 32 127 library 33 128 0 40 127 library 41 128 0 40 127 library 41 128 0 0 63 library 1 64 0 channel 0 0 0 15 mic1 16 16 31 tape1 16 32 3b line 36 37 eff1 eff2 38 st mas 64 79 undo mic
173. O Display 198 Auto WORD CLOCK Display 198 AU X1 1 page 100 Aux 7 8 pages 106 AU AU AU AU AU AU X71 3 page 107 X7 2 3 page 108 X7 3 3 page 109 X buttons 19 X controls 23 X SEND connectors 11 Aux sends about 98 cascade assign 192 DISPLAY ACCESS buttons 98 on off 101 output select 203 pairing 184 pre post fader 101 SELECTED CHANNEL controls 98 stereo input channels 101 using 99 B Backlight 20 Balance 36 Battery check 213 Block diagram 15 BNC connectors 13 Bulk dump data format 262 using 161 Bus analog aux outputs 203 pairing 184 Calibrating the faders 215 Capture 155 156 Cascade aux bus assign 192 CD8 CS kit 229 configuration 191 ID setting 192 input attenuator 192 MIDI link 232 settings 231 solo 233 CD8 AD analog card 224 CD8 AE AES EBU card 225 CD8 AE S AES EBU card 225 CD8 AT ADAT card 227 CD8 CS cascade kit installation 229 CD8 TDII card 234 Channel pairs 184 Channel programs recalling 48 storing 48 titling 48 Channel status monitor 211 CMP compressor 77 COAXIAL 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 14 channel status monitor 211 emphasis monitor 210 STEREO OUT DIGITAL connectors 13 Communication speed 214 Compact Automix Bulk 202 Compact Scene Bulk 202 Compander 80 02R User s Guide 298 Compressor 77 Condenser mics 26 CONFIGURATION buttons 18 Connectors 2TR IN ANALOG 12 2TR IN DIGITAL 14 AUX SEND 11 C R MONITOR OUT 12 i
174. O2R User s Guide Pro Tools O2R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a Pro Tools system Parameters on the 02R Controls Pro Tools System Faders MIC 1 16 Track levels 1 16 ON buttons MIC 1 16 Mute 1 16 CURSOR buttons and ENTER Rewind Fast Forward Stop Play button Record Pro Tools Setup Pro Tools 4 0x In the MIDI Controller area of the Peripheral dialog box set the MIDI Controller type to either MM16 or DC16 Select 16 as the number of channels Set the Receive From and Send To parameters accordingly Older version only 8 tracks are controllable In the MIDI Controller area of the Peripheral dialog box select CS 10 as the Device Set the Port parameter accordingly E REWOTES REMOTE4 Q PRO TooLs CONNECT _ 123456 7 8 910111213141516 MUTE TR 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 3 With Pro Tools version 4 0 or later up to 16 tracks can be controlled from the 02R With earlier versions only eight tracks can be controlled Use the cursor buttons to select the Rewind Fast Forward Stop Play and Record transport icons and the ENTER button execute each function Note that ON button presses are not recorded by the automix Groups and Pairs 181 Groups and Pairs In this chapter Grouping Faders 182 Grouping Mutes teret Re Ree
175. P CMP Type Ducking CompanderS Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Parameter Value Threshold dB 19 Range dB 22 Attack ms 93 Hold ms 1 20 S Decay ms 6 32 S Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 25 Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 24 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 0 11 Attack ms 0 Outgain dB 0 0 Knee hard Release ms 319 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 60 Outgain dB 0 0 Knee 2 Release ms 1 12S Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 94 Outgain dB 2 5 Knee hard Release ms 447 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 Outgain dB 6 0 Knee 1 Release ms 180 Dynamics 95 Description Ducking background music for voiceovers typically keyed from the announcer s channel A template for a limiter using the soft compander program This program has a slow release A template for a limiter using the compressor program This program is a PEAK STOP type Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level Use for the stereo out during mixdown It is also interesting on stereo input signals A variation of program 38 It has a harder compression ratio A variation of program 38 It has an extreme compression ratio almost a limiter in effect O2R User s Guide Auxiliary Channels 97 Auxiliary Channels In this chapter About the 02R Au
176. P button to locate the SETUP 2 4 page SETUP Use the CURSOR buttons to select the AUX and BUS icons and the ENTER bution to set them Preferences 2 Factory Settings Option Setting MIX Update Confirmation Option Setting Surround SWF Edit OFF REC Recall Safe Faders Link Surround Master OFF Fader Flip Recall Safe Auto Inc TC Capture OFF Touch Sense Select OFF Compact Automix Bulk Touch Sense Edit Compact Scene Bulk OFF Auto EQ Edit In Show Compact Size OFF Restore Last Edit Ch Copy Initial Faders OFF Surround X Y Edit Tx 02R Link Message OFF Surround CSR Edit Aux Output Select Rx 02R Link Message OFF Using the Aux Output Select function bus outputs can be assigned to the analog aux send outputs providing analog bus outputs Bus signals 1 to 6 be assigned individually to aux send outputs 1 to 6 Shown below is the SETUP 2 4 page Aux Output Select RUX SEND 1 RUX SEND 2 RUX SEND 3 RUX SEND 4 AUX SEND 5 AUX SEND 6 5 5 BUS1 90900992920 19 11 12 13 14 15 1 Initially the aux buses assigned to the analog aux outputs highlighted AUX or BUS icon indicates which bus is assigned to an output 026 User s Guide 204 Digital I O Setup and Utilities 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY button to locate the SCENE 5 5 page SCENE MEMORY Use the CURSOR buttons to se
177. P 3 4 page Preferences 1 Auto EG Disrlay OFast Meter Fall Time E Auto PAN Disrlas OCR Level to 02 E Auto ROUTING Diselas O Pre Fader Direct Out Auto AUTOMIX Disrelas OPre EG Direct Out Auto SOLO Display OSlate Tone Auto WORD CLOCK Diselas OTC Dror Warnins OFF Store Confirmation ODIO Harnins OFF O Recall Confirmation OMIDI Warnings OFF Remote Talkback C3 O Initial Data Nominal O Transmit Key Remote O Fader Start O Insert Tx Bulk Wait O Force SUB Boot VOOOOOOOOOOOOOG OO 2 3 4 3 673 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 Preferences 1 Options Auto EQ Display With this option checked when you operate the buttons or controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER group the EQ page appears automatically Auto PAN Display With this option checked when you operate the buttons or controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN group the PAN page appears automatically Auto ROUTING Display With this option checked when you operate the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING group the ROUTING 1 4 page appears automatically Auto AUTOMIX Display With this option checked the AUTOMIX 1 7 page appears automatically when automix recording is stopped Auto SOLO Display With this option checked the SETUP 1 4 page appears automatically when you press the SOLO button Auto WORD CLOCK Display With this option checked the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page appears automatically if a DIGITAL I O error Occurs Store Confirmation
178. Pa ie ERR eres 183 Pairing 8 184 MS Decoding 5 necesite ane ae WE aad ain BR UR Ba Red ee 186 026 User s Guide 182 Groups and Pairs 1 Use the GROUP button to locate the GROUP 1 2 page GROUP Use the CURSOR buttons to select from group A through D Use the SEL buttons to add or remove faders to and from the selected group Another method is to use the CURSOR buttons to select the faders and press the ENTER button Note Stereo pair channels are added or removed together Select a Enable group icon and turn it on or off by pressing the ENTER button When a group is off the LEDs of the faders flash The individual levels can be adjusted O2R User s Guide Grouping Faders The 02R allows you to group the faders for multiple fader control using only one fader This makes it easy to control several faders simultaneously The input channel and the tape and effect returns can be grouped There are four groups available A B C and D Shown below is the GROUP 1 2 page Fader Group You can group the input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 and LINE 17 18 through 23 24 and the tape and effect returns TAPE 1 through 16 EFF1 and EFF2 Tare Fader Group BASIE SII S106 EE Enable 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8 EE B 2 2 2 0 2 21 0 2 5 2
179. R button the channel will be linked with its adjacent channel in GANG mode Dotted lines will indicate the connection to the corresponding channel Press the ENTER button again to switch back to INDIVIDUAL mode See Pan and Balance on page 36 and Pan Gang on page 37 of the User s Guide MS The MS icon is used to turn the MS Decoding function on or off When the MS function is turned on channels are configured as a stereo pair automatically and when the stereo pair is cancelled the MS function is turned off See page 186 for more information Pair Each time you press the ENTER button PAIR will alternately be set or cancelled Pair only applies to the individual input and tape return channels See Pairing Channels on page 184 of the User s Guide If the selected channel is one of the stereo input channels or the effect return channels the PAIR function does not apply Instead the pan icon for the opposite channel will be displayed here Routing Use the CURSOR buttons to select the routing assignment Each time you press the ENTER button the selected route will alternately switch on or off You may find using the ROUTING buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL group a more convenient way to select the routes See Routing on page 39 of the User s Guide Delay Rotate the encoder wheel clockwise to increase the delay counterclockwise to decrease the delay You can select Smpl samples or mSEC
180. R buttons and press the ENTER button UNDO Operation When the 02R stores or recalls a program the previous settings are always preserved in the UNDO buffer If you discover you have made a mistake you can always recall the UNDO buffer displayed as U in the scrolling list of programs Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon then rotate the encoder wheel until the UNDO buffer is the current program and press the ENTER button The previous settings are restored Program Name EQ program names can be up to 16 characters long and can contain any of the following characters amp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 lt gt 1 2 I1 a bci d e f gh nio pidqiri is t uj viwi x 026 User s Guide 58 MIXING Display Functions Preset EQ Program Parameters No Name Bass Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Snare Drum 2 Tom tom 1 Cymbal High Hat Percussion E Bass 1 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 1 2 10 0 9 F 99Hz 265Hz 1 05kHz 5 33kHz G 3 5dB 3 5dB 0 0dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF Q 1 4 4 5 2 2 F 79 2 397Hz 2 52kHz 12 6 2 G 8 0dB 7 00 6 0dB ON PEAKING PE
181. R buttons and double click the ENTER button all channels will be set to the same pre fader or post fader status as the selected channel 02R User s Guide 102 Auxiliary Channels 1 Press the AUX 5 button AUX 5 The AUX 5 page appears 2 Selecta channel using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons 3 Setthe send on and set it to pre post fader as detailed previously 4 Press the AUX 5 button of the STUDIO buttons group 5 Adjust the STUDIO LEVEL control then adjust the channel level using the appropriate faders or rotary encoders O2R User s Guide POST the auxiliary send signal is sourced after the channel fader This means that the signal is controlled by the channel fader as well as the send level In order to send a signal to the auxiliary bus you must have that fader raised as well This enables the channel to mix and channel to effects signal levels to be controlled together with the former supplying the dry unaffected signal and the latter supplying the wet affected signal This is useful when for example you fade out a channel since the channel to mix and channel to effects signals are reduced together PRE the auxiliary send signal is sourced before the channel fader The send signal is unaffected by the channel fader and its level can be set independently Note Pre or post fader selection can only be made from the corresponding AUX page Monitor Mix The 02R has two d
182. Rear Pan el odere deoa tette egeta eee ENTE 11 Block Diagram 15 026 User s Guide 2 Controls and Connections Front Panel SELECTED CHANNEL controls n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OG p r ro By 0 gt A t t t ntrol Be etr G DN opo d er rir ee ep nalog outpu controls alog Input controls le Display screen and related controls pews je em ee Baa DISPLAY ACCESS controls ed SE EIS t Lg 1 Soe ire 1 olo alga Monitor controls ees 3 em olm BuapaeoompgmYcupccouuctco cooe o o OOOIOIOIOIOIOOWOIOIOIOIOIOIOO O OOO go SS SSeS esc i e ase Scene memory controls m Ores a Display controls Faders O2R User s Guide Controls and Connections 3 Analog input controls es rs O PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL 1 2 1 Phantom switches channels 1 to 8
183. STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is stored O2R User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 49 When you confirm a STORE operation any existing data in the selected program location will be overwritten YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX e RECALL This icon is used to recall a program from the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The recalled program is now the current program e CLEAR This icon is used to clear the contents of a channel program Use the CURSOR buttons to select the icon Use the encoder wheel to select a channel program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking you want to clear the channel program The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02K to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the CLEAR operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the CLEAR operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the CLEAR operation will be automatically cancelled To clear the channel program use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER but
184. Scene Memory 0 0 Initial Data make the adjustments that you really want and then store Note You may want to store the current mix settings to an unused scene memory just in case 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons to select a scene memory You cannot store your settings to either of the special scene memories U the UNDO buffer or 0 Initial Data If you select these scene memories anerror message appears when you attempt to store your scene memory When you select a new scene memory the number displayed in the SCENE MEMORY LED indicator flashes 2 Press the STORE button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected scene memory The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02 to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during STORE operations See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information 02R Getting Started Guide SCENE MEMORY Secondary Recording Tutorial 63 CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The scene memory is stored Note Ifyou decide you do not like a scene memory after you have stored it it is very easy
185. Surround Pan SE E mO Lm 90 00 00 00 TT ont Slo 2 3 4 6 8 aja mim nja mim mim mja 8 O2R User s Guide Surround Pan 69 1 Panning Sounds Using the Trajectories Use the ROUTING This section explains how to move sounds along preset circle ellipse button to locate the semicircle or diagonal trajectories using the ROUTING 4 4 page The ROUTING 4 4 page preset trajectories can be fine tuned using the Width Depth and Offset parameters The ROUTING 4 4 page shown below can be located using either the ROUTING ROUTING button or by pressing the ENTER button while a surround pan graph on the ROUTING 3 4 page is selected The EXIT icon on the ROUTING 4 4 page can be used to return to the ROUTING 3 4 page Like the ROUTING 3 4 pages the ROUTING 4 4 page features a timecode counter This page can also be accessed from the ROUTING 3 4 page by pressing the ENTER button while a surround pan graph is selected Use the SEL buttons to select a channel Use the CURSOR buttons to select a trajectory and press the ENTER button to activate it Set the Width Depth and Offset parameters using the encoder wheel Move the cursor to another parameter and use encoder wheel The surround pan position for each channel is to move the sound displayed on a two dimensional pan graph The pan along the selected position is indicated by a small
186. TER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02K to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the STORE operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is stored When you confirm a STORE operation any existing data in the selected program location will be overwritten YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX RECALL This icon is used to recall a program from the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The recalled program is now the current program CLEAR This icon is used to clear the contents of an effects program Use the CURSOR buttons to select the icon Use the encoder wheel to select an effects program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation asking if you want to clear the effects program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02K to pre
187. TOMIX program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected program The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is stored When you confirm a STORE operation any existing data in the selected automix memory location will be overwritten You cannot undo the STORE operation YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX 026 User s Guide 150 Automix O2R User s Guide e RECALL This icon is used to recall an AUTOMIX program from the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select an AUTOMIX program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to recall the selected program The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE CANCEL is the default To cancel the RECALL operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the RECALL operation will be automatically cancelled To recall your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The recalled program is now the cu
188. UN Edit Out Time Code Free Deno OFET 00 00 00 00 CONDO CHEW AUTO REC REC PLAY ABORT VOWOOOOOOOOOOOOG 3 4 3 6 v S 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon Use the encoder wheel to select an automix The 02R will scroll through the available automixes The program that is highlighted will be recalled when you press the ENTER button 3 Press the ENTER button The 02R will display a popup confirmation request message asking if you want to recall selected automix program The popup has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE CANCEL is the default To cancel the RECALL operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the RECALL operation will be automatically cancelled To recall the automix use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The automix program is recalled Note When you recall an automix program you are overwriting the current automix Make sure that you have backed up or stored the current automix just in case YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS ITS CONFIRMATION POPUP MESSAGE 02 Getting Started Guide 90 Index index A Attenuation 22 Audio quality 2 Automix about 7 editing 76 editing faders and encoders 78 editing scene and library recalls 81 extracting events 85 frame rate 69 making new automixes 70 memories 68 memory expansion 88 off li
189. Use the UTILITY button to select the UTILITY 1 4 page UTILITY 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the ON or OFF icon and press the ENTER button 3 Select the Level icon with the CURSOR buttons Rotate the encoder wheel to set the oscillator output level 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Wave Form and press the ENTER button 5 Select the output assignment icons with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button for each output Oscillator Before starting a recording session many engineers like to record a few seconds of sine wave tones These tones are used to compare the performance of multitrack recorders when you take the master tapes from one studio to another This is especially important when the multitrack recorder is analog The 02R has an oscillator function that allows you to send 100 Hz 1 kHz and 10 kHz sine waves and white noise to the auxiliary and output buses and the stereo bus Shown below is the UTILITY 1 4 page Oscillator On Off a 5 2 0dB Mave Form Eine ine 2 2 Heiss BUS Rssisn Stereo Rssisn ES ES ET ES ES E l ED STEREQ Aux Rssisn Oscillator Functions e ON OFF This icon is used to turn the oscillator on or off When the oscillator is on the Control Room DIM mute function is automatically turned on e Level This rotary icon allows you to set the oscillator output level Set the level
190. User Interface 18 DISPLAY ACCESS 18 DICI EN gases 20 CURSOR Buttons ae doe bate doe Ae 21 Encoder Wheel ieee ier e EIC Md 21 ENTER B ltOfi inae Grae etes ta ben eet tea 21 SCENE MEMORY Buttons 21 Display 22 SELECTED CHANNEL 15 23 3 Mixing and 25 Analog Inputs eese REPRE 26 Phantom Powers acted E enced doe E dx en e 26 Pads e te deer ter ar reset e ax oA 27 GAJIN GControls oett eee tk RR RE ERAS 27 SEL BUTTONS c vievh user E EE ene dea RENNES eats 27 ON Buttons RA eH ERA RE CY A 28 Faders epa eich ce sii 28 Analog Outputs p rriena eens 29 Monitor Selector 29 Monitor Level Controls 30 4 MIXING Display Functions 31 Phase and 32 Delay aache E share desi eher ates dec 34 Pan Balance 000s cece esee 36 Pan Gang eie ees e Ead Rex maga 37 Stereo Width hol
191. User s Guide 290 Glossary Bit A single unit of digital data It can have a value of 1 or 0 Bulk Dump A MIDI function that allow the transfer of system specific data such as sample files or mixer settings between MIDI capable devices The data are transmitted as MIDI System Exclusive messages Bus A circuit that connects the input or tape and effect return signals with the output connectors The 02R has eight output buses plus the stereo output Channel Library An area in 02R memory used to access and store channel settings stored as programs There are 96 user programs for you to store your channel settings Compander A compander is a compressor expander a combination of signal compression and expansion The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below the width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping See Dynamics Processor Compressor A compressor provides a form of automatic level control It attenuates high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range making it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore improving the signal to noise performance Limiting is an extreme form of compression where the output signal is sharply attenuated s
192. WDOOOOOOOOOOOOOG Q 2 3 4 3 6 12 13 14 15 16 E1 Alternatively you could use the LIB icon on the DYNAMICS 1 2 page to go to the DYNAMICS 2 2 page 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon Rotate the encoder wheel to select a dynamics program The 02R will scroll through the available dynamics programs The program that is highlighted is the program that will be recalled when you press the ENTER button 3 Press the ENTER button The dynamics program is recalled If you attempt to recall a user program that is empty the 02R displays an error message indicating that the selected memory location is not available for recall Note Unlike EQ and effects it is sometimes necessary to apply a dynamics processor to an input signal as you are recording multitrack sources Some signals are too unpredictable or noisy to record without some form of compression or gating However you should be very selective about the dynamics you apply as the same rule holds it is easy to add the effect but very difficult to remove it afterwards 02 Getting Started Guide 58 Secondary Recording Tutorial Editing Dynamics Programs You can edit the preset dynamics programs and then store them as user programs The 02R has 40 preset programs 1 through 40 Each program is a variation on the six basic dynamics processors available Compressor CMP e Gate GAT e Expander EXP e Compander CPH e C
193. YAMAHA 292 ER ALR E dedi OW NER S MANUAL lt Cc FCC INFORMATION U S A 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and
194. a chorus It makes the entire chorus much brighter O2R User s Guide No 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Name Total EQ 1 Total EQ 2 Total EQ Bass Drum 3 Snare Drum 3 Tom tom 2 Piano 3 Piano Low MIXING Display Functions 61 Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 17 2 2 5 6 94Hz 944Hz 2 11kHz 16 0kHz 0 5dB 0 0dB 3 0dB 6 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 7 2 8 5 6 94Hz 749Hz 1 78kHz 17 9kHz G 4 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB 6 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 0 28 0 7 F 66Hz 841Hz 1 88kHz 15 1kHz G 1 5dB 0 5dB 2 0dB 4 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 2 10 0 4 0 4 F 118Hz 315Hz 4 23kHz 20 1kHz G 3 5dB 10 0dB 3 5 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 4 5 2 8 0 1 223Hz 561Hz 4 23kHz 4 00kHz G 0 0dB 2 0dB 3 5 0 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 4 5 1 2 F 88Hz 210Hz 5 33kHz 16 9kHz G 9 0dB 1 5dB 2 0dB 0 0dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 8 10 9 99Hz 472Hz 2 37kHz 10 0kHz 4 5dB 13 0dB 4 5dB 2 5dB PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 10 6 3 2 2 187Hz 397Hz 6 72kHz 12 6kHz 5 5dB 1 5dB 6 0dB 0 0dB Description Use on the STEREO bus during mixdown For more effect try it witha compressor This is a variation on program 30 This is a variation on program 30 Also use
195. a us Hssisns attempt to select a card input the confirmation dialog box shown here appears Choose EXECUTE to cancel all the bus assignments Shown below is the MIC 1 8 page of SCENE 4 5 On this page you can select internal or slot 3 inputs from 1 to 8 The Input Select parameters INT ANALOG and CARD SLOT 3 also appear on the DIGITAL I O 2 5 Input Signal Select page SEE Input Patchins SEE Internal Rnalos Channel MIC 2 MIC 3 4 MIC 5 MIC 6 MIC 8 209 Shown below is the MIC 9 16 page of SCENE 4 5 On this page you can select internal or slot 4 inputs from 9 to 16 The Input Select parameters INT ANALOG and CARD SLOT 4 also appear on the DIGITAL I O 2 5 Input Signal Select page SEE Input Patchins TAPE 1 8 TAPES 16 8 24 Internal Analo Channel Input Patching settings are stored in scene memories 028 User s Guide 208 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Shown below is the LINE 17 24 page of SCENE 4 5 On this page you can select internal input LINE bus or 2TR IN 17 18 19 20 only These parameters also appear on the DIGITAL I O 2 5 Input Signal Select page SEE Inmut Patchins SE 1 8 9 16 8 J MICo 16 Channel o c LINE19720 21 22 gt LINE23 24 QUO 026 User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 209 1
196. able for connecting analog multitrack recorders and providing more analog inputs 02R Options Type Product Format Analog I O Card DA CD8 AD S A D CD8 AE AES EBU CD8 AE S AES EBU Digital Card CD8 AT ADAT CD8 TDII TDIF 1 CD8 Y YAMAHA Digital Cascade Kit CD8 CS Peak Meter Bridge MB02 Memory Expansion Kit MEAM Wooden Side Panels WO2SP Cards The I O cards transmit and receive signals between your 02R and external devices such as modular digital multitrack recorders hard disk recorders analog multitrack recorders or other 02Rs The cards come in two sizes single slot and double slot e Single slot I O cards can be installed in any slot from 1 to 4 e Double slot I O cards can only be installed in slots 1 or 2 O2R User s Guide Installing Options 219 The I O cards fall into three groups Digital I O Cards These cards provide 8 tracks of digital input and output They are used to connect the 02R to a digital multitrack recorder either tape or disk based Cards supporting ADAT TDIF 1 YAMAHA and AES EBU formats are available Except for the CD8 AE card these cards are single slot allowing you to insert up to four cards giving you a maximum 32 tracks of digital mixdown Analog I O Cards These cards provide 8 tracks of analog input and output The CD8 AD can be used to connect the 02R to an analog multitrack recorder or to increase the number of analog in
197. affected by the Overwrite check boxes and can be recorded at any time mix scene recalls MIDI Remote actions and EQ channel dynamics and effects program recalls Use the SEL buttons to select a channel for recording The parameter will be recorded during the first record operation and overwritten during subsequent passes recordings During the overwrite operation the SEL button will flash During automix recording you cannot change a parameter settings unless the corresponding parameter has been selected and the channel SEL button edit key has been pressed If the parameter has been selected and the channel SEL button has been pressed automix playback for that parameter will be stopped and you can record new data Note Itis possible to change a parameter during automix playback but automix playback has priority Fader Edit amp Edit Out Modes Real time fader edits can be performed in either Absolute or Relative mode These modes determine how existing data interacts with real time automix edits These modes can also be combined with the END and RET Edit Out options which determine what faders do when a real time edit is stopped See Fader Edit amp Fader Edit Out Modes on page 151 for more information UNDO This operation allows you to undo the following conditions updating the automix after recording has been stopped via the stop key or due to the interrupted timecode recalling the data from the automix
198. air If you continue using the 02R under this condition fire or electrical shock may result If the power cord is damaged for example the it is cut or if the core wire is exposed ask your dealer for a replacement If you continue using the 02R under this condition fire or electrical shock may result If the 02R is dropped or the cabinet is damaged turn off the power switch remove the power plug from the AC outlet and consult your dealer If you continue using the 02R under this condition fire or electrical shock may result Maintenance Before cleaning the 02R remove the power plug from the AC outlet for safety Otherwise an electrical shock may result An authorized dealer should clean the internal parts of the 02R on a regular basis If you do not clean them for a long period of time allowing dust to accumulate inside the equipment fire or malfunction may result Consult your dealer about cleaning and its cost The optimum frequency for cleaning is once a year It is especially effective to clean before a rainy or humid season starts The performance of contact parts such as switches the volume encoder and connectors deteriorates with use The degree of deterioration may differ depending on the environment but the deterioration itself cannot be avoided To replace the contact parts consult your dealer Do not apply oil grease or a contact repair agent to the faders Otherwise the conductivity of the electric
199. al contact point may be affected If you think the faders movement is awkward refer to User s Guide on page 215 for calibration information Data backup Data stored inside the equipment may be destroyed by malfunction or incorrect operation of the equipment Be sure to save important data to an external MIDI device for backup 02R Owner s Manual iv Important Information 02R Owner s Manual Influences on other electrical devices This equipment uses many digital circuits which may cause noise to occur on nearby radio or In this case relocate the 02R away from those devices 02R Exclusion of Certain Responsibility Manufacturer importer or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including injury to the person and or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of the 02R Please read the instructions in this manual Copyright 1997 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved No part of the 02R software or its user manuals may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation Trademarks ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation Dolby AC 3 and Pro Logic are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories Inc All rights reserved Pro Tools is a registered trademark of Digidesign o
200. all programs On the O2R they recall scene memories Q bandwidth The bandwidth of an EQ band For high values the bandwidth is narrow For low values itis wide See EQ Quantization The encoding process when the analog input is approximated quantized to the nearest binary value available In the 20 bit system of the 02R pulses are approximated to one of 1 048 576 binary values These approximations are not an exact duplication of the analog waveform and are therefore contain quantization errors noise However this noise is reduced by over sampling RAM Random Access Memory A memory chip that stores data that can be edited and changed It requires a continuous electrical charge The O2R scenes memories and other libraries are stored in RAM An internal backup battery provides the continuous charge Contrast with ROM ROM Read Only Memory A memory chip that stores data that cannot be edited The 02R operating system is stored in ROM Contrast with RAM 02R User s Guide 294 Glossary Routing The process of assigning input or tape and effect returns to the output buses or the stereo bus Sampling frequency The rate at which measurements of an audio signal are taken during A D and D A conversion Once in the digital domain the data usually remains at the same sampling frequency The measure is samples per second Scene Memory The 02R scene memories are a memory location used to store a snapshot of virtuall
201. alling Options O2R User s Guide Memory Expansion Kit The memory expansion kit ME4M expands the 02R automix system memory from the standard 512K to either 1 5 MB or 2 5 MB Note Take the 02R to your YAMAHA dealer or authorized service center for installation of the ME4M kit Doing the installation yourself invalidates the warranty Wooden Side Panels These Wooden Side Panels W02SP attach to either side of the 02R to give it an attractive appearance Installing Options 221 Installing 028 Options Single Slot Cards 1 Turn off the 02 TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK ENSURE THE 02R IS TURNED OFF BEFORE YOU OPEN ANY OF THE SLOT COVERS Note Before you install a card in the 02R be certain to turn the power off Not only do you risk electrical shock you can also damage either the 02R or the optional card You will also invalidate any warranties for the 02 or the optional cards 2 Remove the cover plate from the slot in which you intend to insert the optional card Note You should save the cover plates for possible later use You should also never operate the 02 with one of the slots uncovered This disrupts the flow of air through the power supply and other components and can cause premature failure of internal components 3 Insert the optional card as shown below When you insert the card press it firmly into the slot to make certain the connector on the card edge seats firmly on the bus slot ins
202. amics 57 effects 49 EQ 30 M Memory expansion kit 88 MIDI Clock 69 Monitoring 45 Monitor source setting 20 Motorized faders 9 MTC 69 Muting channels 23 02 Getting Started Guide Index 91 N Naming See Titling Noise gate 54 Off line editing 81 ON buttons 23 On off event editing 83 Options 6 Overwriting automix events 76 Pad 21 Pan about 38 editing events 83 ganging 39 setting 38 Parametric EQ about 10 Peak hold 22 Phase 22 Powering on off 16 Programs dynamics 57 effects 49 EQ 30 Punch in automix 77 Q Q EQ 28 R Rear panel 4 Recalling automixes 89 dynamics programs 57 effects programs 49 EQ programs 30 scene memories 65 Resetting the EQ 29 Returns effects 47 RISC technology 3 Routing about 35 selecting 37 U using 36 Undo 5 EQ recall 31 User guides about 3 Scene memories User interface about 8 about 7 editing recall events 81 indicator 23 recalling 65 Wordclock 16 recalling scene 0 17 storing 62 Z titling 63 Scene memory buttons 62 02R Scene 0 17 features 5 Setting installation 3 aux send levels 43 options 6 effects send levels 46 rear panel 4 EQ 24 top panel 4 fader levels 20 gain controls 21 input levels 20 monitor source 20 pan 38 SMPTE 69 Snapshots 62 Sonic performance 2 Storing automixes 87 dynamics programs 59 effects programs 51 EQ programs 32 scene memories 62 Switching the 02R on off 16 T Time reference automix
203. and Number Selected Channel Display Function Name amp Page Number initial Data I S 8 amp Cowt 08123456789 lt gt PABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PORSTUUHXMVZIXI abcdefshiiklmno Parstuyvuxyzii e INSERT DELETE L_PASTE CLEAR Free 1008 O Memory Protect Tape Return Level When the FLIP button is pressed these icons become the channel level indicators and are highlighted Effect Return Level The page number shows how many pages are available within the selected function and which one of those pages is currently selected For example SCENE 1 3 indicates that the first page of the three SCENE pages is selected The CONTRAST control allows you to adjust the contrast of the display for different environments O2R User s Guide CURSOR e ENTER STORE EI RECALL SCENE MEMORY User Interface 21 CURSOR Buttons The CURSOR buttons are used to select parameters and options on the display The selected parameter or option usually appears highlighted The CURSOR buttons are also used to position the cursor in a name when naming automix mixes scene memories EQ programs effects programs dynamics programs and channel library programs When a display left or right icon appears at the left or right side of a page indicating that another display page is available the CURSOR buttons are used to select that display Encoder Wheel The encoder wheel is used to adjust the parameter sel
204. and press the ENTER button UNDO Operation When the O2R stores or recalls a program the previous settings are always preserved in the UNDO buffer If you discover you have made a mistake you can always recall the UNDO buffer displayed as U in the scrolling list of programs Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon then rotate the encoder wheel until the UNDO buffer is the current program and press the ENTER button The previous settings are restored Program Name Effects program names can be up to 16 characters long and can contain any of the following characters 1 7 2 te 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt 1 2 m tu 2 f 026 User s Guide 112 Internal Effects Preset Effects Program Parameters Program 1 REVERB HALLI This simulates the reverberation in a larger concert hall and adds spread to sounds such as strings and brass Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time 2 8s 0 3 30 0s Reverb time Hi Ratio 0 8 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio Diff 6 0 10 Reverb diffusion Ini Dly 40 0ms 0 1 200 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections Density 3 0 3 Average time between reflections LPF 7 0kHz 1 0kHz THRU Low pas
205. and the left and right channels of the stereo output for I O card outputs Shown below is the DIGITAL I O 3 5 page Slot Output Select Bus Out Aux Out For each output you can select one source bus aux stereo or direct By default all outputs are set to bus Direct outputs 1 to 8 appear on the SLOT 1 page while direct outputs 9 to 16 appear on the SLOT 2 page When no I O cards are inserted or a cascade card is inserted these pages are grayed out In 24 bit Recording mode where each slot is reduced to four outputs the Slot Output Assign pages appear as follows SE Slot Output Select SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT2 SLOT 1 OUTPUT CHANNEL 2 3 4 Bus Dut TEE jm Sut one EF i2 13 14 15 16 Digital I O Setup and Utilities 195 SHE Slot Outeut Select 8 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT1 o 0074 zx p 02R User s Guide 196 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Solo Use the SETUP button to Shown below is the SETUP 1 4 page Solo locate the SETUP 1 4 page SETUP Use the CURSOR buttons lo select the desired Mode and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select a Status and press the ENTER button Recording mode 4 Select a Listen point with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Select the Solo Level icon and adjust the level with the encoder wheel Mixdown mode 6 Use the CURSOR buttons to select
206. are displayed When the INSERT icon is pressed a new event is inserted at the captured timecode address The type of event depends on which of the CH ON PAN FADER check boxes is checked The new event can be edited as required Time Signature See the addendum at the end of this manual MIDI 157 MIDI In this chapter MIDI and the 02 158 SOUP ects xe te T ei eee 159 Program Change 160 Bulk 161 Fader Start x ee o Sone P 163 MIDI Control Change Assign 164 MID Remote Medus 165 026 User s Guide 158 MIDI THRU OUT IN MIDI O2R User s Guide MIDI and the 02R The 02R supports the following MIDI messages Program Changes for mix scene recalls page 160 Control Changes for remote control of 02R mix parameters page 164 System Exclusive for mix parameter control page 262 Bulk Dump for data backup and transfer between 02Rs page 161 MTC MIDI Timecode for automix synchronization page 144 Note On Off for fader start page 163 MIDI Remote for remote device control from the 02R page 165 MIDI Machine Control MMC page 168 Bulk Dump The 02R can send or receive the following types of bulk data Scene Memories Au
207. are turned on and which are turned off Pragrammable Mixer OF 3 PGM SCENE TITLE MIDI CH CONNECT 8 1 RTH1 RTN2 EFFECT ST_IN 18 20 21 22 23 24 E MIDI 171 Yamaha 02R Digital Mixing Console 02R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a Yamaha 02R Digital Mixing Console Parameters on the Controle 02R Digital Mixing Console Faders MIC 1 16 MIC levels 1 16 LINE 17 24 LINE levels 17 24 STEREO Stereo output level Rotary encoders TAPE 1 16 TAPE levels 1 16 EFF1 amp EFF2 Effects returns levels 1 amp 2 ON buttons MIC 1 16 MIC on off 1 16 LINE 17 24 LINE on off 17 24 EFF1 amp EFF2 Effects returns on off 1 amp 2 STEREO Stereo output on off Display functions Mix scene recall Remote 02R Setup On the MIDI 1 5 page of the remote 02R set the Program Change and Parameter Change parameters as shown below Set the MIDI Receive and Transmit Channels to match those of the controlling 02R SE MIDI Setur Receive Transmit i Channel Channel Omni OBA OB EEN GHA AWE Echo aaan Enable Enable Change BiParameter Chs Parameter Cha 1 Control Chansel 026 User s Guide 172 MIDI There are two pages for 02R remote control Pages can be selected using the page icon at the right hand side of each page
208. arried on a single line An XLR type connector and a shielded cable is typically used Internal Effects The 02R is equipped with two internal multi effects stereo processors These processors have a startling range of special effects available to apply to your mix shimmering reverbs clean precise delays flanging and chorus and a myriad of other effects are available Metering The 02R features comprehensive signal level metering The mono and stereo input channels the tape and effect returns and the auxiliary sends and buses are all metered using the METER display function The control room output is metered using the dedicated 21 segment LED meters Peak hold is available for all meters MIDI implementation MIDI is an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface It is an international standard that allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other Because of the complexity of the 02R it only recognizes MIDI Program Change Parameter Change and System Exclusive messages It uses System Exclusive messages to provide bulk data transfers as well as controller changes It also reads MTC MIDI timecode See Timecode O2R User s Guide Glossary 293 Modulation Using a low frequency oscillator LFO to control a signal s frequency pitch or amplitude level The internal effects programs use modulation for a number of their programs See Internal Effects Nyquist Sampling Theorem This theorem
209. arts at 23 59 30 00 and rolls over to 00 00 00 00 The timecode must be continuous When timecode is received when the 02R is in AUTOMIX RECORD READY status the REC icon is highlighted and automix recording will 02 Getting Started Guide 74 Mixing and Automix begin The timecode will be displayed in real time in the Time Code field of the Automix Main page Note Ifthe timecode is not being displayed correctly in the Time Code field check the following e Are your cables connected between the timecode source device and the 02R correctly e 5 the timecode source device setup correctly to output timecode 5 While monitoring the recording operate the faders and other controls for the selected channels When you are recording the automix events you can only operate the controls specifically the faders of the selected channels Note The 02R tries to prevent accidental level changes by freezing the faders that have not been selected To avoid damaging the unit do not attempt to operate the faders of channels that have not been selected Automix Recording Notes e When you are recording pan or EQ changes you may find it more convenient to use the buttons and controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL block e If you have selected more than one channel with the SEL buttons the SELECTED CHANNEL controls can only adjust the channel that was selected last The same applies for EQ and dynamics proc
210. at position all the way to the end of the automix data i e data up to the end of the automix is rewritten to accommodate the fader position returned to when recording is stopped Using the END option in Relative mode allows you to apply a relative level change to all fader events for a channel through to the end of the automix Instead of having to record a relative level change all the way through to the end of the automix END allows you to stop recording soon after making the level change and have the 02R automatically rewrite the data up to the end of the automix to accommodate the new fader position If the END RET and RELATIVE options are all on when recording is stopped fader data up to the end of the automix is not rewritten Fader Edit When you record a fader overdub this display shows the previously recorded level and the new fader setting plus an arrow indicating which direction the fader will have to be moved to return to the previous level Refer to the following diagram T If the fader is moved to a position lower If the fader is moved to a position higher than the previously recorded position than the previously recorded position O2R User s Guide Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 4 7 page AUTOMIX Use the CURSOR buttons and ENTER button to select channels and parameters Use the CURSOR buttons to select IN Time and set using the encoder wheel Use the CURSOR
211. ator lights up and the SEL button indicator on the other channel flashes To cancel a channel pair press both SEL buttons and choose EXECUTE on the Break Pair dialog box The SELECTED CHANNEL AUX buttons can be used to pair aux channels in a similar way 02R User s Guide 186 Groups and Pairs 1 Use the PAIR button to locate the PAIR 1 2 page PAIR 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the MS icons and the ENTER button to set them The MS function can also be set on the View 1 2 page See View on page 44 O2R User s Guide MS Decoding Adjacent MIC LINE or TAPE channels configured as a stereo pair can be used to decode signals derived using MS microphone techniques MS signals are controlled using the channel faders and pan controls Other channel controls work as normal Shown below is the PAIR 1 2 page Pair SEE Pair MS decodins 8 When the MS function is turned on channels are configured as a stereo pair although unlike regular pair mode the faders work independently When the stereo pair is cancelled the MS function is turned off Channels configured in MS mode have to be stored as two individual channel programs with the odd M channel as one program and the even S channel as another When you recall these programs make sure that the destination channels are not already configured as a stereo pair If they are the channel faders will be set the same The width of sound ca
212. avy object on the carpet that covers the cord or place the 02R on top of a power cord avoid these situations To allow for the efficient release of heat maintain a gap of 10 cm or more between the rear of the 02R and the wall Locate the 02R away from other equipment If the release of heat is insufficient the heat will remain inside the device and result in a fire Do not install the 02R in a place where it may be exposed to oil smoke or steam for example near a cooking table or humidifier Otherwise fire or electrical shock may result Do not place the 02R on an unstable surface such as an unstable bench or slanted surface Otherwise the equipment may fall or drop resulting in injury Do not place the power cord near a heating device Otherwise the cord sheath may melt resulting in fire or electrical shock Do not locate the 02R in a place subject to excessive heat such as inside a car with all the windows closed or in direct sunlight Otherwise fire may result Do not place the 02R in a place subject to excessive humidity or dust Otherwise fire or electrical shock may result Do not handle the power plug with wet hands Otherwise you may receive an electrical shock 02R Owner s Manual ii Important Information 02R Owner s Manual When you remove the power plug be sure to hold the plug Never pull on the cord Otherwise the power cord will become damaged resulting in fire or electrical shock Wh
213. bias 80 Gate and 81 DYNAMICS Display 83 Patching in a 84 Dynamics Processor 85 KEY IN and LINK Indicators 86 Dynamics 87 Preset Dynamics Program 90 Auxiliary 5 97 About 02R 98 The AUX Buttons 99 Stereo Input Channels 101 AUX ON Button Fecr nagh teaa eee eee 101 AUX Preot Post sere hehe fod Candie eee be aed 101 Monitor MiX e ne y ev phe i ee Weeds 102 O2R User s Guide 10 1 Contents v Internal Effects 103 ADOUt Effects re tese Saleh ess 104 Preset Effects Programs 105 AUX 65 Eee ae eae 106 Bff cts sc ds ad LAM ME A t ut 108 Effects s dec BRUDER EE RES 109 Preset Effects Program 112 Scene 127 What are Scene Memories 128 What is Stored in a Scene 129 Wha
214. buttons to select Out Time and change the value with the encoder wheel Select the EXTRACT icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button to extract the specified data Automix 153 Event Copy The Event Copy page shown below allows you to copy move extract and trim the level of automix events ae aa 80 120 M ERRSE Source The channel icons are used to select the channels whose automix data is to be edited and the following channels can be selected MIC LINE 1 to 24 TAPE 1 to 16 effects returns E1 E2 and the stereo output Multiple channels can be selected for editing Input channels 17 to 24 are selected in pairs The Parameter check boxes are used to select parameters for editing and multiple parameters can be selected The parameters are e FADER Input and output level events faders rotary encoders e CH ON Channel on off mute events e PAN pan events e EQ EQ events e SCENE Scene memory recall events e AUX 1 8 Channel aux send events faders rotary encoders e REMOTE 1 4 MIDI Remote events SURR Surround pan events e EOLIB EO library program recall events e CHLIB Channel library program recall events e DYLIB Dynamics library program recall events EFLIB Effects library program recall events With a channel icon or parameter icon selected double clicking the ENTER button display the following dialog box which allows
215. change corresponding to that memory number will be transmitted on the specified MIDI channel When a program change is received on the specified MIDI channel or in OMNI mode the memory corresponding to that program number will be recalled The user can create a customized program change assign table see Program Change Assign on page 160 of the User s Guide 2 2 System exclusive messages System exclusive messages include Bulk Dump Request and Parameter Change Request For these messages the device number will be the same as the MIDI channel Bulk Dump Request Transmission and reception is always ON Bulk Request is transmitted using the MIDI Bulk Dump amp Request display function see Bulk Dump Request on page 161 of the User s Guide on the specified MIDI channel Bulk Dump transmits the contents of the corresponding memory on the specified MIDI channel and is transmitted either by operations in the MIDI Bulk Dump amp Request display function or when a Bulk Request is received on the specified MIDI channel When a Bulk Dump is received the contents of the corresponding memory will change Parameter Change Request Transmission reception can be turned ON or OFF using the MIDI Setup display function see Setup on page 159 of the User s Guide If parameter change transmission is ON a message will be transmitted on the specified MIDI channel when the parameters of the 02R are modifi
216. chapter Basic 14 Making the 14 BasiciSetup BA eet Shah OA 15 Power ONZQORE ea eb Ge aan AREE 16 Setting the 16 Recall Scene 0 17 02 Getting Started Guide 14 Getting Started WARNING Before making any connections make sure that all your equipment is turned OFF WARNING The 02R should be connected only to an AC receptacle of the voltage type marked on its rear panel Basic Assumptions The 02R was designed to be the perfect digital mixing console for a studio using the current generation of modular digital multitrack tape and disk recorders Although the 02R can also be used as a sound reinforcement mixer the typical user will own a project recording or post production studio with some form of multitrack recorder Therefore your 02R will probably be equipped with one or more of the optional input output cards For the purposes of these tutorials it does not matter if you are working with an analog or digital multitrack What You Will Need To perform the following tutorials you will need The 02R e Asound source CD player drum machine synthesizer sequencer with
217. connected to INPUT A connectors for input channels 1 through 8 However be careful with unbalanced sources 16 GAIN E SIGNAL SEL Mixing and Monitoring 27 Pad The Pad function attenuates input signals by 20 dB This is useful when inputting high level signals that would otherwise overload the input preamplifier By increasing the effective range of the GAIN control high level signals can be adjusted accurately Pad can be set individually for the mono input channels 1 through 16 The 20 dB pad switch at the top of each channel is used to turn it ON and OFF up for OFF down for ON GAIN Controls The GAIN controls are used to optimize the input channel signal levels Use them with the PEAK indicators This red LED illuminates when the input signal exceeds 3 dB below clipping Ideally the level should be set relatively high It is acceptable if this LED illuminates occasionally If it is continuously illuminated however back off the GAIN control a little otherwise the input preamplifier is being overloaded and clipping distortion will result The GAIN control should be set with some care If it is set too low the signal to noise performance will suffer and if it is set too high unpleasant signal clipping and distortion may occur The SIGNAL indicator is a green LED which illuminates when the input signal exceeds 10 dB below nominal The analog input controls are not controlled or stored by the
218. controls Introductory Recording Tutorial 27 Setting the Frequency 1 Select the frequency F icon for the LOW band using the CURSOR buttons 2 Use the encoder wheel to sweep through the frequency range Alternatively you could use the EQUALIZER F control All four bands of the 02R parametric EQ cover virtually the entire audio spectrum from 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz Although they are labelled LOW L MID H MID and HIGH the frequency of the bands can actually be in any order Note If your 02R is busy processing some complex data it may take a little time to update the EQ curve However the internal EQ circuits reflect your adjustments immediately Note As well as the frequency value in Hz displayed under the icon and on the numeric LED in the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls the dotted vertical line on the EQ graph indicates the current frequency position 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the frequency F icon for the L MID band and adjust its position with the encoder wheel Select the other bands and adjust their frequency You can also select the EQ bands using the LOW HPF L MID H MID and HIGH LPF buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls Adjust the EQUALIZER F control for each band 02 Getting Started Guide 28 Introductory Recording Tutorial 02 Getting Started Guide Setting the Bandwidth The L MID and H MID bands are peaking type EQs The LOW and HIGH bands a
219. cted wordclock frequencies check the connections between the ADAT modular digital multitrack recorder and the 02R Check that the ADAT recorder is powered on Use the CURSOR buttons to select the wordclock source If you are using the 48kHz OUT connector from the BRC ADAT remote controller plugged into the WORD CLOCK IN connector use the CURSOR buttons to select the W CLK IN box and press the ENTER button If you are just using an ADAT modular digital multitrack recorder select the TAPE 1 2 box the first box in the SLOT1 row and press the ENTER button The current wordclock source is indicated by a highlighted icon See Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide for further details O2R User s Guide SYNC Installing Options 229 Digital Cascade Kit CD8 CS The digital cascade kit CD8 CS is used to connect two or more 02Rs together The kit consists of two cascade I O cards and a special cable When two or more 02Rs are connected together they share the output buses 1 through 8 four auxiliary buses two paired buses AUX A and AUX B the stereo bus and the solo bus WORD CLOCK OUT TERMI Digital MTR Word clock slave Digital MTR Word clock master SYNC g g ibi SLOT Digital MTR Digital MTR Word clock slave Word click slave our LIN
220. ction SUB SCI1 Party Err Check the MIDI connection SUB SCI1 RxBuf Full MIDI data being transmitted is too large SUB SCI1 TxBuf Full MIDI data being received is too large TC RxBuf Full Buffer for time code reception is full TC TxBuf Full Buffer for time code transmission is full Too Large Bulk MIDI bulk data size is too large Undo Buf is Empty The previous operation cannot be undone because no data exists in the undo buffer Undo Buf is Full The store operation cannot be done because the data exists in the undo buffer Undone Recall The recall operation was undone Undone Store The store operation was undone Wrong WORD CLOCK The device for synchronization selected from the 02R is sending in correct word clock Reconfigure the synchronization system Too many cascade in out cards Shut off the power and check slot please There are more than two cascade cards or too many cards with the in or out setting Check the slot condition and turn the power on to the 02R again O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 255 Appendix MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Initial User Program Initial User Program Initia User Change Scene Scene Change
221. d the level meters will respond more quickly to level changes When the option is not checked the level meters delay their fall in order to allow you to see the level changes more clearly CR Level to MB02 With this option checked the level of the C R MONITOR OUT signal is displayed on the optional MB02 s stereo meters Pre Fader Direct Out With this option checked the direct output signal is sourced pre fader Normally the direct output signal is sourced post fader Pre EQ Direct Out With this option checked the direct output signal is sourced pre EQ You cannot turn on both Pre EQ Direct Out and Pre Fader Direct Out at the same time Slate Tone With this option checked when you press the SLATE button 50 Hz tone at 34 dB is recorded along with the talkback input TC Drop Warning OFF With this option checked the 02R will not report a warning when the timecode reader detects a frame dropout If you have a noisy connection to your timecode source or it was poorly recorded on an analog recorder this message may appear so often that it becomes distracting However if you know your timecode source is reliable you may want to leave this option off so that the 02R can warn you of any undesirable timecode events DIO Warning OFF With this option checked the 02R will not report a warning when an error is detected in the digital signals being input from one of the digital I O cards When the 02R detects an error th
222. d 88 user programs 41 to 128 for you to store your own dynamics settings Dynamics Processor Dynamics processors are used to correct or control signal levels The 02R features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels tape returns and the bus and stereo outputs These processors allow you to compress expand compress expand compand gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer See Compander Compressor Ducking Expander and Gate Edit Buffer The Edit Buffer is the current mix settings When a scene memory is recalled the mix settings of the selected scene memory are written to the Edit Buffer When a scene memory is stored the mix settings in the Edit Buffer are written to the selected scene memory EQ The 02R is equipped with a four band fully parametric EQ with variable bandwidth Q center frequency F gain C and ON OFF parameters equalization can be applied to the input channels the tape and effect return channels and the stereo output For stereo channels the equalization curve is applied equally to both channels EQ Library An area in 02R memory used to access and store EQ settings stored as programs There are 40 preset programs 1 to 40 for you to recall and 88 user programs 41 to 128 for you to store your own EQ settings 02R User s Guide 292 Glossary Expander An expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold
223. d only scene memories 129 Rear panel 11 Recall Confirmation 199 Recalling automixes 148 channel programs 48 dynamics programs 87 effects programs 109 EQ programs 55 scene memories 134 Receive channel MIDI 159 REC icon automix 147 REC Recall Safe Faders 201 Remote Talkback C3 199 Restore Last Edit Ch 201 RET mode 152 REV500 MIDI remote 178 Reversing signal phase 32 Rotary encoders 28 Routing 39 ROUTING 1 2 page 39 ROUTING 2 2 page 65 ROUTING 3 4 page 67 ROUTING 4 4 page 69 ROUTING buttons 23 Rx 02R Link Message 202 S S PDIF See COAXIAL Safe scene recalls 135 SCENE 1 5 page 131 SCENE 2 5 page 135 SCENE 3 5 page 136 SCENE 4 5 page 206 SCENE 5 5 page 204 Scene memories bulk dump 161 edit buffer 129 editing recall events 155 fader recall safe 135 fade time 136 initial data 129 program change assignments 160 protecting 134 recalling 134 storing 130 titling 131 what s stored 129 SCENE MEMORY buttons 21 SEL buttons 27 SETUP 1 4 page 196 SETUP 2 4 page 203 SETUP 3 4 page 198 SETUP 4 4 page 201 Show Compact Size 202 SIGNAL indicators 27 Single slot cards 218 Slate Tone 199 Slot output select 194 SMPTE counter 145 frame rate 145 input connector 13 offset 145 using 140 Solo 196 SOLO button 30 Specifications digital inputs and outputs 247 O2R User s Guide 301 general 240 input connections 246 inputs 241 libraries 245 options 249 output channels 244 output connec
224. de slave to send to the cascade master AUX A and AUX B buses Note Itis not possible to send the same pair of auxiliary buses from the cascade slave to both AUX A and AUX B on the cascade master See Cascade Configuration on page 191 of the User s Guide for further details 02R User s Guide 232 Installing Options MIDI Link When several 02Rs are cascaded together the master 02R can control a number of functions listed below of the slave 02Rs via MIDI Master and slave 02Rs should be connected as shown below 02R Slave 3 02R Slave 2 02 Slave 1 02R Master 0 On the master 02R the Tx 02R Link Message preference should be turned on On the slave 02Rs the Rx 02R Link Message preference should be turned on See Preferences on page 198 MIDI messages are processed regardless of the MIDI Channel settings Linked Commands e Scene memory recall and store including title e Automix memory recall and store including title e Automix New and Undo e Automix transport functions Auto Rec Record Play Stop Abort Linked Parameters e Meter input module patch point e Meter output module patch point e Meter Peak Hold e Automix Enable e Automix fader Return Edit Out e Automix fader Return Time Edit Out e Automix Overwrite e Automix Relative e Automix Motor e Automix Frame e Automix MTC e Automix generator start time Hour minute second frame e Automix timecode offset O2R
225. de will start a punch in recording Note A channel must be selected with its SEL button in order for any automix events to be recorded STOP Selecting this icon will stop the playback and or recording of the AUTOMIX When recording is stopped the data will be stored as the new current mix ABORT Selecting this icon will stop the playback or recording of the AUTOMIX When the recording is stopped the data will be discarded Internally the data is stored in memory for the undo operation 026 User s Guide 148 Automix Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 2 7 page AUTOMIX Use the encoder wheel to select an AUTOMIX memory from the scrolling list Select the RECALL icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Edit the title with the CURSOR buttons encoder wheel and ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Automix ENABLE check box and press the ENTER button Select the Overwrite check boxes with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select Edit Out END or RET check box and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons and the ENTER button to operate the automix transport O2R User s Guide Memory Management The Memory Management page shown below is used to store recall title and clear automixes Some of the functions from the Automix Main page also appear on this page SEE Mem
226. defines the process of sampling audio with a digital system Amongst other things it states that the sampling frequency of a digital audio system must be at least twice that of the highest audio frequency otherwise aliasing will occur The Nyquist theorem was developed at Bell Labs by C Shannon and H Nyquist See Aliasing over sampling The input analog signal is sampled at a much higher rate than the normal sampling rate Using the high sample rate the digital data may be processed with a very steep slope digital filter As the filter is in the digital domain unpleasant side effects such as phase effects are eliminated The 02R uses 64 times over sampling for most of its analog inputs and 8 times over sampling for most of its analog outputs PCM Pulse Code Modulation A scheme for encoding audio data as a series of pulses Each pulse defines a transition from binary one to binary zero Peaking An EQ circuit that is used to cut and boost a signal centered about a specific frequency Using the bandwidth Q parameter you can widen or narrow the effect of the circuit Phase Phase is the frequency coherence of a signal If two signals are out of phase the trough of the first waveform corresponds with the peak of the second resulting in cancellation The 02R can reverse the phase of the input signals which allows you to compensate for incorrectly wired conductors and so forth Program Change A MIDI message that is used to rec
227. der the cursor is highlighted The SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons are used to scroll through the list Beside the list of scene memories is the title edit field The CURSOR buttons are used to select the character and the encoder wheel is used to change its value A table of the available characters is shown below the title edit field Below the character table are four icons Use the CURSOR buttons to select from the INSERT DELETE COPY or PASTE icons Below these are the scene memory CLEAR icon and scene memory memory free indicator Scene memory memory is displayed as a percentage If these is not enough memory to store a scene memory the message Scene Memory Area Full appears At the bottom of the right side of the display is the Memory Protect check box When this box is checked all scene memories are protected from the storage operations 026 User s Guide 132 Scene Memories Character Set scene memory name can be up to 16 characters long and can contain any of the following characters 1 7 2 8 lb 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt 1 A B E L M NO 5 YIZ N m pq rst z 1 Icons INSERT This icon is used to insert blank characters into the title edit box at the current cursor location Select th
228. dge installing 223 using 236 METER connector 13 Metering 41 MIDI bulk dump 161 cascade link 232 connectors 13 control change assign 164 data format 262 echo 159 fader start 163 MIDI Clock 142 MIDI remote 165 MMC 168 MTC 141 omni 159 program change assign 160 receive channel 159 supported messages 158 transmit channel 159 MIDI 1 5 page 159 MIDI 2 5 page 160 MIDI 3 5 page 161 MIDI 4 5 page 164 MIDI 5 5 page 166 MIDI Clock counter 145 using 142 MIDI remote 02R 171 03D 173 about 165 configuring 166 connections 165 GM tone generator 175 MMC 168 Programmable Mixer 01 169 ProR3 178 Pro Tools 180 REV500 178 XG tone generator 176 MIDI Warning OFF 200 MIXING buttons 19 MIX Update Confirmation 201 Mono channel inputs 12 MOTOR ON 151 Moving events 153 MS decoding 186 MTC counter 145 frame rate 145 input connector 13 offset 145 using 141 Mute buttons 28 Mute grouping 183 N Naming See Titling Noise gate 81 Note on off fader start 163 Omni MIDI 159 ON buttons 28 Options 224 225 about 218 ADAT card 227 cascade kit 229 I O cards 218 meter bridge 236 specifications 249 Tascam card 234 Oscillator 209 Overwrite mode automix 146 P Pad switches 27 Pages ATT 1 1 33 AUTOMIX 1 7 144 AUTOMIX 2 7 148 AUTOMIX 3 7 151 AUTOMIX 4 7 153 AUTOMIX 5 7 155 AUTOMIX 6 7 156 AUX 1 1 100 AUX 71 3107 AUX 7 2 3 108 AUX 7 3 3 109 DELAY 1 1 34 DIGITAL I O 1 5 188 DIGITAL I O 2 5 190 DIGITAL
229. diately With a slow attack time the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Out Gain sets the expander s output signal level Knee sets the transition of the signal at the threshold With a hard knee the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate With the softest knee knee5 the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold Release determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold 026 User s Guide 80 Output Level Dynamics i i 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 410 420 Input Level Compander A compander is a compressor expander a combination of signal compression and expansion The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below the width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping CompanderH CPH and Companders CPS parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 15 points Attack ms to 120 121 points Outgain dB 18 to 0 36 points Width dB 1 to 90 90 points Release ms 5 ms to 42 3 sec 6 ms to 46 0
230. e message DIGITAL I O Error is flashed on the display If you have a poor connection to your modular digital multitrack recorder or any other digital audio devices this message may appear so often that it becomes distracting You should be aware that if the 02R 02R User s Guide 200 Digital I O Setup and Utilities detects an error in the digital input or output your recorded data may be compromised However some modular digital multitrack recorders will cause this error while performing synchronization during start up MIDI Warning OFF With this option checked the 02R will not report a warning when it receives a MIDI error The following error conditions will not be reported Byte Count Error Check Sum Error Code Mismatch ID Mismatch and MIDI Ch Mismatch Initial Data Nominal When scene memory 0 is recalled all channel faders move to the minimum position With this preference checked however they move to the nominal position Aux and bus master faders move to the nominal 0 0 dB position regardless of this preference Fader Start When the Fader Start preference is checked MIDI Note On message is transmitted when an odd numbered channel fader is raised from infinity 00 See Fader Start on page 163 Force SUB Boot With this option checked the 02R forces the SUB CPU to boot each time the 02R is turned on Check this option to prevent the 02R from booting the SUB CPU when you select
231. e shown below shows aux controls for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 Select this page using a MIC LINE SEL button effects return To prevent a feedback loop AUX 7 cannot be sent to Effect 1 and AUX 8 cannot be sent to Effect 2 Select this page using a TAPE or The second page shows aux controls for TAPE channels 1 to 16 and a single RIN SEL button AUX Pages Jo 7 15 ish i E Greene G BBIG BB 028 User s Guide 108 Internal Effects 1 Use the AUX 7 button to locate the AUX 7 2 3 page 2 Select an icon using the cursor buttons 3 To change the value of the selected item rotate the encoder wheel until the desired value is shown Effects The 02R is equipped with two internal multi effects stereo processors These processors have a startling range of special effects available to apply to your mix shimmering reverbs clean precise delays flanging and chorus and a myriad of other effects are available Shown below is the AUX 7 2 3 page 0 initial Data RUH 7 2 2 TRPEI RA AU 2 85 8 8 6 40 ams 3 Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density CPG se 2 THRU 18 8ms 5as LPF HPF Rev Dls Rev Bal The top of the page shows the effects LIB icon an effects curve or icon which changes depending on the selected effect and a level meter for the effects return channel
232. e a dedicated SMPTE output connector record the timecode onto a spare track in the case of a multitrack recorder or a special track in the case of a video recorder or film post production recorder and connect the output from that track to the timecode input connector on the 02R SMPTE Time code SMPTE Time code TIME CODE INPUT SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT SMPTE SMPTE eee PREP ii Analog tape output connector output connector nca mo lll m oooo O00000 poopoo 52222 connected device has a dedicated SMPTE output connector a dedicated SMPTE output connector Digital MTR im il 8 Digital MTR The connected divice does not have Using MIDI Timecode MTC MTC is a MIDI System message that indicates absolute time in hours minutes seconds frames in the same fashion as SMPTE MTC is an alternate method of transferring the timecode data from one device to another Use MTC when you want to synchronize an 02R automix with MIDI sequencers or a multitrack recorder that has MTC output jacks Use a MIDI cable to plug the MTC output connector of the controlling device into the TIME CODE INPUT MTC connector on the back of the 02R 02R can use the MTC or MIDI IN jack to rec
233. e automix data is to be edited 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the channel check boxes and press the ENTER button to check them The Parameter check boxes are used to select parameters for editing and multiple parameters can be selected The parameters are FADER Channel input and output level events faders rotary encoders e CH ON Channel on off mute events e PAN pan events e EQ EO events e SCENE Scene memory recall events e AUX1 8 Channel aux send events faders rotary encoders e REMOTE 1 4 MIDI Remote events SURR Surround pan events e EQLIB EQ library program recall events e CHLIB Channel library program recall events e DYLIB Dynamics library program recall events EFLIB Effects library program recall events 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the parameter check boxes and press the ENTER button to check them 02 Getting Started Guide 86 Mixing and Automix 02R Getting Started Guide 4 Usethe CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel to set the In Time 5 Use the CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel to set the Out Time The Extract function allows you to delete the selected parameters from the selected channels between the In Time and Out Time points 6 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the ERASE icon and press the ENTER button A confirmation dialog box appears 7 Select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button The events are deleted If you change your
234. e effect Offset 32 0 100 Phase offset The amount that the signal phase is offset Stage 4 4 6 8 Stage of phase LSF F 250Hz 32Hz 1 0kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSF G 2 12 to 12dB Low shelving filter gain HSF F 3 6KHz 1 0 10 0kHz High shelving filter frequency HSF G 1 12 to 12dB High shelving filter gain Program 39 ST PITCH CHANGE Two part stereo pitch shifter This stereo effect changes the pitch of the left and right channels independently of each other Parameter Setting Range Description Pitch 12 to 12 Coarse pitch change for pitch changers 1 and 2 Fine 1 20 50 to 50 Fine pitch for pitch changer 1 Fine 2 20 50 to 50 Fine pitch for pitch changer 2 Out 1 100 100 to 100 Output volume level for pitch changer 1 Out 2 100 100 to 100 Output volume level for pitch changer 2 Pan 1 L100 L100 R100 Pan control for pitch changer 1 Pan 2 R100 L100 R100 Pan control for pitch changer 2 FB G 1 28 99 to 99 Feedback gain for pitch changer 1 FB G 2 28 99 to 99 Feedback gain for pitch changer 2 Delay 25 0ms 0 1 255 0ms Delay time before the feedback starts O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 125 Program 40 VOCAL DOUBLER This is a thin harmonizing effect obtained by setting a longer delay Parameter Setting Pitch 0 Fine 1 5 Fine 2 10 Out 1 100 Out 2 100 Pan 1 L6 Pan 2 R6 FB G 1 1
235. e icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button DELETE This icon is used to delete characters from the title edit box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button e COPY This icon is used to copy the name of another scene memory Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a scene memory and press the ENTER button The scene memory name is copied into an edit buffer e PASTE This icon is used to paste a scene memory name previously selected with the COPY operation into the title edit box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The scene memory name is pasted from the edit buffer into the title edit box replacing any text that was there You can then edit the text to create a unique scene memory name e CLEAR This icon is used to clear the contents of a scene memory Use the CURSOR buttons to select the icon Use the encoder wheel to select a scene memory and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to clear the scene memory The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the CLEAR operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the CLEAR operation either press the ENTER button or wai
236. ear 8 times oversampling Level control TALKBACK Talkback ON OFF Slate ON OFF Level control A D converter 16 bit linear 64 times oversampling Libraries Internal Digital Effector EFFECT 1 2 Number of factory presets 40 Number of user library 88 Dynamics Number of factory presets 40 Number of user library 88 Equalizer Library Number of factory presets 32 Number of user library 96 Channel Library Number of user library 64 USA Canada 120V 60 Hz Power Requirement UK 240V 50 Hz General 230V 50 Hz Power Consumption 180W Dimensions H x D x W 221 5 mm x 685 mm x 672 mm Net Weight 31kg tempertumrengs 10936 CD8 AE DIGITAL I O CARD ADAT CD8 AT ES EBUE CARD CD8 AE S Options A D CARD CD8 AD S DIGITAL CASCADE KIT CD8 CS AD DA CARD CD8 AD PEAK METER BRIDGE MB02 DIGITAL I O CARD TDIF 1 CD8 TDII MEMORY EXPANSION KIT ME4M DIGITAL I O CARD YAMAHA CD8 Y WOODEN SIDE PANEL W02SP O2R User s Guide 246 Specifications Input Specifications Actual Foruse Mixer GAN toad wie itivitv i Max connector impedance nominal Sensitivity Nominal before clip pm 77048 60dB 40dB 245uV 775uV 7 75mV x R 3 34 CHINPUT 0 XLR 50t06000 c 35 6 user MIC LINE 1 4kQ Phone mics and 38 8mV 123mV 1 23 Phone Jack through16
237. ected using the CURSOR buttons Its detented action gives it a positive feel allowing quick and accurate parameter adjustments Turning it clockwise increases the selected parameter value Turning it counterclockwise decreases the selected parameter value The faster you turn it the faster the parameter value changes The encoder wheel is also used to scroll through the automix programs mix scenes effects programs EQ programs and dynamics processor programs When naming automixes mix scenes user effects programs user EQ programs and user dynamics programs the encoder wheel is used to scroll through the available characters ENTER Button The ENTER button is used to confirm settings made using the encoder wheel and to toggle two option parameters such as EQ ON OFF SCENE MEMORY Buttons These buttons allow you to select store and recall scene memories The current scene memory is indicated on the SCENE MEMORY LED 02R User s Guide 22 User Interface O2R User s Guide Display Functions The following table lists all the 02R display functions and briefly explains what they do Display Function SCENE Description Store and recall mix scenes DIGITAL I O Sets digital I O parameters and selects word clock SETUP Sets the solo parameters and system prefer ences UTILITY Controls the oscillator parameters and access es the emphasis monitor the channel
238. ectrum from 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz Select the center frequency F and adjust the bandwidth Q and the gain until you have achieved the perfect sound EQ settings can be stored and recalled using scene memories and can be adjusted in real time with the dynamic automix system The 02R also has an extensive EQ library which allows you to store frequently used EQ settings for instant recall An EQ program stored in the EQ library is a good starting point and reference when making adjustments to the EQ Digital Benefits You re probably already familiar with the many benefits of digital audio but what exactly are the benefits for digital audio mixing An audio mixer has the job of combining audio signals from various sources at differing levels and impedances usually into a stereo signal It must do this without introducing any new distortions and noise Most analog mixers do a pretty good job but even with the best designs nonlinear effects caused by circuit components are unavoidable In the digital realm audio mixing consists of adding and multiplying the binary numbers that represent audio signals The 02R uses a 32 bit DSP Digital Signal Processor chip for these calculations ensuring a very high degree of precision Once past the analog to digital conversion audio signals are essentially immune from standard signal degradation With the O2R noise distortion and crosstalk are virtually eliminated You ll hear a new clarity in you
239. ed O2R User s Guide Appendix MIDI 263 If parameter change reception is ON and a parameter request is received on the specified MIDI channel the contents of the corresponding parameter will be transmitted on the specified MIDI channel regardless of whether transmission is ON or OFF If parameter change reception is ON and a parameter change is received on the specified MIDI channel the contents of the corresponding parameter will be modified Transmission of KEY REMOTE parameter changes can be turned ON or OFF using the Preferences display function see Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide independently of other parameters This is used only in special circumstances such as when externally monitoring key operations Normally it should be left OFF 2 3 Active sensing MIDI reset If after receiving Active Sensing no messages are received for an interval longer than 300 ms or when MIDI Reset is received only the running status will be cleared Active Sensing is transmitted 2 4 Quarter frame messages MIDI Time Code Quarter frame messages are received at the MTC connector 3 Echo Back If ECHO is turned ON the Program Change messages will be transmitted immediately after being received 4 Transmission Condition PGM T x ON PROGRAM CHANGE CnH SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE PARAMETER CHANGE FOH PASH SINH KEY REMOTE T x ON KEY REMOTE RESPONSE FOR PARAMETER REQUEST
240. ed almost immediately With a slow attack time ducking fades the signal Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt Hold sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level Decay controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through For ducking this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the DYNAMICS 1 2 page DYNAMICS Select a channel using the SEL buttons Note Press the SEL button for the STEREO channel to access the dynamics processors for the output buses Dynamics 83 DYNAMICS Display Function Dynamics can be applied to the input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 LINE 17 18 through 23 24 the tape return channels TAPE 1 through 16 the internal bus outputs BUS 1 through 8 and the stereo output For stereo and paired channels the dynamics processor is applied equally to both channels Shown below is the DYNAMICS 1 2 page KEVIN SELF POST EQ ST LINK OFF KEVIN S TAPE 20002202202 dB 131 ada Threshold Ratio Out Gain 0000025202020 G 22 G EET ED ERR E icd EE ed E ms Sms hard Attack Release Knee VWOOOOOOOOOOOOO 2345 D 0 12 13 14 15 16 The DYNAMICS 1 2 page show
241. ee Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more details 02 Getting Started Guide 8 Introduction to the O2R 02 Getting Started Guide Recalling the scene is even easier just press the RECALL button You should be careful that your scene memories flow into each other smoothly The instant recall means that you can have very abrupt level changes or the unexpected intrusion of a very loud channel Note The 02R allows you to have programmable fades between scene memories The only thing you need to watch is the sudden sound of a channel being switched on Even then if the original channel level was set to dB you should have no problems See Fade Time on page 136 of the User s Guide Large Graphical Display The heart of the 02R user interface is the large graphical display located in the center of the console Using the Display Access controls you can gain immediate access to the features of the mixer clearly displayed on the 320 x 240 pixel FL backlit user friendly graphical display Virtual control modules are shown on the display allowing you to adjust almost any digital parameter anywhere in the system As wellas displaying parameter values numerically faders rotary controls and push buttons are represented graphically so you can actually see button status pan positions and fader levels In addition the EQ curves are displayed graphically as are the dynamics processor parameters Use
242. eive MTC and the first jack to receive MTC takes priority While MTC is being read from the 026 User s Guide 142 Automix MIDI IN jack any MTC arriving at the MTC jack is ignored and vice versa MIDI Time code TIME CODE INPUT MTC lt lt or MIDI IN a fo a a a o o Jo Jo jo n Jo o MIDI OUT MTC OUT MIDI sequencer Note When transmitting MTC to the 02R you should use a dedicated output on the connected device Otherwise the 02R has to discard MIDI playback data and other extraneous information decreasing the accuracy of the timecode data Using MIDI Clock Automix can be referenced to an external MIDI Clock and supports Timing Clock F8H Start FAH Continue FBH Stop FCH and Song Position Pointers F3H H H Use MIDI Clock when you want to synchronize an automix to a MIDI sequencer that does not support MTC Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the controlling device to the TIME CODE INPUT MTC connector on the back of the 02R MIDI Clock TIME CODE INPUT MTC Hc ab MIDI OUT MIDI sequencer
243. el It also accesses the Channel library The EQ button is used to view the equalization curve and parameters of each individual channel It also accesses the EQ library The DYNAMICS button is used to adjust the dynamics of each individual channel It also accesses the Dynamics library AUX group AUX 1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX 4 These buttons access the Display Functions that set the auxiliary send RU AUX levels for the recording console 1 EFF2 AUX5 AUX 6 Al UX e The AUX 1 to AUX 6 buttons set the auxiliary send levels to the corresponding auxiliary buss You can also select whether to send the signal pre or post fader e The AUX 7 and AUX 8 buttons also set the send levels to the corresponding auxiliary bus and can select pre or post fader However 02 User s Guide 20 User Interface these two sends are routed to the internal effects unit Therefore the buttons also allow you to select and set the effects parameters Display The large backlit 320 x 240 pixel graphical display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating status As well as showing parameter values numerically faders and rotary controls are represented graphically so you can actually see pan positions and fader positions In addition EQ curves are displayed graphically and signal levels are metered The following illustration shows information that is always displayed and explains what it means Scene Memory Title
244. elay followed by stereo chorus Parameter Seiting Range Description Delay 400 0ms 0 1 1000 0ms Delay time FB Gain 32 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect LPF THRU 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Freq 0 4Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Chorus modulation frequency Mod Dly 0 1ms 0 0 255 0ms Chorus delay The delay time before modulation starts EQF 315Hz 160 2 8 2 Equalizer frequency EQG 12 to 12dB Equalizer signal gain AM Depth 1096 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM Depth 40 0 100 Pitch modulation depth Program 27 STEREO INI DLY ECHO Stereo feedback delay followed by stereo echo Parameter Seiting Range Description FB D L 220 0ms 0 1 360 0ms Left channel feedback delay time FB G L 40 99 to 99 Left channel feedback gain FB D R 220 0ms 0 1 360 0ms Right channel feedback delay time FB G R 40 99 to 99 Right channel feedback gain Hi Ratio 0 4 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio LPF THRU 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Dly L 220 0ms 0 1 320 0ms Left channel delay time DIy R 110 0ms 0 1 320 0ms Right channel delay time O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 121 Program 28 ECHO This is a common echo effect Parameter
245. elect the band you want to adjust with one the buttons in the top row LOW HPF L MID H MID or HIGH LPF The three LED indicators will reflect the status of the selected band Adjust the values Q bandwidth F frequency and G gain with the corresponding rotary encoders Use the EQ ON button to insert the equalization into the channel Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust any of the controls in this group the display switches to the EQ display function See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide Reset the Gain You can reset the gain of each band to 0 0 dB by double clicking the corresponding LOW HPF L MID H MID or HIGH LPF buttons Reset the EQ You can reset all the values of the EO for the selected channel Press and hold the LOW HPF button and then press the HIGH LPF button All the EQ values will be reset to their default LOW HPF L MID HMD HIGH LPF LOW SHELF Peak 0 7 0 7 HIGH SHELF F 125 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 10 0 kHz 0dB 026 User s Guide 54 MIXING Display Functions EQ Programs These are the preset EQ programs No Program Name No Program Name 1 Bass Drum 1 21 A G Stroke 2 2 Bass Drum 2 22 A G Arpeggio 1 3 Snare Drum 1 23 A G Arpeggio 2 4 Snare Drum 2 24 Brass Section 5 Tom tom 1 25 Male Vocal 1 6 Cymbal 26 Male Vocal 2 7 High Hat 27 Female Vocal 1 8 Percussi
246. en relocating the 02R since the 02R is heavy make sure that two or more people carry it When you are moving the 02R to another location first turn off the power switch remove the power plug from the AC outlet and remove all cables connected to external devices Otherwise the cables may become damaged resulting in fire or electrical shock The 02R offers superb sonic quality To ensure the best possible results you should use the best quality connecting cables that you can afford Regular maintenance involves keeping all connections clean using a quality contact cleaner Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit Liquid or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard Using the 02R Do not touch the 02R under the following circumstances If you hear thunder turn off the power switch and remove the power plug from the AC outlet as soon as possible If you fear a lightning hit and the 02R has been connected to an AC outlet do not touch the power plug Otherwise you may receive an electrical shock Do not attempt to modify this equipment Otherwise fire or electrical shock may result Do not remove the case of the 02R Otherwise electrical shock may result If you think the 02R needs to be checked for maintenance or repair consult your dealer Do not place a container of water or any small metal object on top of the 02R If water is spilled or if the m
247. en store them as user effects programs The 02R has 40 preset programs 1 through 40 Some are simple variations of a basic effect for example different types of reverb and delay echo are available Select the preset effects program that is closest to the effect you are trying to achieve and edit its parameters 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the LIB icon and press the ENTER button The AUX 7 2 3 page appears You can also press the AUX 7 button to get to this page This button allows you to access the aux send levels the effects editing and the effects library pages Secondary Recording Tutorial 51 2 Select the various parameters with the CURSOR buttons and adjust the value with the encoder wheel As you adjust the parameters you should listen carefully to the results Some of the parameters of some of the effects are very subtle in their effect others are quite obvious After you have modified the effects program to your satisfaction you are ready to store it Storing a User Effect The 02R has 88 user effects program locations 41 through 128 for you to store your own settings You can store your effects program in the Effect Library or you can just rely on the 02R scene memory to recall your settings The following instructions show you how to store your program in the library 1 Select the LIB icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The AUX 7 3 3 page appears
248. enced to 0 775 volts RMS In these specifications when dBV represents are specific voltage 0 dBV is referenced to 1 volts RMS Analog Output Output connections OUTPUT 1 through 8 GAIN 4 10 Actual source impedance 1500 For use Output level with nom be Mixer connector inal Nominal tore clip 4 24 dB 1 28mV 12 3 Phone Jack 10kQ lines A 10dBV 10dBV TRS 316 3 16 1 OUTPUT phone jacks balanced Ring COLD Sleeve GND In these specifications when dB represents are specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 volts RMS In these specifications when dBV represents are specific voltage 0 dBV is referenced to 1 volts RMS Digital Card Specifications Digital Input Output Input Output Format Level Mixer connector DA88 DA38 BUS DIRECT OUT TAPE IN TDIF 1 C MOS D SUB 25PIN ADAT BUS DIRECT OUT TAPE IN ADAT OPTICAL XLR 3 31 type INPUT AES EBU BUS DIRECT OUT TAPE IN AES EBU RS422 XLR 3 32 type OUTPUT D SUB 25PIN YAMAHA BUS DIRECT OUT TAPE YAMAHA RS422 D SUB 25PIN CASCADE BUS DIRECT OUT TAPE IN YAMAHA RS422 D SUB 25PIN O2R User s Guide 250 Specifications Troubleshooting If there is any trouble check the situation and follow the corrective actions described below The power is not turned on e Did you plug the power cord to a correc
249. ene memory controls 33 34 35 36 D 4 STORE v RECALL SCENE MEMORY oe ie CURSOR STORE button This button stores the current mixer settings into the current scene memory location Increment button This button selects the next scene memory Decrement button This button selects the previous scene memory RECALL button This button recalls the current scene memory All mixer settings are restored to the positions recorded in the scene memory snapshot RIN 2TI ANALOG Controls and Connections 11 Display controls 37 38 39 Encoder wheel This control adjusts the value of the currently selected parameter Rotate it clockwise to increase the value and counterclockwise to decrease the value CURSOR buttons These buttons select the parameters and options on the display pages ENTER button This button either confirms a parameter setting made with the Encoder wheel or it sets a parameter that only has two possible values Rear Panel INPUT 23 Ox O INPUT 24 INPUT 19 INPUT 20 INPUT 17 INPUT 18 INPUT A OMO INPUT INSERT 9 INPUT A INPUT INPUT A INPUT INSERT 5 INPUT A INPUT INPUT A INPUT toon 182 INPUT A INPUT 1
250. ene memory is recalled the fader level will change from its previous level to the new level of the recalled memory You can control the duration of the change Shown below is the SCENE 3 5 page Fade Time SE Fade Time 88 SEC Tare Line Rtn ST 6 0 17 a a a a 4 E 6 6 18 E 6 0 19 a a a a E 2 E 20 E 6 6 0 0 122 23 e a 8 8 24 QUO r1 9 8 21 r5 The page consists of all the Mic Tape and Line Rtn ST channels with a fade time value beside each You can set the fade time from 0 0 sec to 10 0 sec Note Ifyou double click the ENTER button on a selected channel all the channels will be set to the same fade time as that channel In order for the fade time you set to have any effect you must store the scene memory see Storing Mix Scenes on page 130 of the User s Guide Automix 137 Automix In this chapter What is the Automix 138 Whatis limiecode c esd errand eae ds Saba weet een als 140 Automix 143 Automix Main esae eto chins bie os pote E PT D 144 Memory 148 Pader EAE IRR fbl R 151 Bvent ote i bie n cce 153 Event Edit 5cene7 LD tbt
251. ents inserted at the captured points The Locate function provides a speedy way to locate events in a complex automix ON OFF Channel on off pan and fader events are listed in the Time Code and Channel columns Events can be moved by editing the timecode addresses and events are resorted automatically In the Channel column the channel number can be edited The value in the third column depends on the event type selected using the CH ON ON OFF PAN L C R and FADER dB SEC check boxes Use the CURSOR buttons to move up or down the event list and the encoder wheel to edit values O Selected CH DUPLICRTE DELETE SYNC 88 88 88 08 4 di CAPTURE The selected event can be duplicated or deleted using the DUPLICATE and DELETE icons When the Selected CH parameter is checked only events corresponding to the selected channel are listed useful for editing an automix consisting of many events When the SYNC icon is pressed events occurring around the current timecode address are displayed The timecode counter below the SYNC icon displays the incoming timecode When the CAPTURE icon below that is pressed the current timecode address is captured and displayed in the window below Up to eight timecode addresses can be captured and they are stored when the 02R is turned off The parameter next to the CAPTURE icon is used to select the addresses When the LOCATE icon is pressed events occurring around the captured timecode address
252. ers 11 4 8 84 1 peddle 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt 1 A B C D E 2 cdj e f g hj i j kl m pq ris tu I SRE 8123456788 lt gt JKLMNNO PORSTUUHXVZIXI abcdefshiijklmno Parstuyvuxyzii ey CLEAR Free 99 O Memory Protect You can select the INSERT icon to insert a space blank at the cursor position in the title edit box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The DELETE icon is used to delete the character at the cursor position Note The COPY and PASTE icons allow you to copy the title from another scene memory and paste it into the title edit box for subsequent editing If you use the Copy function be sure to select the scene memory whose name you are editing before storing Otherwise you ll overwrite the scene whose name you copied 6 Press the STORE button If you respond to the confirmation dialog box by selecting EXECUTE and pressing the ENTER button the scene memory is stored with its new name 02 Getting Started Guide STORE s RECALL SCENE MEMORY Secondary Recording Tutorial 65 Recalling a Scene Memory Scene memories are recalled using the RECALL button They can also be recalled using the automix or by using MI
253. ers to MIDI Control Changes which can be used to control 02R mix settings in real time 02R mix settings can be controlled by transmitting Control Changes from other MIDI devices A synthesizer with assignable sliders for example Note that the 02R does not transmit Control Change messages Up to 114 02R mix parameters can be assigned to Control Changes 0 to 95 and 102 to 119 Control Changes 96 to 101 cannot be used See Parameter to Control Change Table 02R amp User Maps on page 256 for more information To use Control Change messages make sure that the Receive Channel Control Change parameter is enabled on the MIDI Setup page See Setup on page 159 for more information Shown below is the MIDI 4 5 page MIDI Control Assign Initial Data MIDI 4 5 STEREO Assi isn SE Parameter Assisn NO ASSIGN FADER CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER Initialize Parameters in the Parameter Assign window of this page consist of four columns From left to right Control Change number 0 to 95 and 102 to 119 parameter type FADER ON PANPOT BALANCE SURROUND and EQ channel type CHANNEL AUX 1 8 SEND and channel number MIC 1 16 LINE 17 24 1 16 EFF1 EFF 2 ST MASTER Parameters can be reset to the initial assignments using the 02R Initialize function In addition Control Change to parameter maps for Yamaha s Programmable Mixer 0
254. es not synchronize to the system wordclock dropout and or other noise may occur In Section 14 Installing Options on page 217 of the User s Guide there are examples of connecting external digital devices to the 02R and setting the appropriate wordclock selection Refer to this section for details for each of the optional digital I O cards Note Wordclock is not required if you use the analog I O card CD8 AD to connect to an analog multitrack recorder Shown below is the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page Word Clock Select Word Clock Select 6 bud Digital I O Setup and Utilities 189 The left side of the display is a list of the cards in the four option slots of the 02 The indication varies depending on the type of optional card being used Cascade CD8 CS ADAT CD8 AT e TDIF 1 CD8 TDIT AES EBU CD8 AE CD8 AE S YAMAHA CD8 Y Analog AD DA CD8 AD Analog A D CD8 AD S No Connection Beside each optional slot indicator is a row of four boxes defining the connections to the card inserted in the corresponding slot Note When a cascade card is inserted in any slot the boxes defining the connections are still displayed However you cannot select any of these items Across the bottom of the display are boxes for the external wordclock W CLK IN the digital inputs 2TR D1 and 2TR D2 and the internal wordclock INT 48k and INT 44 1k To the left of the boxes are the wordclock indicators
255. esetting 53 resetting the gain 53 storing 55 titling 55 using 51 EQ 1 2 page 51 EQ 2 2 page 55 EQUALIZER controls 24 Error messages 251 EXP expander 79 Expander 79 Extracting events 153 F Fader Flip Recall Safe 201 Faders about 28 absolute edits 152 automix edit 151 calibrating 215 fader start 163 fade time 136 grouping 182 MOTOR ON 151 off line event edit 156 relative edits 151 scene recall safe 135 status indicators 99 Fader Start 200 Fade time 136 Fast Meter Fall Time 199 Fitting I O cards 221 FLIP button 28 Force SUB Boot 200 Front panel 2 G GAIN controls 27 GAT gate 81 Gate 81 GM tone generator 175 GROUP 1 2 page 182 GROUP 2 2 page 183 Grouping faders 182 mutes 183 H High resolution recording 204 O2R User s Guide 299 I O cards 218 ADAT 227 AES EBU cards 225 analog card 224 Tascam 234 ID setting cascade 192 Initial data 129 Initial Data Nominal 200 Initializing the 02 215 Input channel delay 34 Input patching 206 Input signal select 190 INSERT connectors 12 Insert Tx Bulk Wait 199 Installing I O cards 221 Internal wordclock 188 K KEY IN dynamics 86 L LCD 20 Library bulk dump 161 channel 48 dynamics 87 editing recall events 155 effects 109 EQ 55 LINK dynamics 86 Link Surround Master 202 M 02 meter bridge installation 236 Memory expansion kit installing 223 Merging events 153 METER 1 2 page 41 METER 2 2 page 41 METER 3 3 page 42 Meter bri
256. ess L low 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd dd2 count EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive type number 0 editbuffer used byte or bit operation format 1 setup used byte operation format request and response for request only 2 backup used byte operation format request and response for request only 24 recall store parameter change only 25 key remote parameter change only 26 fader encoder Remote parameter change only 02R User s Guide 266 Appendix MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE byte operation for type number 0 edit buffer 1 setup 2 backup STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 MODEL ID 00111101 3d MODEL ID 02R PARAM TYPE O0tttttt tt type number bit6 O byte operation Oddddddd ddo address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address DATA Oddddddd dd2 data H high 4 bits of 8 bits data 0000dddd Oddddddd data L low 4 bits of 8 bits data 0000dddd EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive You can modify two or more continuous bytes by increasing pairs of data and data L PARAMETER CHANGE bit operation for type number O edit buffer STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16
257. essor operations Because of these restrictions you may find it more convenient to work on your automix recording one channel at a time when editing EQ and pan data e While you are recording automix events you can select other 02R display functions allowing you to adjust the parameters for multiple channels e To record a recall operation from EQ dynamics or channel libraries press the SEL button for the channel to be changed then use the corresponding display function to perform the recall operation To record a recall operation from the effect libraries use the AUX 7 or AUX 8 button to access the effect libraries 02R Getting Started Guide Mixing and Automix 75 6 When you have completed recording the automix session use the CURSOR buttons to select the STOP icon and press the ENTER button You may find it faster and more convenient to stop the automix recording session by stopping the device that is providing the timecode In this case the effect is the same as if you selected the STOP function on the 02R 1 ORET BIABSOLUTE ORELATIVE The REC icon will change to normal and the STOP icon is highlighted The events recorded during the automix session will be written to the current automix memory You can also discard the events recorded during the automix session by selecting the UNDO icon with the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button You can stop the automix
258. etal object falls inside fire or electrical shock may result This applies to vases potted plants glasses cosmetic bottles medicine etc Do not damage process bend twist stretch or heat the power cord Otherwise the cord may be damaged resulting in fire or electrical shock When you are connecting audio devices or speakers to the 02R make sure that first you turn off the power to all devices to be connected Refer to the user s guide for each device and use the specified cable for connection Set the volume level on all the devices to the minimum before turning on the power Otherwise an extremely loud noise could damage your hearing If you plan not to use the 02R for a long period of time such as when you are on vacation remove the power plug from the AC outlet Otherwise a fire could possibly result Important Information lii If an abnormality occurs while operating the 02 remove the plug from the AC outlet If you notice any abnormality such as smoke odor noise etc turn off the power to the 02R immediately and remove the power plug from the AC outlet Confirm that the abnormality is no longer present then consult your dealer for repair If you continue using the 02R under abnormal conditions fire or electrical shock may result If a foreign object or water enters inside the equipment turn off the power to the 02R immediately remove the power plug from the AC outlet and consult your dealer for rep
259. evel meters for the selected pair as you adjust the EQ values If CLIP is reached digital signal distortion will occur e EQ ON icon Indicates the status of the EQ on or off The text ON is highlighted when the EQ is on e Rotary icons There is an icon for bandwidth Q center frequency E and gain C for each of the four bands LOW L MID H MID and HIGH Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired icon and adjust its value with the rotary encoder Switch the EQ on or off by pressing the ENTER button Equalization parameters Q F G Peak 10 to 0 1 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz 18 dB LOW HPF in 41 steps in 1 12 octave in 0 5 dB steps SHELF HPF steps HPF ON OFF Peak 10 to 0 1 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz 18 dB L MID in 41 steps in 1 12 octave in 0 5 dB steps steps 1 Peak 10 to 0 1 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz 18 dB H MID in 41 steps in 1 12 octave in 0 5 dB steps steps Peak 10 to 0 1 21 Hz to 20 1 kHz 18 dB in 0 5 dB HIGH LPF in 41 steps in 1 12 octave steps SHELF LPF steps LPF ON OFF 1 When the sampling frequency is 32 kHz the frequency range F is 21 Hz to 15 1 kHz MIXING Display Functions 53 EQ controls You can also adjust the equalization for the selected channel with the EQUALIZER controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL group LOW HPF L MID H MID HIGH LPF nnn EQ ON 98 EQUALIZER These controls allow you to adjust the equalization of the selected channel S
260. ew settings and storing them to the same location Conversely it is also very easy to accidentally overwrite a valued dynamics program YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX 02 Getting Started Guide 62 Secondary Recording Tutorial STORE RECALL SCENE MEMORY A Lm Scene Memories The 02R scene memories are a snapshot of all the digital parameters of the mixer The 02R has 96 mix scene memory locations Each can be named for easy identification There are two special scene memories 0 Initial Data is a read only scene memory that resets the 02R to its default settings The other is an undo buffer entitled U Recalling the undo buffer restores the last state of the 02 Scene memories can be stored and recalled using the STORE and RECALL buttons Scene memories are selected using the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons They can also be recalled using automix or by using MIDI Program Changes from a computer MIDI sequencer or MIDI footswitch You can save scene memories to a MIDI data filer Storing a Scene Memory When you store a scene memory you should check that all the mixer settings in the Edit Buffer are correct Some settings may have been adjusted accidentally or by someone else If you are not sure about the exact contents of the mixer and do not want to laboriously check each setting recall the initial mixer settings
261. f how a particular function works You may also want to refer to the LIser s Guide for more detailed information while using the Getting Started Guide Automix System Regardless of your level of experience you should read through the section Mixing and Automix on page 67 of the Getting Started Guide The automix system built into the 02R is unique to this product Even experienced recording engineers will want to refer to this section to discover how to record and playback entire mixing sessions You should also refer to the section entitled Automix on page 137 of the User s Guide Installation You should locate the 02R on a stable surface It should be sited so that the display can be easily read from a comfortable position Leave plenty of access space at the back of the 02R to make the required connections to the other equipment in your digital recording studio 02 Getting Started Guide 4 Introduction to the O2R Bo com Bor obo To 55 2 9 and Rear Panels re ET A ek i a 1758 1920 212 2324 SELECTED CHANNEL CODON
262. f the first O2R into the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the second 02R The 02R that is the cascade master should be receiving a wordclock signal from a wordclock master device such as a modular digital multitrack recorder or other appropriate device Wordclock Selection Power on your modular digital multitrack recorder and then the 02R units in order starting with the cascade master It is always important to observe the correct order for powering up equipment in a studio Start with the multitrack and mastering recorders and the signal processors then the 02R and finally the monitoring amplifiers and other downstream gear Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page Word Clock Select 6 If the cascade I O card was installed properly the 02R will identify it in the appropriate slot Use the CURSOR buttons to select the wordclock source Select the W CLK IN box and press the ENTER button Note Ifthe W CLK IN box is not showing a proper wordclock input no discrepancy between the input and selected wordclock frequencies check the connections between the 02R units On the 02R cascade master use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page If the cascade I O card was installed properly the 02R will identify it in the appropriate slot A digital I O card should be installed in SLOTI or SLOT2 in order to access the direct out lines Use the CURSOR buttons to select the wordc
263. facturer s ID SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 02R User s Guide 284 Appendix MIDI BYTE COUNT 00000000 Channel Library Bulk Dump Format 00 HIGH LOW OTA 122 48x2 16 10 bytes 01001100 4C E 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 ai 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01001000 48 H Ommmmmmm mm m 0 63 Channel Library No 1 64 Ottttttt tt title1 Ottttttt tt title16 DATA Oddddddd dsH Oddddddd dsL Channel Library Memory 48x2bytes Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Channel Library Extended Data STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 FORMAT NO 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT H 00000000 00 Total 38 14 2 10 BYTE COUNT L 00100110 26 01001100 4C 01001101 4 00100000 20 T 00100000 20 e 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y 0268 User s Guide Appendix MIDI 285 Channel Library Extended Data
264. fect Return The effect return channel is similar to one of the input channels except that it has no analog input and therefore no gain or input pad need to be applied Otherwise the steps are similar to those starting with Setting the GAIN on page 21 of the Getting Started Guide The easiest way of applying all the required adjustments is to select the View 1 2 page This allows you to see all the parameters of the channel on one page while you can still use the dedicated buttons and controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL group 1 Use the VIEW button to locate the VIEW 1 2 page shown below and press the SEL button for EFF 1 RTN VWOOOOOOOOO 23456 7 B 9 18 11 i2 is 14 15 15 2 If the sound is distorted or the level is constantly going up to CLIP use the CURSOR buttons to select the ATT icon Adjust the level with the encoder wheel Note In many cases clipping in the effect return channel is caused by the send level being too high You may need to adjust the send levels as well as the attenuation if you experience clipping 3 Select the PAN icon with the CURSOR buttons and set the pan position using the encoder wheel Note Setting the pan position routing and EQ can all be done quickly and easily with the dedicated controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL block 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the ROUTING icons Press the ENTER button to select routes for the effect return signal 02 Getting Started Guide
265. filter cutoff frequency 026 User s Guide 118 Internal Effects Program 19 EARLY REF 2 This is a variation on program 18 It produces a thicker sound Parameter Setting Range Description Type S Hall RoomSize 2 0 Liveness 7 Diff 7 Ini Dly 4 8ms Same as program 18 Same as program 18 ER Num 15 Hi Ratio 0 8 FB Gain 0 LPF 11 0kHz HPF THRU Program 20 GATE REVERB Simulates a gate reverb effect by using the EARLY REFLECTION program Parameter Setting Range Description Type Type B Type A Type B Type of reflections RoomSize 1 9 0 1 20 0 Time interval between the early reflections Liveness 8 0 10 Rate at which reflected sounds fade or decay Diff 7 0 10 Reverb diffusion Ini Dly 0 1ms 0 1 200 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections ER Num 15 1 15 Number of early reflections Hi Ratio 0 8 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio FB Gain 096 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect LPF 12 0kHz 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Program 21 REVERSE GATE This is a variation on program 20 It creates somewhat strange reversed gate reverb sound Parameter Setting Type Type A RoomSize 2 8 Liveness 8 Diff 5 Ini Dly 0 1ms ER Num 15 Hi Ratio 0 8 FB Gain 0 LPF 12 0kHz HPF THRU Range Same
266. formance Compressor CMP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms to 120 121 points Outgain dB to 18 36 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 5 ms to 42 3 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 8 ms to 63 4 sec 3 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48 KHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Note See KEY IN on page 84 of the User s Guide for an explanation of the KEY IN parameter Ratio controls the amount of compression the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in output level Attack controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered
267. ge Assign Table 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01000011 43 00100000 20 DATA Oddddddd dsH Control Change Assign Table 228 2 byte Oddddddd dsL Oddddddd deH Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Scene Memory compact STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 FORMAT NO 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT H Ohhhhhhh hh Total size is variable SIZE 10 BYTE COUNT L 01111111 11 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 5 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01101101 6D m Ommmmmmm mm mm 0 96 127 Scene Memory No 0 96 Current DATA Oddddddd dsH Scene Memory compact SIZE byte Oddddddd dsL contain Extend Memory Oddddddd deH Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 02R User s Guide 276 Appendix MIDI Scene Memory Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C 01001
268. glance and adjust any parameter that you feel requires a change You can view the input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 LINE 17 18 through 23 24 and the tape and effect return channels TAPE 1 through 16 EFF1 and EFF2 Shown below is the VIEW 1 2 page QUOOOUOOUOOUQOO0 23435 D 9 16 11 12 13 14 Unlike the previous display functions in this section the VIEW display function shows the currently selected channel only Phase Attenuation Each time you press the ENTER button the phase will alternate between NOR normal and REV reversed Rotate the encoder wheel to adjust the attenuation Operation for input channels 17 to 24 and MIC or TAPE channels configured as stereo pairs is as follows since only one attenuation control is displayed on the View page the attenuation functions of each channel are linked to preserve their relative settings If the channel whose control cannot be seen reaches the minimum or maximum attenuation setting a message appears The indicators in the PAN L ODD and R EVEN buttons indicate whether the left or right channel of a pair is selected These controls duplicate the phase attenuation function See Phase and Attenuation on page 32 of the User s Guide Pan Rotate the encoder wheel to set the pan position You may find the PAN controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL group more convenient for setting the pan position MIXING Display Functions 45 When you press the ENTE
269. h threshold 0dB the compander is an expander compressor limiter Release determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold O2R User s Guide Dynamics 81 A ae Range 30dB Output Level Gate and Ducking Threshold 10dB A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the ec a level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold It is used for rrr voice over applications where for example level of background music is ue oo S E automatically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly Gate GAT and Ducking DUK parameters Parameter Value 7 Threshold 2048 Threshold 54 to 0 55 points Range dB 70 to 0 71 points Attack ms 0 to 120 121 points Range 9098 Hold ms 0 02 ms to 1 96s 0 02 ms to 2 13 sec 2 0 03 ms to RN 2 94 sec 3 216 points Ep C Decay ms 5ms to 42 3s 1 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 8 ms to 63 4 sec 3 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequenc
270. hannels are configured as a stereo pair CSR and subwoofer adjustments of both channels are recorded The X Y pan movements of left and right channels in a stereo pair cannot be recorded individually Note that if the ST LINK parameter is turned off after X Y pan movements have been recorded it is possible to overwrite the X Y pan movements of the other channel during subsequent automix recording 02R User s Guide Dynamics 75 Dynamics In this chapter Dynamics 018 76 Preset Dynamics Programs 76 Comptessot bt iso epa M eH 77 Expandet pi aet eaa mote ee I eda t een ALERT 79 Compard r Ree e RR SEE REIR 80 Gate and Ducking 81 DYNAMICS Display Function 83 Patching 84 Dynamics Processor 85 KEY IN and LINK 86 Dynamics Library 87 Preset Dynamics Program 90 02R User s Guide 76 Dynamics Dynamics Processors Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels However you can also use them creatively to sha
271. have moved up to the TAPE controls and the LED in the FLIP button is illuminated O2R User s Guide n 2 10dBV STEREO OUT ANALOG C R ST AUX5 AUX6 STUDIO Ld 4 gt a gt N o 4 o E MONO DIM CONTROL ROO Mixing and Monitoring 29 Analog Outputs The 02R is equipped with a pair of analog stereo out connectors one pair XLR type for connecting to professional equipment the other phono jacks There are also two pairs of phone jacks to provide a stereo output to your control room and studio monitoring systems Monitor Selector Switches STUDIO Buttons These buttons select the monitor signal sent to the studio monitor system In many studios this would be a headphone amplifier typically one that could drive several sets of headphones This system provides the monitoring that your musicians need in order to successfully work ona multitrack recording You can select the same signal that is being monitored in the control room with the C R button When you press this button it cancels the current settings When you press it again it restores the previous settings You can send the signal from the stereo bus by pressing the ST button The most flexible approach is to set up a separate mix using one of the auxiliary channels press either the AUX 5 or AUX 6 button and send that to the studio monitors This allows you for example
272. he control room 2 Adjust the volume with the C R LEVEL control You should be able to hear the sound source through your monitor speakers If you are using stereo headphones you will need to adjust the PHONES LEVEL control to set a comfortable listening level Note Be very careful with the level settings especially if you are using stereo headphones When you are adjusting a unit as complex as the 02R it is possible for you to inadvertently switch a very loud signal source Damaged loudspeakers or amplifiers can be very expensive Damage to your hearing can be much worse Your ears are for life 02 Getting Started Guide METER 16 GAIN Introductory Recording Tutorial 21 Setting the GAIN 1 Use the METER button to locate the METER 1 3 page The MIC LINE 1 signal is metered PEAK HOLD a 2 If the sound is distorted the PEAK indicator is illuminated or the level is going up to CLIP press the 20 dB pad switch to attenuate the input signal for MIC LINE 1 You usually need to pad attenuate the input signal when you connect a line level device such as a synthesizer or an effects unit to the channel If you connect a microphone you should not need to pad the signal If you want to use a high impedance device such as a guitar or bass guitar you should insert a direct box or effects processor between the guitar and the 02R or you should mike the guitar amplifier Note The stereo
273. he output buses 1 through 8 the auxiliary buses 1 through 8 and the stereo bus Using the 02 mn STEREO BUS AUX YAMAHA sus MICLINE TAPE 1 Level meters These peak level meters show the signal level of each input channel MIC LINE 1 through 16 LINE 17 18 through 23 24 the tape returns 1 through 16 the effect returns EFF1 and EFF2 the output buses BUS1 through BUSS and the auxiliary buses AUXI through AUXGS 2 STEREO level meter This peak level meter shows the level of the stereo bus 3 SELECT buttons These buttons are used to select the signal being monitored e BUS AUX When this button is the level meters on the right side of the panel will indicate the output levels of the output buses BUS 1 through BUS 8 and the auxiliary buses AUX 1 through AUX 8 e MIC When this button is on the level meters on the left side of the panel will indicate the tape return levels and the meters on the right side of the panel indicate the individual input channel levels MIC LINE 1 through 16 If a digital I O card is installed in SLOT3 and or SLOTA the MIC channels can monitor the output from the connected multitrack digital recorder allowing you to see the levels of tape return channels 17 through 32 LINE When this button is on the level meters on the left side of the panel indicate the individual i
274. highlighted To change the attenuation rotate the encoder wheel until the desired value is shown To set all channels except the stereo output to the same phase and attenuation double click the ENTER button O2R User s Guide Phase and Attenuation Phase The Phase function reverses the phase of an input signal by 180 degrees The phase can be set for MIC LINE inputs 1 to 24 TAPE inputs 1 to 16 and the effects returns Phase reversal can be used to compensate for incorrectly wired balanced cables and microphones When a snare drum is miked top and bottom the channel connected to the bottom microphone can be phase reversed to prevent phase cancellation NOR normal phase REV treversed phase The Phase functions of adjacent channels are not linked when those channels are configured as a stereo pair Likewise the Phase functions of odd and even channels 17 to 24 always work independently The effects returns have only one phase control each so the left and right signals of these channels are always controlled together The stereo output does not have a phase reverse function Phase can also be set on the View 1 2 page Attenuation After A D conversion input signals can be attenuated using the Attenuation function Signals can be attenuated from 0 dB to 96 dB in 1 dB steps The stereo output can be attenuated from 12 dB to 96 dB For the TAPE inputs the Attenuation function comes after de emphasis Attenua
275. hreshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 18 Outgain dB 4 0 Knee 1 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 58 Outgain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 8 Outgain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 Outgain dB 3 5 Knee 4 Release ms 35 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 8 Outgain dB 8 0 Knee hard Release ms 354 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 20 Attack ms 15 Outgain dB 0 0 Width dB 15 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 31 Outgain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 342 Dynamics 93 Description Compressor intended for brass sounds with fast and strong attack Compressor for synth pad intended to prevent diffusion of the sound Compressor for sampled sounds to boost them to be as powerful and clear as the acoustic sounds This program is for percussion sounds A variation on program 23 intended for sampled bass drum sounds A variation on program 23 intended for sampled snare drum sounds A variation on program 23 intended for sampled sounds for loops Compressor suited for a solo vocal source O2R User s Guide 94 Dynamics No Name Type Parameter Value Description Threshold dB 8 A variation on program 27 1 2 5 Attack ms 26
276. iary send levels for the recording console e The AUX 1 to AUX 6 buttons set the auxiliary send levels to the corresponding auxiliary bus You can also select whether to send the signal pre or post fader e The AUX 7 and AUX 8 buttons also set the send levels to the corresponding auxiliary bus and can select pre or post fader However these two sends are routed to the internal effects unit Therefore the buttons also allow you to select and set the effects parameters The channel aux send level controls for each aux send are displayed on two pages The first page shows MIC LINE aux controls The second TAPE and effects returns aux controls SELECTED CHANNEL AUX controls These buttons and controls set the auxiliary send levels for the currently selected channel e The AUX 1 to AUX 8 buttons allow you to select the auxiliary buses you want to send the selected channel signal to The SEND LEVEL rotary encoder is used to set the level indicated by the adjacent LED bargraph The ON button is used to turn the send on or off It allows you to make easy A B comparisons Auxiliary Channels 99 1 Press the AUX 1 button AUX 1 The AUX 1 page appears 2 Selecta channel using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons 3 To turn the send on press the ON button in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls The LED inset in the button illuminates Note The ON button is the on
277. ide the 02R Make sure the card is properly secured with the screws that held the cover plate in place 4 on the O2R Verify that the card has been recognized by the system software on the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page see Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide If the card was installed properly the 02R should correctly identify it in the appropriate slot 026 User s Guide 222 Installing Options O2R User s Guide Double Slot Cards 1 Turn off the O2R TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK ENSURE THE 02R IS TURNED OFF BEFORE YOU OPEN ANY OF THE SLOT COVERS Note Before you install a card in the 02R be certain to turn the power off Not only do you risk electrical shock you can also damage either the 02R or the optional card You will also invalidate any warranties for the 02 or the optional cards Remove the cover plate from the slot in which you intend to insert the optional card as well as the slot over top The double slot cards can only be installed in SLOT1 and or SLOT2 Note You should save the cover plates for possible later use You should also never operate the 02 with one of the slots uncovered This disrupts the flow of air through the power supply and other components and can cause premature failure of internal components Insert the optional card as shown below When you insert the card press it firmly into the slot to make certain the connector on the card edge seats firmly on
278. ided into three groups the CONFIGURATION group the MIXING group and the AUX group plus the large backlit graphical display four CURSOR buttons a detented encoder wheel and the ENTER button There is also a related block of four SCENE MEMORY buttons The SELECTED CHANNEL controls consist of four main blocks of controls each block corresponding to the equivalent controls on an analog mixer The ROUTING block selects the buss onto which to route the current channel signal The AUX block selects the auxiliary buss to send the channel signal to and sets the send level The PAN block sets the pan position of the channel signal The EQ block sets the equalization curve for the current channel The biggest difference between the two methods is that the DISPLAY ACCESS functions are directly associated with one or more pages on the display The following section will briefly explain each of the controls of the two main blocks Later sections will give more details about how to use these controls DISPLAY ACCESS Buttons CONFIGURATION group SCENE DIGTAL UTILITY These buttons access the Display Functions that control the system configuration of the 02R AUTOMIX MIDI GROUP PAIR CONFIGURATION SCENE MEMORY button is used to examine and edit the scene memories You can also set channels to recall safe which means they will not change levels when the scene is recalled and you can set recall fade time O2R User s
279. ifferent monitoring outputs the control room outputs including the PHONES output and the studio outputs Often during a multitrack recording session what you want to listen to in the control room is very different from what the musicians need in the studio For example while recording a rhythm section the bass player and the drummer may want to hear the kick drum at a much higher volume than you need in the control room To cater to this requirement the 02R allows you to create a monitor mix using either AUX 5 or AUX 6 Use the STUDIO buttons to select the monitor signal sent to the studio monitor system You can monitor the signal on the stereo bus with the ST button or select the auxiliary channels AUX 5 or AUX 6 You can select any combination of the ST AUX 5 and AUX 6 buttons STUDIO You can also use the C R button to send the signal being monitored in the control room to the studio outputs Use the CONTROL ROOM buttons to select the monitor signal sent to the control room monitor system See Monitor Selector Switches on page 29 and Monitor Level Controls on page 30 of the User s Guide for more details Internal Effects 103 Internal Effects In this chapter About Effects ewok oie oo ets e ERE ERI Eee es 104 Preset Effects Programs 105 AUX Zand AUX idibus 106 E dU I ARR UC E RU Sr Fa ed ee
280. ight timecode addresses can be captured and they are stored when the 02R is turned off The parameter next to the CAPTURE icon is used to select the addresses When the LOCATE icon is pressed events occurring around the captured timecode address are displayed 02 Getting Started Guide 84 Mixing and Automix When the INSERT icon is pressed a new event is inserted at the captured timecode address The type of event depends on which of the CH ON PAN FADER check boxes is checked The new event can be edited as required 02 Getting Started Guide AUTOMIX Mixing Automix 85 Erasing Events The Event Copy page shown below allows you to copy move erase and trim the level of automix events In this tutorial just the Erase function is used See Event Copy on page 153 of the User s Guide for information about the other functions 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 4 7 page RUTOMIH 4 7 Durs se 18173 enn zs isnt 6 E Tez ster Tore DIZ rs arse 1213 Tent rz sq rss 7901912023 pU 22088 Parameters LiFapER CSURR DiscEHE OERLE C CHUI Oauxi Oaux2 Oauxs aux 1 1 O REMOTES C Olie o B RUx6 O LZ 2 nuxe REMOTES C REMOTES O EF LIE Cors To ae 90 oat 120 100 LERASE 08 Trim Edi Source i BlCurrent The channel icons are used to select the channels whos
281. igital I O Setup and Utilities O2R User s Guide Cascade Aux Bus Assign The Cascade Digital I O card kit CD8 CS has two paired auxiliary buses AUX A and AUX B You can assign these buses to any pair of the 02R s internal auxiliary buses but not to the same pairs If a cascade card is not inserted in the 02R this display is grayed out ID The ID value specifies the order in the cascade of this 02R The first slave unit is assigned 0 zero The cascade master is assigned the highest ID value maximum 3 You can select from 0 to 3 as the unit ID You can only set this item when a cascade card is inserted in the 02R and set to IN When the page is grayed out the ID is automatically set to 0 Cascade Input Attenuator These icons allow you to set the input level of each bus line that is being input into the 02R You can set the levels for the internal buses 1 through 8 the cascade auxiliary buses AUX A and AUX B the stereo bus and the solo bus You can only set this item when a cascade card is inserted in the 02R and set to IN 2TR D2 to Stereo Bus This option allows you to route the 2TR D2 digital input connector to the stereo bus You also can set the attenuation level Note The device plugged into the 2TR D2 digital input connector must be synchronized to the system wordclock to prevent dropout and or other noise You cannot assign the 2TR D2 to the stereo bus if the corresponding switch 2TR D2 has bee
282. ignal On the ATT page you can attenuate signals and reverse the phase all in the digital domain Note You should rarely find it necessary to use the ATT function on an input signal after the gain level has been correctly set but you may need to attenuate after you apply EQ effects or dynamics to the signal Peak Hold 1 Use the METER button to locate the METER 1 3 page 2 You may find the Peak Hold function useful at this point To turn it on use the CURSOR buttons to select the PEAK HOLD icon and press ENTER When the Peak Hold function is on its icon is highlighted ON Edit Indicator Introductory Recording Tutorial 23 The peak level is indicated by an empty square box Peak Hold is very useful for level checking before recording You can leave a mix to play through unattended while Peak Hold watches out for signal peaks If any levels reach CLIP back off the relevant GAIN control or use the ATT display function to attenuate the signal and run through the mix again Note The Peak Hold function also works on the stereo output meters and controls the optional meter bridge 02 3 Toclear the Peak Hold levels select the PEAK HOLD icon with the CURSOR buttons and press ENTER When you clear the Peak Hold levels it also clears the peaks from the stereo output meters Typically you will be using more than just one input channel so you will need to set the input signal level for each channel
283. ils O2R User s Guide Block Diagram seuoug ino YOLINOW 3 110 YOLINOW OIGNLS 4 9 1 gpr Nas xnv WIXVOO 100 039315 naa sav u ABOL 2 SOWNY L 1no O3uais u gny i mun S3NOHd 33431 s 1 9xnv oof 18 204 227 20199195 I e o 9 ediz 9 9 24 12 9 9 q uiz gt 8 2 4 Agpoi jeuuo4 NI Hic iN3eq 9 9 1 gi zieun Fo o guod 5 ngaisav o TAS 8 1 2 LC 2 oso
284. imecode source MTC connector This is a standard 5 pin DIN type MIDI connector It is used to connect the 02R to a MIDI timecode source for external synchronization STEREO OUT DIGITAL connectors The COAXIAL output is an RCA phono jack It outputs the main stereo signals for recording and can be connected to DAT MD and DCC digital recorders via a 750 coaxial cable The output format is IEC958 Part 2 S PDIF Consumer The AES EBU output is an XLR 3 32 type connector It also outputs the main stereo signals for recording The output format is TEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional MIDI connectors These are standard 5 pin DIN type MIDI THRU OUT and IN connections They are used to connect the 02R to external MIDI devices for sequencer synchronization and control WORD CLOCK connectors These are TTL 75Q BNC connectors for transmitting OUT and receiving IN word clock signals A switch is provided to apply a 750 terminator to the signal if the 02R is the last device in the chain TO HOST connector This 8 pin Mini DIN connector is to plug a Macintosh or PC into the 02R for dedicated external system control 026 User s Guide 14 Controls and Connections 16 17 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 to 3 connectors 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 is an XLR 3 32 type connector The input format is IEC958 Part 3 AES EBU Professional 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 and 3 are phono jacks The input format is TEC958 Part 2 S PDIF Consumer Sig
285. imes oversampling D A converters Effects can be applied to input channels or the tape return channels and the auxiliary sends can be configured pre fader or post fader There are 40 preset effects programs and 88 user effects programs for you to store your own settings Dynamics Processors Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels However you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound The 02R features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the input return bus and stereo output channels a total of 50 processors These processors allow you to compress expand limit gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility Similar to the internal stereo effects the dynamics processors are patched directly into the signal path while the audio data remains in the digital 02 Getting Started Guide 10 Introduction to the O2R 02R Getting Started Guide domain The dynamics program settings are stored in the dynamics library There are 40 preset programs for you to recall and 88 user programs for you to store your own dynamics programs Parametric EQ with Library The 02R contains a high performance four band fully parametric EQ Each input channel tape and effect return and the stereo output channel features an EQ You can tailor the EQ curve with a high degree of precision covering the entire dynamic sp
286. in the dynamics programs These are individual channel or stereo pair parameters and are stored in the scene memories DYNAMICS ON OFF can be stored in channel programs Dynamics 85 Dynamics Processor Meters The amount of processor gain reduction GR and the output signal levels are shown on the DYNAMICS 1 2 and 2 2 pages as shown below KEVIN SELF POST E ST LINK OFF Gain reduction is the amount by which a signal s level is reduced The output signal levels are conventional level meters which work from bottom to top The GR level meter is inverted and works from top to bottom For compression expansion companding and ducking the GR meter operates when the processor is active that is when it has been triggered by the KEY IN signal and it shows the amount of signal level reduction For a gate the processor is active when the input signal is below the threshold So the GR meter operates when the input signal is below the threshold and also when there is no input signal Dynamics Graph The dynamics graph gives you a visual indication of how the parameters of the dynamics processor will effect the signal as it passes through The horizontal axis of the graph indicates the input signal The vertical axis indicates the output signal KEVIN SELF POST ST LINK OFF When the dynamics graph is a straight line at 45 from the bottom left corner of the graph it indicates that the dynamics processor will have no
287. ings You can access the EQ library from the EQ 1 2 page by selecting the LIB icon with the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button Shown below is the EQ 2 2 page 1 Bass Drum 2 Bass Drum 2 TITLE EDIT 43Snare Drum 2 S3Tom tom 1 FERS 7 STORE RECALL _CLEAR PASTE VWOOOOOOOOOOOOOG Q 2 3 4 3 673 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 The top of the display shows the EO library icon the equalization curve and a level meter for the currently selected channel pair The middle of the display shows a scrolling list of EQ programs The name of the EQ program under the cursor is highlighted The encoder wheel is used to scroll through the program list A small diagram of the response curve of the highlighted EQ program is shown to the right Beside the list of EQ programs is the TITLE EDIT field The CURSOR buttons are used to select the character and the encoder wheel is used to change its value The bottom of the display contains the control button icons Use the CURSOR buttons to select from the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY PASTE INS and DEL icons Exiting the Library Selecting the LIB icon and pressing the ENTER button switches back to the EO 1 1 page You can also press the EQ button again Icons e STORE This icon is used to store the current program to the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to 02R User s Guide 56 MIXING Display Functio
288. input channels LINE 17 through 24 accept line level signals only 3 Usethe GAIN control for MIC LINE 1 to optimize the signal level Ideally the level should be set relatively high to obtain the best signal to noise performance It is acceptable for the PEAK indicator to occasionally illuminate but the signal levels should not reach CLIP If the PEAK indicator illuminates constantly the signal is overloading the input preamplifier and you may be able to hear analog clipping distortion When CLIP is reached you will experience digital clipping distortion which is usually very unpleasant sounding 02 Getting Started Guide 22 Introductory Recording Tutorial SEL METER 02 Getting Started Guide Back off the GAIN control a little until the PEAK indicator illuminates very occasionally The GAIN control should be set with some care If it is set too low the signal to noise performance will suffer and if it is set too high signal clipping and distortion may occur ATT Display Function If a lot of EQ boost is applied the signal level may reach CLIP on the METER page but the PEAK LED may not light up Instead of lowering the GAIN control which would reduce A D converter efficiency you can use the Attenuator function to attenuate the level 1 Press the ATT button The ATT 1 1 page shown below appears 2 Press the SEL button for MIC LINE 1 3 Use the encoder wheel to attenuate the s
289. ion See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is stored When you confirm a STORE operation any existing data in the selected program location is overwritten YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX RECALL This icon is used to recall a program from the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The recalled program is now the current program CLEAR This icon is used to clear the contents of a dynamics program Use the CURSOR buttons to select the icon Use the encoder wheel to select a dynamics program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to clear the dynamics program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the CLEAR operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the CLEAR operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the CLEAR operati
290. is option checked mix scene data is compressed before Bulk Dump transmission so it uses less memory on the storage device Data is automatically uncompressed when it s dumped back to the 02R Do not use this function when transmitting mix scene data to a Version 1 02R Show Compact Size With this option checked when a compressed automix is in memory the amount of free memory is displayed on the AUTOMIX 1 7 page Automix Store Undo With this option checked automix store and recall operations carried out on the Automix 2 7 page can be undone using the UNDO icon Copy Initial Faders With this option checked a new fader event is inserted when a fader event is copied or moved This new fader event is inserted at the specified Copy To time and takes the fader position at the specified In Time This option prevents fader position matching problems that occur when there is no fader event at the In Time You can specify the time between the Copy To and the new event using the RET parameter Tx 02R Link Message With this option checked the 02R can control several other 02Rs via MIDI This would typically be set on the 02R master in a cascade system See MIDI Link on page 232 Rx 02R Link Message With this option checked the 02R receives Link Messages from the master 02R This would typically be set on the 02R slave in a cascade system See MIDI Link on page 232 Digital I O Setup and Utilities 203 1 Use the SETU
291. it by creating new settings and storing them to the same location Conversely it is also very easy to accidentally overwrite a valued EQ program YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX Introductory Recording Tutorial 35 Routing This tutorial assumes you have a multitrack recorder and you have connected it to your 02R after having one or more of the optional input output cards installed e Alesis ADAT CD8 AT This single slot card supports an 8 channel ADAT compatible modular digital multitrack recorder It provides eight input channels and eight output channels You can insert up to four of these cards in the 02R e TASCAM TDIF 1 CD8 TDII This single slot card supports an 8 channel TASCAM modular digital multitrack recorder It provides eight input channels and eight output channels You can insert up to four of these cards in the 02R e YAMAHA CD8 Y This single slot card supports an 8 channel YAMAHA modular digital multitrack recorder It provides eight input channels and eight output channels You can insert up to four of these cards in the 02R e AES EBU CD8 AE double slot card CD8 AE S single slot card These cards support an 8 channel AES EBU compatible modular digital multitrack recorder such as the Akai DD1500 series They provide eight input channels and eight output channels e Analog AD DA CD8 AD This double slot card supports any 8 channel analog multitrac
292. itable for digital audio use to connect to the CD8 AE S card If your AES EBU compatible multitrack digital recorder has a dedicated wordclock output connector connect it to the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the back of the 02R and turn the 75Q terminator switch on If there is no dedicated wordclock output you can obtain the wordclock signal required from one of the digital interconnect lines Note A dedicated wordclock connection will give you the best wordclock synchronization results 026 User s Guide 226 Installing Options O2R User s Guide Wordclock Selection Turn on your AES EBU compatible multitrack digital recorder and then the 02 It is always important to observe the correct order for turning on equipment in a studio Start with the AES EBU compatible multitrack and mastering recorders and the signal processors then the 02R and finally the monitoring amplifiers and other downstream gear Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page Word Clock Select 6 48k If the card was installed properly the 02R will identify it in the appropriate slot Use the CURSOR buttons to select the wordclock source If your AES EBU compatible multitrack digital recorder has a dedicated wordclock output connector use the CURSOR buttons to select the W CLK IN box and press the ENTER button If the multitrack digital recorder does not have a dedicated wordclock output select the
293. ital I O Card AES EBU CD8 AE CD8 AE S 225 Digital I O Card ADAT CDSSAT 227 Digital Cascade 08 5 229 Digital I O Card TDIF 1 CD8 TDII 234 Peak Meter Bridge 02 236 Spectficallons onc Xx 239 General Specifications 240 Input 246 247 Digital Input and Output 247 O2R User s Guide 16 Contents vii DIMENSIONS 3 4 oor Geen dae eee ee RE s 248 but beh caet b 249 Troubleshooting 250 Error Messages 251 Appendix 255 MIDI Data 262 Parameter Change and Request 265 Bulk Dump and Request 273 Glossaiy i ioa EE ERE ER EE 289 References and Further 295 io xm punc ea ee 297 026 User s Guide Controls and Connections 1 Controls and Connections In this chapter alee E 2
294. k recorder It provides eight input channels and eight output channels You can insert only two of these cards in the 02 02R allows you to route the first 16 MIC LINE channels directly to an output If you have the correct configuration this means you can send direct outputs to a 16 track recorder for example two paired ADAT compatible modular digital multitrack recorders You can route any channel to one of the eight output buses The buses feed to each of the four 8 track I O slots in the back of the 02R You can also route any channel to the stereo bus When you recall Scene Memory 0 0 Initial Data all the channels are routed to the stereo bus 02 Getting Started Guide 36 J Introductory Recording Tutorial Using the ROUTING Display Function There are two ways to operate the Routing function One method is to use the ROUTING 1 2 page The more convenient method is to use the buttons of the ROUTING block of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls 3 H E3 14 ROUTING Note You can customize the 02R so that when you press a button in the ROUTING block of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls the ROUTING 1 2 page automatically appears See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information 02 Getting Started Guide ROUTING Introductory Recording Tutorial 37 Selecting the Routing 1 Use the ROUTING button to locate the ROUTING 1 2 page shown below EN ZI ST 81 S
295. kHz 4 23kHz 12 6 2 G 6 0dB 8 5dB 4 5dB 4 0dB Description Unlike program 9 this emphasizes the low range of the electric bass Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to a synth bass This is used to make a piano sound brighter Emphasize the attack and low range of the piano sound by using a compressor Use for line recording an electric guitar or semi acoustic guitar to get a slightly hard sound Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound This is a variation on program 16 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer This is a variation on program 18 026 User s Guide 60 MIXING Display Functions No 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Name A G Stroke 1 A G Stroke 2 A G Arpeggio 1 A G Arpeggio 2 Brass Section Male Vocal 1 Male Vocal 2 Female Vocal 1 Female Vocal 2 Chorus amp Harmony Parameter LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 0 9 4 5 3 5 105Hz 1 00kHz 1 88kHz 5 33kHz 2 0dB 0 0dB 1 0dB 4 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 9 4 5 297Hz 749Hz 2 00kHz 3 56kHz 3 5dB 2 00 0 0dB 2 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Q 4 5 4 5 0 12 223Hz 1 00kHz 4 00kHz 6 72kHz 0 5dB 0 0dB 0 0dB 2 0dB L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Q 7 4 5
296. l option you can automate the 02R using its internal timecode generator However you cannot synchronize with an external device as the 02R has no timecode output connectors This mode is effective for learning how to use the automix system Basic Connections and Setup 1 2 3 Connect your timecode source to the 02R Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 1 7 page Time Code Free Size 00 00 00 00 Current 1k 479k 99 Undo Bk Offset INT Start Time 00 00 09 00 00 00 00 00 Frames Time Reference E38 O3e0025 O24 snPTEONTCO iNT OMID Automix Overwri te OENABLE OFADER OCH oNOPAN OEG O SURROUNI Edit Out Fader Edit Mode OEND ORET BIABSOLUTE CRELATIVE AUTO REC REC PLAY ABORT Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired Frames rate and press the ENTER button The 02R supports the following frame rates 30 30 frames per second 02 Getting Started Guide 70 Mixing and Automix e 300 29 97 frames per second 30 drop frame e 25 25 frames per second e 24 24 frames per second These frame rates apply to the SMPTE MTC and INT time references 4 Select the Time Reference with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Select the time reference from the four options e SMPTE timecode the motion picture standard e MITC MIDI timecode e INT internal e MIDI MIDI Clock 5 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Automix ENABLE and press the
297. l to its own input would create a feedback loop the function appears message Would Cause Feedback appears if you attempt to route a channel to the bus selected as its input source on the SCENE 4 5 page Also if a channel library 2 Select a channel using program containing routing settings that would cause such a feedback loop is the SEL buttons or the recalled the Input Patching settings on the SCENE 4 5 page are reset to their CURSOR buttons defaults 3 Usethe CURSOR buttons to select the routing destinations and press Direct Outputs the ENTER button to switch a route ON or OFF All the input channels and tape and effect return signals can be routed to the output buses and the stereo bus You can only route the first 16 input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 to the direct outputs The outputs for the optional boards are as follows Slot Direct Out all OFF Direct Out all ON Slot 1 Bus 1 to 8 Direct 1 to 8 Slot 2 Bus 1 to 8 Direct 9 to 16 Slot 3 Bus 1 t0 8 Bus 1 to 8 Slot 4 Bus 1 to 8 Bus 1 to 8 If you select both direct out and an output bus for a channel the direct output will take priority Routing Pages There are two pages to the ROUTING 1 2 function The first page shown below contains the Routing controls for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 and appears when one of these channels is selected ir ja an ja fn jo 5 6 6 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 5 53 6 6 5 5 6 5 53 6 ES G2 88
298. layed The timecode counter below the SYNC icon displays the incoming timecode When the CAPTURE icon below that is pressed the current timecode address is captured and displayed in the window below Up to eight timecode addresses can be captured and they are stored when the 02R is turned off The parameter next to the CAPTURE icon is used to select the addresses When the LOCATE icon is pressed events occurring about the captured timecode address are displayed When the INSERT icon is pressed a new scene recall event is inserted at the captured timecode address The new event can then be edited as required 02R User s Guide 156 Automix Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 6 7 page AUTOMIX Use the CURSOR buttons to select an event to edit Use the CURSOR buttons to select the INSERT icon and press ENTER to insert an event Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DELETE icon and press ENTER to delete the current event Address Capture 1 With timecode running press the CAPTURE button To insert an event at the captured address press the INSERT button Use the LOCATE button to locate events around the captured address O2R User s Guide Event Edit CH ON PAN FADER The Event Edit CH ON PAN FADER page shown below allows you edit channel on off pan and fader events and duplicate delete and insert new events Timecode addresses can be captured on the fly and new ev
299. lect the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The last scene memory that was stored or recalled will be inserted at timecode location 00 00 00 00 Mixing and Automix 73 Recording the First Session 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 1 7 page AUTOMIX 88 Automix Main Sm Time Code Free Size 00 00 00 Current 1k 479k 998 Undo Bk Offset INT Start Time 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frames ime Reference as O3e0025 O24 prece Automix Overwri te OENABLE OFADER OCH OEG O SURROUNI Edit Out Fader Edit Mode Oeno ORET ABSOLUTE ORELATIVE Lx AUTO PLAY ABORT O000000090000099 2 Select the REC record icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The REC icon will flash indicating AUTOMIX RECORD READY status j DENb Ore mieesoLure Orecative 3 Press the SEL buttons for the tape return channels you want to record The LED inset in the selected channel SEL buttons flash indicating that they are armed for recording Note Remember the scene memory you recalled has the FLIP function engaged Therefore you should be selecting the SEL buttons in the row above the faders 4 Start the device that is providing the timecode It should start from a location before the music starts Note The 02R automix function will not respond correctly in cases where the source timecode st
300. lect the NORMAL MODE and 24bit MODE icons and press the ENTER button to set them O2R User s Guide 24 bit Recording Using two recorder tracks per channel high resolution digital audio can be recorded at the maximum wordlength of 24 bits Recorder tracks 1 to 4 are used for the upper 16 bits while tracks 5 to 8 are used for the lower 8 bits In 24 bit Recording mode a single slot can output up to four channels which are selected on the DIGITAL I O 5 5 page See Slot Output Select on page 194 Slots 1 and 3 output bus signals 1 to 4 while slots 2 and 4 output bus signals 5 to 8 Aux stereo and direct out signals can also be recorded in 24 bit mode Output signals are split in two and fed to two recorder tracks For example bus out 1 is split and fed to recorder track 1 upper 16 bits and track 5 lower 8 bits Bus out 2 feeds tracks 2 and 6 Bus out 3 tracks 3 and 7 And bus out 4 tracks 4 and 8 For playback track signals are automatically recombined and fed to the 02R channels as shown in the following table Slot 02R Channel Notes 1 TAPE IN 1 4 TAPE INs 5 8 disabled 2 TAPE IN 9 12 TAPE INs 13 16 disabled 3 MIC IN 1 4 INs 5 8 disabled 4 MIC IN 9 12 INs 13 16 disabled As the table shows in 24 bit Recording mode four MIC or TAPE channels for each slot cannot be used So if all four slots are used for 24 bit recording the maximum number of slot inputs is reduced from 32 to 16 The
301. lected channel with the controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL group L L ODD R EVEN EVEN These controls allow you to select the pan position of the selected channel The buttons select one of two channels channels are always paired for the pan function The LED is illuminated in the selected channel of the pair Use the rotary encoder to adjust the pan position The current position is indicated on the adjacent LED bargraph You can link the odd and even channel pairs by pressing and holding the L ODD button and then pressing the R EVEN button When a pair of channels are linked together in GANG mode The LEDs in both buttons are illuminated and the LED of selected channel flashes The indicator for the selected channel also flashes in the adjacent LED bargraph Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust any of the controls in this group the display switches to the PAN display function See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 39 Routing 1 Press the ROUTING The ROUTING display function is used to select the bus routing of the button input channels and tape and effect return signals The first 16 input channels 1 through 16 can also be routed to the direct outputs By default all channels are routed to the stereo bus Input channels configured as a stereo pair can be routed individually ROUTING The ROUTING display Note Since routing a channe
302. ling Options In this chapter OR OPONE cse eme eue oa etch aug eon Sle 218 Installing 02 Options 221 Analog I O Card AD DA 8 224 Analog I O Card A D CD8 AD S 224 Digital I O Card AES EBU 8 8 6 225 Digital I O Card ADAT CDS8 ALD son s 227 Digital Cascade 5 229 Digital I O Card CD8 IDID sae v tS ER EAE IS 234 Peak Meter Bridge 02 236 026 User s Guide 218 Installing Options 02R Options There are a number of options you can add to your 02R Some of these options add to the convenience and appearance of the 02R such as the peak meter bridge MB02 or the wooden side panels W02SP There is also a memory expansion kit ME4M which allows you to add up to 2 MB of additional memory for the automix system The most important options are the I O cards These cards support direct digital interconnection to the latest generation of modular digital multitrack recorders Alesis ADAT TASCAM TDIF 1 YAMAHA and AES EBU cards are available In addition you can insert a Digital Cascade card into one of the I O slots allowing you to cascade multiple 02Rs together to create a larger digital mixing system Analog cards are also avail
303. lling Effects Programs 1 Use the AUX 7 button to locate the AUX 7 2 3 page shown below The parameters of the currently selected effects program are displayed on this page You will see the library LIB icon an effects curve or icon depending on the selected effect and a level meter for the effects return stereo pair as well as icons for adjusting the parameters 2 Use the AUX 7 button to locate the AUX 7 3 3 page shown below EFFECT TYPE REVERB HALL U REUERB HALL 1 13REVERB HALL 1 23REVERB HALL 2 TITLE EDIT SSREUERB ROOM 1 4 REVERB ROOM 2 HALL SsREUERB STAGE 7 999099900990099999 18111215 14 15 16 ET Alternatively you could select the LIB icon and press the ENTER button to go to the AUX 7 3 3 page 02 Getting Started Guide 50 Secondary Recording Tutorial 02 Getting Started Guide 3 Use the CURSOR butions to select the RECALL icon Rotate the encoder wheel to select an effects program The 02R will scroll through the available effects programs The program that is highlighted is the program that will be recalled when you press the ENTER button 4 Press the ENTER button The effects program is recalled If you attempt to recall a user program that is empty the 02R displays an error message indicating that the selected memory location is not available for recall Editing Effects You can edit the preset effects programs and th
304. lock source O2R User s Guide Installing Options 231 If your multitrack digital recorder has a dedicated wordclock output connector use the CURSOR buttons to select the W CLK IN box and press the ENTER button Otherwise select a box from the appropriate I O slot row and press the ENTER button The current wordclock source is indicated by a highlighted icon See Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide for further details Cascade Settings 1 On the 02R cascade master use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 3 5 page 2 Select the ID parameter with the CURSOR buttons and rotate the encoder wheel until the appropriate value is set The cascade master should have the highest ID number in the system If you have four 02Rs cascaded together the cascade master should be set to ID 3 Note Ifyou connect more than four 02R units together you will have to adjust the delay to compensate for signal processing time See Delay and Cascade on page 34 of the User s Guide 3 On the 02R cascade slave use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 3 5 page If the cascade slave and cascade master units are powered on and connected correctly the ID number for the cascade slave is set to the appropriate value automatically 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Cascade Aux Bus Assign parameter Use the CURSOR buttons to select two pairs of auxiliary buses from the casca
305. ly way to turn the send on or off 4 Tochange the aux send from pre to post fader press the ENTER button The icon is highlighted and the text changes to POST when the signal is post fader Note Pre or post fader selection can only be made from the AUX pages 5 To change the signal level adjust the corresponding fader or rotary encoder until the desired value is obtained Note This example only shows AUX 1 The other channels are identical in function The AUX Buttons The AUX functions for AUX 1 through AUX 6 set the channel send levels to each of the auxiliary buses With this function you can select an auxiliary bus and then set the levels of a group of input channels simultaneously You can also select whether to send the signal pre or post fader Fader Status When the AUX functions are selected the faders change from channel level controls to auxiliary send level controls The faders automatically move to the corresponding auxiliary send levels Note Avoid blocking the fader movements when the faders move to their auxiliary send positions by placing objects on the 02 It is possible to damage the faders The AUX LED of the FADER STATUS indicator will illuminate to indicate the fader status The number indicator corresponding to current the AUX button is also illuminated FADER STATUS The send levels for the input channels are operated by their faders Press the FLIP button and the send
306. memory into the current mix creating a new mix storing Automix clearing Automix or aborting the automix It returns the current automix to its previous state Automix 147 Using the Transport Controls 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select a transport icon 2 Press the ENTER button to operate the selected automix control Transport Controls The following five operations have been made as icons AUTOREC REC PLAY STOP ABORT Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired operation and press the ENTER button AUTOREC Selecting this icon will start AUTOMIX recording when the O2R receives timecode even if it is not in REC ready mode You can use this key when you do not want to press the REC ready key many times Note A channel must be selected with its SEL button in order for any automix events to be recorded REC Selecting this icon will cause the unit to enter REC ready mode The icon will flash The 02R starts recording when it receives timecode during REC ready mode The icon will be highlighted Selecting this icon during AUTOMIX playback will cause the 02R to enter REC ready mode Selecting the PLAY icon will start a punch in recording Note A channel must be selected with its SEL button in order for any automix events to be recorded PLAY Selecting this icon when timecode is being received and the AUTOMIX is stopped will play back the automix Selecting this icon while the 02R is in record ready mo
307. monitoring the recording adjust the parameters you want to fix 7 When you have finished adjusting the parameters press the SEL buttons again The 02R will return to AUTOMIX RECORD READY status Note Ifyou do not adjust any parameters between punch in and punch out points any events of the selected type that were previously recorded there will have been deleted 8 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STOP icon and press the ENTER button You may find it faster and more convenient to stop the automix recording session by stopping the device that is providing the timecode The effect is the same as if you selected the STOP function on the 02R The REC icon will change to normal and the STOP icon is highlighted 9 Stop the device that is providing the timecode Editing Fader Encoder Movements If you are replacing erroneous fader encoder data using a punch in the 02R allows you to monitor the differences on the Fader Edit page 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 1 7 page 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the FADER Overwrite item and press the ENTER button Mixing and Automix 79 3 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 3 7 page Se MOTOR ON are Ld dai COI I 15167 102 ser nez ys s 6 E t2 STEREO Fader Edit Out Fader Edit Mode OEND ORET Time 8 8 GABSOLUTE O RELATIVE AUTO REC REC PLAY ABORT WOOOOOOOOOOOOOG 2 3 4 9 6 7 8 9 16
308. n Conversely it is also very easy to accidentally overwrite a valued effects program YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX 02 Getting Started Guide 54 Secondary Recording Tutorial Patching in a Dynamics Processor The 02R features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the channel inputs tape returns and stereo and bus outputs These processors allow you to compress expand compress expand compand gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer The dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility You can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound Compressor Acompressor provides a form of automatic level control It attenuates high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range making it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher thereby improving the signal to noise performance Limiting is an extreme form of compression where the output signal is sharply attenuated so that it cannot exceed a particular level Expander An expander is another form of automatic level control By attenuating the signal below the threshold the expander reduces low level noise or expands the dynamic range of the recorded material Compander compander is a compressor ex
309. n Refer to the section Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide Look in the chapter Installing Options on page 217 of the User s Guide There is a section for each of the optional digital I O cards that the 02R supports Refer to the appropriate section for the card installed in your 02R EIZ STORE RECALL SCENE MEMORY Getting Started 17 Recall Scene Memory 0 Before you start the tutorials you should set the 02R to its initial mixer settings 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons to select scene memory 0 0 Initial Data 2 Press the RECALL button This is a read only scene memory that contains the default settings for the system The 02R will be reset to its initial settings Note Itis best to start at the beginning of each tutorial and work your way through taking breaks as required If you deviate too far from the tutorial or jump into a tutorial halfway through you may find that subsequent tutorial steps do not work as expected Also note that the tutorials do not explain all 02R functions nor do they serve as a substitute for the User s Guide explanations For full details on all 02 functions refer to the User s Guide 02 Getting Started Guide Introductory Recording Tutorial 19 Introductory Recording Tutorial In this chapter Setting the Input 20 Applying EQ easet Perr e hene
310. n a complex automix 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 6 7 page Event Edit CHON OPAN OFADER 89 ON OFF Selected CH DUPLICATE SYNC 00 00 00 00 4 3i CAPTUR 00 00 00 00 LOCATE INSERT Channel on off pan and fader events are listed in the Time Code and Channel columns Events can be moved by editing the timecode addresses and events are resorted automatically In the Channel column the channel number can be edited The value in the third column depends on the event type selected using the CH ON ON OFF PAN L C R and FADER dB SEC check boxes 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to move up or down the event list and the encoder wheel to edit values 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DUPLICATE icon and press the ENTER button to duplicate an event The selected event can be duplicated or deleted using the DUPLICATE and DELETE icons When the Selected CH parameter is checked only events corresponding to the selected channel are listed useful for editing an automix consisting of many events 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DELETE icon and press ENTER to delete the current event When the SYNC icon is pressed events occurring around the current timecode address are displayed The timecode counter below the SYNC icon displays the incoming timecode When the CAPTURE icon below that is pressed the current timecode addresses is captured and displayed in the window below Up to e
311. n a group or pair move automatically when you move any fader in that group or stereo pair s Fader positions are stored in scene memories When a scene memory is recalled the faders automatically move to their stored positions Fader positions stored when the 02R is powered OFF Even if faders subsequently moved they return automatically to their last positions when the 02R is powered ON again STEREO Note You should avoid placing objects on the 02 that may block fader movements There are several operations such as recalling a scene memory selecting the auxiliary buses and automix playback that automatically move the faders If a fader is blocked it could be damaged as it attempts to move Rotary Encoders To adjust the levels of the tape and effect return channels the 02R provides a continuously rotary encoder for each channel The channel levels are indicated by the Tape Return Level and Effect Return Level icons at the bottom of the display Q FLIP Button Although the rotary encoders are reasonably accurate there will be times for example during a mixdown when you want the increased accuracy FLIP and feel of a fader to adjust the tape return levels The faders for input channels 1 through 16 are multifunction controls When you press the FLIP button the faders switch to adjusting the tape returns The Tape Return icons are highlighted to indicate the input channels
312. n be controlled by adjusting the S level The following table shows how the MS signals work with the channel controls MS Fader Function Pan Function M odd numbered channel M level ML and MR balance in the direction of M 5 even numbered channel S level SL and SR balance Bus send levels are as follows L ML SL SR pan coefficient of the right side of S is inverted Digital I O Setup and Utilities 187 Digital I O Setup and Utilities In this chapter Word Clock 188 Input Signal Select Rr 190 Cascade 191 pul 193 Slot 194 196 Preferences v ott ee bt be e s 198 Aux Output Select ehe expos eese ed o E Re Een 203 24 bit 204 Input Patching eors i ere time wads Riek oe Pa R teal 206 Oscillators Ak RS e s 209 Emphasis 210 Channel Status 211 Battery Check apneicetee a Rice ERR e glade 213 Communication Speed 214 2 S
313. n event at the captured address press the INSERT button Use the LOCATE button to locate events around the captured address Event Edit Scene Lib The Event Edit Scene Lib page shown below allows you to duplicate and delete mix scene and library recall events and insert new events Timecode addresses can be captured on the fly and new events inserted at the captured points The Locate function provides a speedy way to locate events in a complex automix RUTOMIH 5 7 MICI SHE Event Edit Scene Lib o Sm Selected CH DUPLICATE DELET SYNC 00 00 00 00 Mix scene recall events and library program recall events listed in the Time Code Memory and Channel columns Events can be moved by editing the timecode addresses and events are resorted automatically In the Memory column event type and memory number can be edited In the Channel column the channel number for EQ dynamics effects and channel library events can be edited Mix scene events do not have a Channel value Use the CURSOR buttons to move up or down the event list and the encoder wheel to edit values The selected event can be duplicated or deleted using the DUPLICATE and DELETE icons When the Selected CH parameter is checked only events corresponding to the selected channel are listed useful for editing an automix consisting of many events When the SYNC icon is pressed events occurring around the current timecode address are disp
314. n off the power during recording or if incomplete bulk data is received Frame Drop Out Time code frame is dropping out The count in the parenthesis shows the number of dropping frames Frame Jump Time code frame is dropping out ID Mismatch Model ID for parameter change is not correct Illegal Time Range In out time setting is incorrect Low Battery The internal battery voltage is getting very low Back up the setup data stored in the O2R see Bulk Dump Request on page 161 of the User s Guide and ask your dealer to replace the battery MAIN SCIO Framing Err Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center MAIN SCIO OverRun Err Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center MAIN SCIO Party Err Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center MAIN SCIO RxBuf Full MIDI data being transmitted is too large MAIN SCIO TxBuf Full MIDI data being received is too large MAIN SCH Framing Err Check the connection at the TO HOST connector MAIN SCI1 OverRun Err Check the connection at the TO HOST connector MAIN SCI1 Party Err Check the connection at the TO HOST connector MAIN SCI1 RxBuf Full Check the connection at the TO HOST connector MAIN SCI1 TxBuf Full Check the connection at the TO HOST connector MAIN gt SUB Disconnected Consult the nearest YAMAHA service center Make New Mix First make a New Mix
315. n selected with the CONTROL ROOM monitor switches Select another monitor source before you try to assign this signal to the stereo bus Custom Cascade The cascade system was designed to be able to connect four 02R s together but in fact you can actually add even more units if you want The cascade digital I O cards were designed to compensate for the signal delay of connecting up to four units together If you add more units you will have to compensate for the signal delay with the DELAY display function See Delay and Cascade on page 34 of the User s Guide for more details Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 4 5 page DIGITAL 1 0 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the ON OFF icon for the desired bus and press the ENTER button to change the value Select the Word Length with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Digital I O Setup and Utilities 193 Dither When you connect a number of digital audio devices together you may find their digital word size is different For example the 02R uses a 20 bit word size for input and output and a 32 bit word size for internal processing Professional digital equipment uses a 24 bit wordsize while consumer digital equipment uses a 20 bit wordsize In order to obtain the best possible signal quality the 02R has a dither function for its internal bus and stereo bus outputs Dithering is a mathematical process where a random noise is added t
316. nals input here are fed through to the CONTROL ROOM buttons 24 and are monitored in the control room or the studio The outputs of a 2 track master recorder can be connected here for confidence monitoring and playback Note Digital signals routed through the control room selector switch do not have to be synchronized with the system word clock The signals from 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 can also be routed to stereo input channels 17 18 The signals from 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 can be routed to stereo input channels 19 20 or directly to the stereo buss Note Digital signals that are routed to the stereo input channels or directly to the stereo buss must be synchronized with the system word clock to prevent dropout and or other noise Option slots 1 to 4 These slots accept one of the optional I O cards List of Cards Card Format Product Size Slot AES EBU CD8 AE Double 1 or 2 max 2 cards 16 ch CD8 AE S Single 1 4 max 4 cards 32 ch stad ADAT CD8 AT Single 1 4 max 4 Digital I O cards 32 ch TDIF 1 CD8 TDII Single 1 4 max 4 cards 32 ch YAMAHA CD8 Y Single 1 4 max 4 cards 32 ch AD DA CD8 AD Double 1 or 2 max 2 cards 16 ch Analog I O 7 A D CD8 AD S Single 1 4 max 4 cards 32 ch Cascade Kit CD8 CS Single x 2 3 Use slots 1 and 2 for direct output lines to your multitrack recorder See Section 14 Installing Options on page 217 of the User s Guide for further deta
317. ndication of the channel status O2R User s Guide Dynamics 87 1 Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the DYNAMICS 2 2 page DYNAMICS The DYNAMICS Library page appears Recalling Dynamics Programs 1 Select a channel using ihe SEL buttons 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon and rotate the encoder wheel to select a dynamics program 3 Press the ENTER button The dynamics program is recalled Storing Dynamics Programs 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STORE icon and select a dynamics program with the encoder wheel 2 Use the CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel to name the program 3 Press the ENTER button A confirmation dialog box appears 4 Select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button The dynamics program is stored Dynamics Library The Dynamics Library is used to access and store dynamics programs There are 40 preset programs 1 to 40 for you to recall and 88 user programs 41 to 128 plus UNDO for you to store your own dynamics programs You can access this page from the DYNAMICS 1 2 page by selecting the LIB icon with the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button Shown below is the DYNAMICS 2 2 page Release S3ms TITLE EDIT QUOOOOUODUOOGOUUOODOOO Q 23435 673 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 The top of the page shows the dynamics LIB icon the main control prompts the dynamics graph and the gain reduction meter plus a level meter for
318. ne editing 81 overwriting 76 punch in 77 real time operation 69 recalling automixes 89 recording 73 recording notes 74 setup 69 storing automixes 87 time reference 69 titling 87 what is it 68 Aux sends about 42 AUX buttons 42 selected channel AUX controls 42 setting send levels 43 B Basic setup 15 Compander 54 Compressor 54 Converters 11 Crystal clarity 2 D Deleting events 85 Digital audio benefits 10 Display 8 DSP 2 Ducking 54 Dynamics about 9 compander 54 compressor 54 ducking 54 editing programs 58 expander 54 gate 54 library 57 recalling programs 57 stereo output 55 storing programs 59 titling programs 59 E Editing automix events 76 dynamics programs 58 effects 50 faders and encoders 78 on off pan and fader events 83 scene and library recalls 81 Effects about 9 editing 50 recalling programs 49 returns 47 send levels 46 storing user programs 51 titling 51 using 46 EQ about 10 applying 24 bandwidth 28 frequency 27 gain 25 library 30 on off 24 Q 28 recalling programs 30 resetting 29 storing programs 32 titling programs 32 undo 31 Erasing events 85 Expander 54 F Faders 9 editing events 83 level setting 20 Features 5 Frame rate automix 69 Frequency EQ 27 G Gain control setting 21 Ganging pans 39 Gate 54 Initial data 62 Input level setting 20 Installation 3 Interface about 8 Internal effects about 9 I O cards 2 L LCD 8 Library dyn
319. nector impedance nominal Nominal clip 4 dB 424 dB 1500 6000 lines 1 23V 12 3V XLR 3 32 type a 10dBV 10dBV RCA ph phono 90903 lines 346mv 3 16V Unbalanced 4dB 24 dB Phone Jack STUDIO MONITOR OUT L 1500 lines 128V 23V Balanced CONTROL ROOM MONITOR 4 dB 424dB Jack OUT L R lines 12 3V _ Balanced 4dB 20 dB Phone Jack AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 6002 10kQ lines 128V 775V Unbalanced INSERT OUT 0dB 20 dB Phone Jack MIC LINE 1 through 8 eae lines 5775V 7 75V Unbalanced 8Q phones 1mW 25 mW PHONES 1000 p Stereo Phone Jack 400 phones 3 mW 110mW Unbalanced 1 INSERT OUTPUT phone jacks are balanced Tip OUT Ring IN Sleeve GND Inthese specifications when dB represents are specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 volts RMS In these specifications when dBV represents are specific voltage 0 dBV is referenced to 1 volts RMS Digital Input and Output Specifications Input Output Format Level Mixer connector DIGITAL IN COAXIAL IEC958 Consumer 2TRK IN 2 3 S PDIF 0 5Vpp 75Q RCA phono jack DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL IEC958 Consumer STEREO OUT S PDIF 0 5Vpp 75Q RCA phono jack DIGITAL IN AES EBU IEC958 Professional 322 2TRK 1 AES EBU nadas BES DIGITAL OUT AES EBU IEC958 Professional zA STEREO OUT AES EBU pode
320. nel mixer with full dynamic processing and 4 band parametric equalization Dynamic automix all referenced to timecode 96 internal scene memories for storing all digital mixer settings 4 band Parametric EQ with sweepable center frequency from 20 Hz to 20kHz and adjustable bandwidth Q Extensive EQ library Comprehensive dynamics processors on each input channel tape return and buss and stereo output e Compressor e Expander e Gate Ducking Soft and Hard Compander Dynamics library Fully programmable channel settings phase and attenuation delay pan routing meters EQ and dynamics Channel library Two internal stereo effects using proprietary processor chip Effects library 8 output busses 8 auxiliary send busses and main stereo mix buss 24 balanced analog inputs 8 channels with either XLR type or phone connectors Continuously variable gain control 20 dB input pad 8 XLR type inputs with 48V phantom power for condenser microphones 8 analog insert input output connections 2 analog 2TR IN inputs 02 Getting Started Guide 6 Introduction to the O2R 02R Getting Started Guide 2 analog stereo outputs analog auxiliary send outputs Stereo studio and control room outputs 3 digital 2TR IN inputs 2 digital stereo outputs Industry standard AES EBU or IEC958 Part2 Consumer digital inputs and outputs 100 mm motorized faders Fader and mute groups for single fader or button control ove
321. nels is selected 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1e0 DUE2IES TESTES TES E TES E EZ ES TES ES ES E LIL BUS L ILI RUX L Gx EAA Peak Hold The Peak Hold function can be turned on and off from any page of the METER display function Clear the peak hold levels by turning the Peak Hold off select the PEAK HOLD icon and press the ENTER button or by selecting another display function The dedicated control room output meter peak hold is not affected when other display functions are selected Note When the 02R reaches CLIP digital signal distortion occurs You must ensure this does not happen Digital distortion is very unpleasant sounding There are a several things you can do If CLIP is reached but the corresponding PEAK indicator is not illuminated you need to attenuate the channel slightly with the ATT display function see Phase and Attenuation on page 32 of the User s Guide Otherwise back off the GAIN control a little see GAIN Controls on page 27 of the User s Guide Meter Source Points The following table lists the meter signal source points Signal Source Points Post GAIN and MIC LINE 1 24 AID Pre EQ Post EQ Post Fader TAPE 1 16 EFF1 EFF2 Pre Post EQ Post Fader BUS 1 8 AUX 1 8 STE REO OUT Pre Fader Post Fader O2R User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 43 By changing the me
322. nk is on use the CURSOR buttons to select the IN prompt and rotate the encoder wheel or press the ENTER button to select the channels to patch the dynamics processor into O2R User s Guide Patching in a Processor DYNAMICS Icon The DYNAMICS ON OFF icon is used to turn the dynamics processor on or off for the selected channel Control Prompts The main control prompts are used to patch a dynamics processor into a channel or stereo pair Prompt Value KEY IN SELF POST EQ SELF PRE EQ LEFT POST EQ LEFT PRE EQ AUX 1 AUX 2 ST LINK ON OFF IN BOTH L left odd R right even KEY IN selects the processor trigger source the signal that triggers or activates the processor You can select the current channel either before or after equalization the left channel again either before or after equalization or either AUX 1 or AUX 2 You cannot select the left channel before or after equalization for the first input channel MIC LINE 1 the first tape return channel TAPE 1 the first bus channel or the stereo output channel ST LINK determines if a channel pair is to be linked together You cannot turn it off while channels are configured as a stereo pair IN appears only when ST LINK is set to ON It determines whether a dynamics processor is patched into just the left odd channel L right even channel R or both BOTH Note The DYNAMICS ON OFF KEY IN ST LINK and IN parameters are not stored
323. noise and effectively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material Expander EXP parameters Parameter Value Threshold dB 54 to 0 55 points Ratio 1 0 1 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 5 0 6 0 8 0 10 20 16 points Attack ms to 120 121 points Outgain dB to 18 36 points Knee hard 1 2 3 4 5 6 points Release ms 5 ms to 42 3 sec 6 ms to 46 0 sec 2 8 ms to 63 4 sec 3 160 points 1 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 48kHz 2 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz 3 These values are obtained when the sampling frequency is 32 KHz Threshold determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Ratio controls the amount of expansion the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level With a 1 2 ratio for example a 5 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level For a 1 5 ratio a 2 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level Attack controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is expanded almost imme
324. nput channel levels MIC LINE 1 through 16 The meters on the right side of the panel indicate the stereo input channels LINE 17 18 through 23 24 and the effect returns EFF1 and EFF2 O2R User s Guide Installing Options 237 PEAK HOLD button This button is used to enable or cancel the Peak Hold function Note The operation of this button duplicates the function of the PEAK HOLD icon in the METER display function See Metering on page 41 and Peak Hold on page 42 of the User s Guide STEREO BUS AUX Indicators These indicators show the meter source points for the channels being monitored PRE FADER Whenr this LED is illuminated the bus signal before the fader is being displayed e POST FADER When this LED is illuminated the bus signal after the fader is being displayed The meter source points are set with the METER display function See Meter Source Points on page 42 of the User s Guide MIC LINE TAPE Indicators These indicators show the meter source points for the channels being monitored e PRE EQ When this LED is illuminated the signal before the EQ signal is being displayed POST EQ When this LED is illuminated the signal after the EQ is being displayed e POST FADER Whernr this LED is illuminated the signal after the fader is being displayed The meter source points are set with the METER display function See Meter Source Points on page 42 of the User
325. nput specifications 246 INSERT 12 METER 13 output specifications 247 STEREO OUT ANALOG 12 STEREO OUT DIGITAL 13 STUDIO MONITOR OUT 11 TIME CODE INPUT 13 TO HOST 13 WORD CLOCK 13 Consumer format See COAXIAL CONTRAST control 6 Control change parameter assign 164 receive enable 159 CONTROL ROOM buttons 29 Copying events 153 CPH compander 80 CPS compander 80 C R LEVEL control 30 CR Level to MB02 199 C R MONITOR OUT connectors 12 CSR surround pan 73 CURSOR buttons 21 D DELAY 1 1 page 34 DIGITAL I O 1 5 page 188 DIGITAL I O 2 5 page 190 DIGITAL I O 3 5 page 194 DIGITAL I O 4 5 page 193 DIGITAL I O 5 5 page 191 Dimensions 248 DIO Warning OFF 199 Direct outputs 39 Display 20 DISPLAY ACCESS buttons 18 Display functions 22 Dither 193 Dolby AC 3 66 Dolby Surround 66 Double slot cards 218 Ducking 81 DUK ducking 81 Dynamics about 76 curve 85 KEY IN 86 library 87 LINK 86 meters 85 patching 84 programs 76 90 recalling 87 storing 87 titling 87 DYNAMICS 1 2 page 83 DYNAMICS 2 2 page 87 E Echo MIDI 159 Edit buffer 129 Editing automix events 153 dynamics 83 effects 108 library recalls 155 on off pan faders 156 scene recalls 155 Effects about 104 editing 108 library 109 programs 105 112 recalling 109 sends 106 storing 109 titling 109 Emphasis monitor 210 Enable automix 145 Encoder wheel 21 END mode 152 ENTER button 21 EQ library 55 parameters 52 programs 54 58 recalling 55 r
326. ns O2R User s Guide select a program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected program The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the STORE operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is stored When you confirm a STORE operation any existing data in the selected program location will be overwritten YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX RECALL This icon is used to recall a program from the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The recalled program is now the current program CLEAR This icon is used to clear the contents of an EQ program Use the CURSOR buttons to select the icon Use the encoder wheel to select an EQ program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to clear the EQ program The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE
327. nter speaker the CSR Center Side Ratio control can be used to set the amount of front center sound heard through the center and left and right front speakers CSR Description 0 0 The front center sound appears only in the left and right speakers The front center sound appears in the center and left and 0 5 right speakers at the same level 1 0 The front center sound appears only in the center speaker Surround Pan Notes Surround pan settings can be stored and recalled using scene memories The FAST parameter setting on the ROUTING 4 4 page however is not stored Real time surround pan adjustments can be recorded in an automix and on the SETUP 4 4 page Preferences 2 you can choose which surround parameters are recorded X Y surround pan position CSR Center Side ratio and SWF subwoofer Although it is possible to select other trajectories on the ROUTING 4 4 page while automix recording is in progress these actions are not recorded Likewise the ST LINK parameter cannot be turned on or off while recording In both cases an Automix Running message appears To automate these parameters store the settings scene memory and use the automix to recall that When channels are linked using ST LINK the X Y pan movements of both channels are recorded regardless of which channel is selected CSR and subwoofer adjustments however are recorded only for the selected channel Of course if the c
328. o select the rotary icon and the encoder wheel to select a remote configuration Use the CURSOR buttons to select the MIDI CH parameter and the encoder wheel to select a MIDI Channel for the remote Only MIDI Channels other than the MIDI Channels selected on the MIDI 1 5 page can be selected O2R User s Guide Configuring Remotes MIDI Remote operations take place on the MIDI 5 5 page shown below Up to four remotes can be active at the same time each operating on a different MIDI Channel The REMOTE 1 to 4 icons are used to select the remotes 01110191 Data MIDI 55 MIC2 NO OPERATION EERGTE NO ASSIGN REMOTE On the page shown below the Programmable Mixer 01 configuration has been selected for use with REMOTE 1 The same configuration can be selected for use with several remotes So you could for example control two or three 02Rs remotely REMOTES Pragrammable Mixer Od PGM SCENE TITLE MIDI ONNECT L8 CAT 1 2 3 4 amp 7 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 15 JE VWOOOOOOOOOOOE AN LIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIBLIB PACA RACH CAGE CARA CHER CARA GA GAGE 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 a TER a 808 a 0888 a 082 8007 000 While the MIDI 5 5 page is selected the following controls have no effect on the 02R essentially these control are in a local off condition 02R faders rotary encoders ON buttons MIC LINE
329. o that it cannot exceed a particular level See Dynamics Processor Confidence monitoring Listening directly from a recording medium to ensure the program material is being recorded correctly Most analog recorders have a playback head trailing the record head allowing you to hear the material directly after it has been recorded Professional DAT recorders usually have four heads for confidence monitoring as do a number of the modular digital multitrack recorders Hard disk recorders offer their own form of confidence monitoring D A converter The conversion of a digital data stream into analog signals The digital word is buffered and then converted into an analog signal After conversion the analog signal is usually processed through a smoothing filter which removes the step transitions between the digital words The 02R uses 20 bit linear digital to analog converters for most of its analog outputs DAT cassette Metal chrome cassette tape thickness 13um width 8 8mm Delay A delay applied to the input signals processed by the 02R to compensate for signal processing delays for example caused by the gap between the record and playback heads of a multitrack recorder O2R User s Guide Glossary 291 Dither Dithering is a mathematical process where a random noise is added to the least significant bit of a digital word With very low level signals the quantization error becomes correlated to the signal level This create
330. o the least significant bit of a digital word With very low level signals the quantization error becomes correlated to the signal level This creates a small but measurable amount of distortion By adding dither the correlation between the signal level and the quantization error is cancelled allowing the digital system to encode amplitudes smaller than the least significant bit If you change the word size as a signal passes from one digital system to another being able to add dither allows you to maintain a high quality signal Shown below is the DIGITAL I O 4 5 page Dither SE Dither Word Lensth 007 27 al A Dither ON OFF You can turn the dither function on or off for the stereo bus and for the internal buses 1 through 8 The internal buses are paired for the dither function Word Length You can add dither to compensate for any word size from 16 bit to 24 bit 02R User s Guide Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 3 5 page DIGITAL 1 0 Use the CURSOR buttons to chose one of the four SLOT icons and the ENTER button to select it Slots can also be selected by pressing the left or right cursor button repeatedly Use the CURSOR buttons to select a source for each output O2R User s Guide 194 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Slot Output Select The Slot Output Select function allows you to individually select bus outs aux sends channel direct outs
331. ogram change assign 160 scene memory 129 User interface 18 UTILITY 1 4 page 209 UTILITY 2 4 page 210 UTILITY 3 4 page 211 UTILITY 4 4 page 213 214 V View 44 VIEW 1 2 page 44 VIEW 2 2 page 48 W Wooden side panels installing 223 Wordclock 188 02R User s Guide YAMAHA Digital Recording Console Date 20 June 1997 Model 02R MIDI Implementation Chart Version 2 0 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 16 Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 Default OMNI off OMNI on Memorized Mode Messages X Altered Note Number True voice Fader Start Velocity Note ON Note OFF After Key s Touch Ch s Pitch Bend Control x Change 0 95 102 119 Prog 0 127 0 127 1 Change True 0 96 System Exclusive 2 Song Pos X X Common Song Sel X X Tune X X System Clock X X Real Time Commands x x Local ON OFF x X Aux All Notes OFF x x Messages Active Sense o X Reset X X Notes MTC quarter frame message is recognized MTC IN amp MIDI IN For program 1 128 memory 0 96 is selected 2 Bulk Dump Request and Parameter Change Request Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO 0 Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No User Setting Sheet
332. om noise that contains an equal amount of energy per frequency band That is 100 200 800 900 and 3000 3100 Pink noise has an equal amount of energy per octave The bands 100 200 800 1600 and 3000 6000 all contain the same amount of energy Word One sample of audio data In the 02R a word is 20 bits Wordclock Wordclock is a sync pulse which allows devices to determine where the start of each digital word is When multiple digital devices are connected together it is vital that each device knows where a digital word starts and stops Otherwise dropout or distortion may result Although most digital interconnect protocols are self clocking it is more reliable to use a dedicated line for your wordclock signal This is especially important in a multitrack environment where up to eight channels of digital data may be multiplexed on one cable O2R User s Guide Glossary 295 References and Further Reading e Introducing Digital Audio Ian R Sinclair second edition PC Publishing 1992 e Practical Recording Techniques Bruce and Jenny Bartlett Sams 1992 e Principles of Digital Audio Ken C Pohlmann Howard W Sams amp Co 1989 The Art of Digital Audio John Watkinson Focal Press Butterworth Group 1990 e The MIDI Ins Outs amp Thrus Jeff Rona Hal Leonard Publishing 1992 e Yamaha Sound Reinforcement Handbook Gary Davis and Ralph Jones second edition Hal Leonard Publishing Corporation 1990
333. ompander Soft CPS e Ducking DUK Select the preset dynamics program that is closest to the effect you are trying to achieve and edit its parameters For a list of the preset programs see Preset Dynamics Programs on page 76 of the User s Guide Note The program name of each preset dynamics program contains a three letter code indicating the type of dynamics processor it is 1 Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the DYNAMICS 1 2 page shown below DYNAMICS KEVIN SELF POST ST LINK OFF SRE KEVIN TAPE 2 41516171581 Threshold Ratio Gain ung 200502020 0 0 IST ED ERI EE ed ER s ams Sms hard LINK Rttack Release Knee VWOOOOOOOOOOOOOG Q 2 3 4 3 673 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 Alternatively you could use the LIB icon on the DYNAMICS 2 2 page to go to the DYNAMICS 1 2 page 2 Select the various parameters with the CURSOR buttons and adjust the values with the encoder wheel After you have modified the dynamics program to your satisfaction you are ready to store it 02 Getting Started Guide Secondary Recording Tutorial 59 Storing a User Dynamics Program The 02R has 88 user dynamics program locations 41 through 128 for you to store your own settings You can store your dynamics program in the Dynamics Library or you can just rely on the 02R scene memory to recall your settings The following instructions show you how to store you
334. on will be automatically cancelled To clear the dynamics program use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is cleared If you change your mind the cleared dynamics program can be retrieved by recalling the Undo dynamics program U COPY This icon is used to copy the name of a library program Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The program name is copied into an edit buffer Dynamics 89 e PASTE This icon is used to paste a program name previously selected with the COPY operation into the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The program name is pasted from the edit buffer into the TITLE EDIT box for subsequent editing INS This icon is used to insert blank characters into the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button DEL This icon is used to delete characters from the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button UNDO Operation When the 02R stores or recalls a program the previous settings are always preserved in the UNDO buffer If you discover you have made a mistake you can always recall the UNDO buffer displayed as U in the scrolling list of programs Use the CURSOR buttons
335. on 28 Female Vocal 2 9 E Bass 1 29 Chorus amp Harmony 10 E Bass 2 30 Total EQ 1 11 Syn Bass 1 31 Total EQ 2 12 Syn Bass 2 32 Total EQ 3 13 Piano 1 33 Bass Drum 3 14 Piano 2 34 Snare Drum 3 15 E G Clean 35 Tom tom 2 16 E G Crunch 1 36 Piano 3 17 E G Crunch 2 37 Piano Low 18 E G Distortion 1 38 Piano High 19 E G Distortion 2 39 Fine EQ Cass 20 A G Stroke 1 40 Narrator Note The programs 33 to 40 contain preset programs and are listed in the table above However you can store your own settings to these programs O2R User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 55 1 Use the EQ button to select the EQ 2 2 page EQ Recalling EQ Programs 1 Selecta channel using the SEL buttons 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon and select an EQ program with the encoder wheel 3 Press the ENTER button The EQ program is recalled Storing EQ Programs 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STORE icon and select an EQ program with the encoder wheel 2 Use the CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel to name the program 3 Press the ENTER button The 02R pops up a confirmation request 4 Select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button The EQ program is stored EQ Library The EQ Library is used to access and store EQ settings stored as programs There are 40 preset programs 1 to 40 for you to recall and 88 user programs 41 to 128 plus UNDO for you to store your own EQ sett
336. on begins Rev Time 2 65 0 3 30 05 Reverb time Diff 8 0 10 Reverb diffusion Ini Dly 10 0ms 0 1 200 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections LPF 9 0KHz 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF 45Hz THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Depth 6196 0 100 Reverb depth The amount of reverb Program 17 FLANGE gt REVERB2 This is a variation of program 16 Parameter Setting Freq 3 3Hz Depth 9 FB Gain 63 Mod Dly 0 4ms Rev Time 1 45 Diff 8 Ini Dly 9 1ms LPF 9 0KHz HPF 45Hz Depth 56 Range Same as program 16 Program 18 EARLY REF 1 Simulates early reflections only It can create a wide range of effects from gate reverb to ambience effects Description Same as program 16 Parameter Setting Range Description Type L Hall ER type Choose S Hall L Hall Random Reverse Plate or Spring RoomSize 2 5 0 1 20 0 Time interval between the early reflections Liveness 2 0 10 Rate at which reflected sounds fade or decay Diff 8 0 10 Reverb diffusion Ini Dly 23 7ms 0 1 200 0ms Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections ER Num 15 1 15 Number of early reflections Hi Ratio 0 8 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio FB Gain 096 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the effect LPF 10 0kHz 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass
337. onnect it in the same manner as the first unit The Alesis ADAT modular digital multitrack recorder does not have a dedicated wordclock output connector If you are using the BRC ADAT remote controller you can use the 48kHz OUT connector and an appropriate cable to plug it into the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the back of the 02R and turn the 750 terminator switch on If there is no dedicated wordclock output you can obtain the wordclock signal required from the digital interconnect line Note A dedicated wordclock line will give you the best wordclock synchronization results 026 User s Guide 228 Installing Options Wordclock Selection 1 Power on your ADAT modular digital multitrack recorder and then the 02R It is always important to observe the correct order for powering up equipment in a studio Start with the ADAT and mastering recorders and the signal processors then the 02R and finally the monitoring amplifiers and other downstream gear Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page Word Clock Select 6 If the card was installed properly the 02R will identify it in the appropriate slot The ADAT digital I O card CD8 AT can be installed in any slot You should install the first two cards in SLOT1 and SLOT2 in order to access the direct out lines Note Ifthe W CLK IN box or the TAPE1 2 box is not showing a proper wordclock input no discrepancy between the input and sele
338. ont left front right rear left rear right 341 L R C S left right center surround 34241 FL FR RL RR FC SW Ter front left front right rear left rear right front center subwoofer O2R User s Guide While a surround mode is active buses 1 to 6 cannot be used for regular routing Buses 5 and 6 however can be used as normal with the 2 2 and 341 surround modes Use the ROUTING button to locate the ROUTING 2 4 page ROUTING Use the CURSOR buttons to select the SURROUND icon and press the ENTER button A confirmation dialog box appears Select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select a surround mode and press the ENTER button To turn off the Surround function select the SURROUND icon and press the ENTER button Selecting a Surround Mode Surround Pan 65 Surround pan modes are selected on the ROUTING 2 2 page Surround On Off When the Surround function is active there are four ROUTING pages SHEER Surround On Off SENE SHE Surround Mode 2 2 Surround Mode Four channel surround sound consisting of front left FL front right FR rear left RL and rear right RR channels Hs a 8 Bus Out 1 Bus Out 2 Pe Bus Out 4
339. ontrols for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 and appears when one of these channels is selected The second page shown below contains the Phase and Attenuation controls for TAPE channels 1 to 16 effects returns EFF 1 and EFF 2 and the stereo output and appears when one of these channels is selected Note When a stereo channel 17 to 24 is stored to the channel library phase and attenuation parameters for both the left and right channels are stored If such a channel program is recalled to a mono channel the phase and attenuation settings of the left channel are used 026 User s Guide 34 MIXING Display Functions 1 Press the DELAY button DELAY The DELAY display function appears 2 Select a channel using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons 3 By default the delay is off Press the ENTER button to turn it on The OFF icon highlighted changes to ON 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select either Smpl or mSEC 5 To change the delay rotate the encoder wheel until the desired value is shown 6 Toset all channels to the same delay time double click the ENTER button Delay The DELAY display function is used to apply a small amount of delay to input or return signals to compensate for situations such as line or cabling delays or the gap between the record and playback heads or circuitry of your multitrack recorder You can delay a signal from 0 to 2 600 samples at 44 1 kHz this i
340. opied Please Confirm 051 gt 2 CANCEL EXECUTE To cancel a channel pair press both SEL buttons and choose EXECUTE on the Break Pair dialog box 02R User s Guide 168 MIDI MIDI Machine Control 02R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a a device that supports MMC MIDI Machine Control such as a recorder 02R Controls ON buttons MIC 1 Rewind MIC 2 Fast Forward MIC 3 Stop MIC 4 Play MIC 5 Pause MIC 6 Record TAPE 1 8 Locate points 1 8 recall Transport functions on MMC supporting device can be controlled from the 02R using MIC ON buttons 1 to 6 Up to eight locate points can be set using the CURSOR buttons and encoder wheel and TAPE ON buttons 1 to 8 are used to locate the specified points These locate points are linked with the capture buffers in Automix mode and when time code is inputted press the ENTER button while the cursor is on the locate point number to capture the time code Time reference and frame rate are also linked with the Automix mode Set the Device Number DEVICE NO to match that assigned to the MMC device 7 REMOTE OF MID Machine On MID Machine Contro MIDI Machine Contro Time Code 66 00 68 Locate Point i 28 83 17 Reference SMPTE 88 88 88 C trones J 88 88 80 4 22 02 00 45678 00 00 00 j
341. ory Manasement TITLE EDIT i New Mix ESTE CRP CNS CEL STORE EEL Ss Automix Overwri te O ENABLE OFADER OCH ON OPAN OEC O SURROUND Edit Out Time Code Free OEND ORET 00 00 00 060 479k CLUNDO FE ee oe 50 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 E2 The top left of the display shows a scrolling list of the 16 AUTOMIX memories The top right of the display is the Title Edit field The CURSOR buttons are used to select the character and the encoder wheel is used to change its value AUTOMIX memory names can be up to 16 characters long Below the Title Edit field are the edit control button icons Use the CURSOR buttons to select from the PASTE COPY INS DEL STORE RECALL CLEAR and A CLR icons Between the list of AUTOMIX memories and the Title Edit field is the memory Size indicator The bottom of the display consists of three rows The first row allows you to set the Automix ENABLE and select the real time edit Overwrite status FADER CH ON PAN EQ SURROUND The second row allows you set the Edit Out to END or RET Beside that is the timecode counter and the Free memory indicator At the end of the row are the UNDO which allows you to undo the last edit operation and NEW which creates a new automix in the current buffer icons The last row on the bottom contains the automix transport icons AUTOREC REC PLAY STOP or ABORT Automix 149 AUTOMIX Name Edit Functions
342. ory is loaded but it cannot compensate for the sudden burst of a channel suddenly being switched on See Fade Time on page 136 of the User s Guide O2R User s Guide Use the SCENE MEMORY button to locate the SCENE 2 5 page SCENE MEMORY Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Enable Disable options and use the ENTER button to ENABLE the safe function Select the individual channels with the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons Press the ENTER button to enable a channel Its icon is highlighted Press the STORE button Respond to the confirmation dialog box by selecting EXECUTE and pressing the ENTER button The scene memory is stored Scene Memories 135 Fader Recall Safe The 02R has two methods of protecting the system from sudden volume level changes when a scene memory is recalled You can select individual channels to safety When the scene memory is recalled the fader level will not change from the level it was set to in the previous mix Shown below is the SCENE 2 5 page Fader Recall Safe Enable Disable Stereo Mas Recall Safe ENABLE STEREO Tare Recall Safe Recall Safe E e EHE E s EC E cn Line Recall Safe Eff Recall Safe mbapaB a The Enable Disable controls are in the top left corner of the page Use the CURSOR buttons to selec
343. oves by a corresponding amount For further details see Pan Gang on page 37 of the User s Guide 02 Getting Started Guide Secondary Recording Tutorial 41 Secondary Recording Tutorial In this chapter Aux sends siste er muet uS qu e RE ERO PEDI EN RET Sheed 42 Setting the Aux Send Level 43 Creating a Monitor Mix 45 Applying Effects isser eden ee rhy ee awoke een qa hate 46 Recalling and Editing 49 Patching in a Dynamics Processor 54 Using the Dynamics Library 57 Scene Memories a eoe es bea e te ERRAT ES 62 02R Getting Started Guide 42 Secondary Recording Tutorial Aux Sends The 02R has eight aux sends AUX 7 and AUX 8 are used to feed the internal effects processors with the signal remaining entirely in the digital domain The other auxiliary sends AUX 1 through AUX 6 can be used to feed external signal processors and effects units foldback amplifiers or multitrack recording equipment AUX 5 and AUX 6 can also be used to construct a monitor mix and routed directly to either the studio or control room monitors When a send is used to feed an external effects processor the processed signal can be returned via one of the stereo input channels or an unused input channel
344. pander a combination of signal compression and expansion The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below the width For very dynamic material this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping Gate and Ducking A gate or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve tube amps effects pedals and microphones Ducking is used to automatically reduce signal levels when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold It is used for voice over applications where for example the level of background music is automatically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly 02 Getting Started Guide DYNAMICS Secondary Recording Tutorial 55 Compressing the Stereo Output You can apply dynamics to the input channels for example the channel you have used throughout these tutorials MIC LINE 1 The selection of dynamics program would depend on the input material a gate for a noisy guitar amp a compressor for an unpredictable vocalist and so on In this case apply a compressor to the stereo bus to add punch to the output signal You can hear the effect by monitoring the stereo bus with the control room buttons 1 Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the DYNAMICS 1 2 page shown below KEVIN S
345. pe the volume envelope of a sound The 02R features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels tape returns and the bus and stereo outputs These processors allow you to compress expand compress expand compand gate or duck the signals passing through the mixer giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility Preset Dynamics Programs These are the preset dynamics programs Program Name Program Name A Dr BD BrassSection CMP A Dr BD Syn Pad CMP A Dr BD SamplingPerc CPS A Dr BD Sampling BD CMP A Dr SN Sampling SN CMP A Dr SN Hip Comp CPS A Dr SN Solo Vocal1 CMP A Dr SN Solo Vocal2 CMP A Dr Tom Chorus CMP A Dr OverTop Compander H E B finger Compander S CPS E B slap Click Erase EXP Syn Bass Announcer CPH Piano1 Easy Gate GAT Piano2 BGM Ducking DUK E Guitar Limiter1 CPS A Guitar Limiter2 CMP Strings1 Total Comp1 CMP Strings2 Total Comp2 CMP Strings3 Total Comp3 CMP O2R User s Guide Dynamics 77 Output Level Compressor compressor provides a form of automatic level control By attenuating high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore improving the signal to noise per
346. ppropriate slot 2 Make the required connections between the 02R and your analog devices You should use the highest quality connecting cables you can afford to maintain the best possible signal quality Installing Options 225 Digital I O Card AES EBU CD8 AE CD8 AE S The AES EBU digital I O cards CD8 AE CD8 AE S are used to connect AES EBU compatible multitrack digital recorders or other similar digital devices to the 02R Installing the CD8 AE CD8 AE S The CD8 AE card is a double slot card see Double Slot Cards on page 222 The CD8 AE S card is a single slot card see Single Slot Cards on page 221 Connect the AES EBU compatible multitrack digital recorder to the 02R using the appropriate connectors XLR cable x 4 XLR cable x 4 AES EBU OUT AES EBU IN CD8 AE BNC 75Q cable SLOT 1 H H Peppe a Je CLOCK AES EBU OUT OUT IN n Digital MTR pesa o000 o ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo lololol oppooo This illustration shows how to connect to a CD8 AE card For the CD8 AE S card 25 pin D SUB cables are used instead of the XLR cables E e Use high quality 1100 digital connecting cables to connect to the CD8 AE card Use 25 pin D SUB cables that are su
347. puts and outputs The CD8 AD S offers 8 analog phone jack inputs on a single slot card Conversion is performed in 20 bit linear The sampling frequency is the same as the current wordclock master on the 02R Cascade I O Card This card allows you to connect the bus lines 1 through 8 two pairs of the auxiliary buses 1 through 8 to the cascade card s AUX A and AUX B buses the STEREO bus and the SOLO bus of two or more 02R s One 02R is the cascade master the others slaves The following table lists the I O cards available Card Format Product Size amp Location double slots 1 or 2 Cece max 2 cards 16 ch AES EBU single slots 1 S max 4 cards 32 ch single slots 1 4 Digital I O ADAT CD8 AT max 4 cards 32 ch f single slots 1 4 TOA Posten max 4 cards 32 ch single slots 1 4 max 4 cards 32 ch double slots 1 or 2 RUNS CDSAD max 2 cards 16 ch Analog I O indie siis dca RD single slots 1 AD max 4 cards 32 ch single slots 1 4 normally 3 or 4 cascade Kit GDE GS kit incl 2 cards amp cable Peak Meter Bridge The Peak Meter Bridge 02 displays the levels for all the input output and bus channels of the 02R plus it duplicates the stereo output signal meters The meter bridge displays the information shown on the METER pages in a much more convenient form 026 User s Guide 220 Inst
348. r program in the library 1 Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the DYNAMICS 2 2 page shown below POST EG I Attack Release S3ms TITLE EDIT QUOOOUOODOOGOUOOQOQOO0 Q 234 5 D 7 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 Alternatively you could use the LIB icon on the DYNAMICS 1 2 page to go to the DYNAMICS 2 2 page 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the TITLE EDIT box 3 Select the individual character positions with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select the characters You can create a name of up to 16 characters long It can contain any of the following characters 1 752 99 amp 011213141567 8 9 lt E 1 2 m pq ris tu 02 Getting Started Guide 60 Secondary Recording Tutorial 3 sLimi ter2 CHP Rttack 11ms 38 Total Come Release 165ms 39 Total 2 Ny Dyn WOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOG OO 23435 6783 9 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 E1 You can select the INS icon to insert a space blank at the current cursor position in the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The DEL icon is used to delete the character at the cursor position Note The COPY and PASTE icons allow you to select the title f
349. r Avid Technology Inc Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and TEAC are registered trademarks of TEAC Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective holders Package Contents Your 02R package contains the following items If you do not have them all please contact your Yamaha dealer 02R Console e This Owner s Manual contains Getting Started Guide and User s Guide Important Note About Project Manager Version 1 of Project Manager is not compatible with the 02R Version 2 and may cause data loss To obtain Version 2 of Project Manager contact Zeep in Canada at http www zeep com gt or tel 514 272 2224 or fax 514 272 2888 Alternatively contact your Yamaha dealer for additional information about archiving 02R Version 2 data Z2 E DIGITAL RECORDING CONSOLE ferror 2 Getting Started Guide e AD D 22 5 49 Contents i Contents 1 Introduction to the 02 1 auc 2 User Guides eher teh eK ee LEEREN 3 Installations daas e eet aate ace aate 3 Top and Rear 4 FeatuteSc Bate Groh tae 5 Key Eeat res or e tes Rs 7 2 Getting Started 4 oro 13 Basic Assumptions 14 Making the Connections
350. r Interface The 02R user interface is powerful but very intuitive There are two main methods of working with the 02R e Use the DISPLAY ACCESS controls to modify one parameter at a time across the entire recording console e Use the SELECTED CHANNEL controls to modify all of the parameters of the currently selected channel The DISPLAY ACCESS controls consist of a block of 24 function buttons divided into three groups CONFIGURATION MIXING and AUX plus the large backlit graphical display four cursor buttons a detented encoder wheel and the ENTER button There is also a related block of four SCENE MEMORY buttons to increment decrement store and recall the scene memories The SELECTED CHANNEL controls consist of four main blocks of controls each block was designed to be as familiar as the equivalent controls on a regular analog mixer but with the power of digital precision and instant recall The ROUTING block selects the bus onto which to route the current channel signal The AUX block selects the auxiliary buss to send the channel signal to and sets the send level The PAN block sets the pan position of the channel signal The EQ block sets the EQ curve for the Introduction to the O2R 9 current channel You can customize your 02R to automatically select the corresponding display pages when you adjust a control in these blocks Motorized Faders In addition to the DISPLAY ACCESS and SELECTED CHANNEL controls each
351. r control the 02R can be used to recall reverb programs To do this use the PGM parameter to select a reverb program When the RCL icon is pressed the corresponding reverb program is recalled on the ProR3 or REV500 and the 02R controls move to their new positions The TITLE and TYPE parameters do not change until the reverb program is recalled Then they display the reverb program s title and the type of the effect used The 02R fader positions correspond to parameter settings on the ProR3 or REV500 aa ETE prola ma POM TITLE TYPE CONNECT OT Revrime SI Diffuse 91 8 3s a re 8 1m ao E LowRatio lI Hg MIDI 179 When the 02R or ProR3 REV500 is first connected or turned on use the CONNECT function to update the 02R controls so that they match those of the ProR3 REV500 When the CONNECT function is used the settings from the ProR3 REV500 are copied to the 02R MIDI 5 5 MIC2 pemreg O00 TITLE CONNECT 1 3 Reverb i O ere p v SJ cirrus E err Luc 13 6 ams 4 E 2 Rev Time HPF pensity 147 0 es 60 mu as l 137 C LPF LiuENEss 057 8 1 50GHz a 1 4T co ratio 8J ER LeveL 12 evr 157 9 026 User s Guide 180 MIDI
352. r mixes Once in the digital realm there s little point converting back to analog The O2R features stereo digital outputs for direct mixdown to DAT and other digital recorders It uses the industry standards AES EBU or IEC958 Part 2 Consumer for its digital inputs and outputs With one of the optional digital I O cards installed in your 02R you can record direct to digital to your modular digital multitrack recorder Introduction to the O2R 11 02R Sonic Performance The 02R uses linear 20 bit 64 times oversampling analog to digital converters to provide a typical dynamic range of 105 dB This means that an audio program s dynamic range from low to high levels is processed intact The 02R samples audio at 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz It provides a full spectrum frequency response from 20 Hz to 20 kHz 1 3 dB For digital to analog conversion the 02R features 20 bit 8 times oversampling for its main stereo outputs including the control room monitor outputs and 18 bit 8 times oversampling for the studio and aux send outputs Oversampling and bitstream techniques effectively increase the internal sampling rate so side effects caused by steep low pass filters which are used to filter out undesirable sampling frequency components during conversion are virtually eliminated Consequently audio signal integrity is maintained from input through to output 02 Getting Started Guide Getting Started 13 Getting Started In this
353. r removed together Select a Enable group icon and turn it on or off by pressing the ENTER button When a group is off the LEDs of the channels flash You can change the channel status of any channel in the group Grouping Mutes The 02R also allows you to group channel status controls for multiple channel control using only one channel ON button The channels in a group can be on or off depending on their status when they were grouped Pressing a channel ON button toggles the status of all the channels in the group There are four groups available E F G and H Shown below is the GROUP 2 2 page Mute Group You can group the input channels MIC LINE 1 through 16 and LINE 17 18 through 23 24 and the tape and effect returns TAPE 1 through 16 EFF1 and EFF2 BOGUS EERO 2 Enable GIG E 6 S SI SISIG GIGI EIES 1 E E Qe 88 51151 81 51 51 51151 51 51 51 83 3 0 AH aR ES EVEN ENN EDEN ETC OR TE EN 2 alalalalalalalalalalalalalalalatalalalal 5 6 6 6 83 6 3 6 6 83 83 51 6 6 6 E 8 HHH The channels are listed in two main rows with the four group icons below each channel number On the right side of the page are the Enable group select icons You can change the sta
354. r several faders or channel ON buttons Adjacent channel pair function for stereo operation on inputs tape returns and auxiliary channels Dedicated buttons and controls of the Selected Channel module Large 320 x 240 pixel FL backlit user friendly graphical display RISC technology CPU SMPTE and MTC synchronization plus full MIDI implementation Options Digital I O cards e ADAT CD8 AT e TASCAM CD8 TDII e Yamaha CD8 Y e AES EBU double slot card CD8 AE e AES EBU single slot card CD8 AE S e Cascade Kit CD8 CS Analog I O cards e Analog I O double slot CD8 AD e Analog input single slot card CD8 AD S Automix 1 MB memory expansion ME4M Meter bridge 02 Wooden side panels W02SP Introduction to the O2R 7 Key Features This section looks at some of the key features of the 02R what they mean to you and some hints about how you can use them Dynamic Automix One of the most demanding jobs of the recording engineer is taking all the raw material produced during a multitrack recording session and mixing it all together into an artistically satisfying master recording The ability to setup portions of the mix and then have them playback automatically as you work on other portions is probably the most important feature of the O2R It has an on board automix system that memorizes fader positions switches individual channels on or off adjusts the EQ or pan positions and changes the auxiliar
355. ram As you scroll through the EQ programs the EQ curve for each program is displayed to the left of the list 5 Press the ENTER button 02 Getting Started Guide Introductory Recording Tutorial 31 The EQ program is recalled The EQ curve for MIC LINE 1 is set accordingly The EQ curve at the top of the display is updated Crunch 1 Crunch 2 Distortion 1 G 5 1 200 STORE EEE EXPV FAST OS EL QOOOOOOOYHELYOY 99 IB 11 12 13 14 15 16 Your sound source is modified by the program you recalled If the sound doesn t change check if you have left the EQ ON switch turned OFF on the EQ 1 2 page You can also quickly check if the LED inset in the EQ ON button of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls is illuminated or not 6 Use the EQ button to locate the EQ 1 2 page The EQ 1 2 page shows the updated EQ curve and exact settings of the EQ program recalled Undoing a Recall You can undo EQ program recalls by recalling the U EQ program which contains the previous EQ settings 1 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon and rotate the encoder wheel until program U is highlighted 2 Press the ENTER button The previous EQ settings are recalled 02 Getting Started Guide 32 Introductory Recording Tutorial Storing an EQ Program 1 Use the EQ button to locate the EQ 2 2 page shown below EQ TITLE EDIT 2sBass
356. rb This program will change a dry sound into a warm sound with spread Use the reverb Depth parameter to adjust the amount of reverberation Description Same as program 1 Description Same as program 1 Parameter Seiting Range Description Freq 4 5Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Modulation frequency Depth 1496 0 100 Modulation depth The amount of modulation Mod Dly 7 3ms 0 0 255 0ms Modulation delay The delay time before modulation begins Rev Time 1 7s 0 3 30 0s Reverb time Hi Ratio 0 8 0 1 1 0 High frequency decay ratio Diff 8 0 10 Reverb diffusion Ini Dly 30 0ms 0 1 200 0 5 Initial delay between the direct sound and early reflections LPF 12 0KHz 1 0kHz THRU Low pass filter cutoff frequency HPF 40Hz THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Depth 60 0 100 Reverb depth The amount of reverb O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 117 Program 16 FLANGE gt REVERB1 Flange effect followed by reverb This effect is more appropriate to emphasize modulation effects than the CHORUS REVERB program Use the reverb Depth parameter to adjust the amount of reverberation Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 2 4Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Flange modulation frequency Depth 68 0 100 Flange depth The amount of modulation FB Gain 37 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to the flanger Mod Dly 254 4ms 0 0 255 0ms Flange delay The delay time before modulati
357. re channel settings stored as programs There are 64 user programs plus an UNDO buffer for you to store your channel settings You can access the channel library from the VIEW 1 2 page by selecting the LIB icon with the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button Shown below is the VIEW 2 2 page TITLE EDIT 1 8 67 ot AE OH FM The Channel Library is overlaid on the VIEW 1 2 page The top of the display is a scrolling box containing the channel programs The bottom of the display contains the icons and the TITLE EDIT box Use the CURSOR buttons to select from the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY PASTE INS DEL and EXIT icons Selecting the EXIT icon and pressing the ENTER button switches back to the VIEW 1 2 page You can also just press the VIEW button again Icons e STORE This icon is used to store the current program to the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected program The box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the STORE operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the
358. re initially configured as shelving type EQs however they can also be configured as peaking type EQs The LOW band can also be configured as a HPF high pass filter and the HIGH band as a LPF low pass filter 1 Select the bandwidth Q icon for the LOW band using the CURSOR buttons 2 Use the encoder wheel to sweep through the bandwidth Alternatively you could use the EQUALIZER Q control The LOW band changes from low shelving to peaking to high pass filter as you continue to rotate the encoder wheel 3 As you rotate the encoder wheel counterclockwise it effectively increases the Q narrowing the bandwidth as shown on the EQ graph Anarrow curve is useful for boosting or cutting specific frequencies 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the bandwidth Q icon for the L MID band and adjust its position with the encoder wheel Select and adjust the bandwidth of the other bands You can also select the different bands using the LOW HPF L MID H MID and HIGH LPF buttons of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls Adjust the EQUALIZER Q control for each band The HIGH band changes from high shelving to peaking to low pass filter as you adjust its value Resetting the EQ Introductory Recording Tutorial 29 1 Press and hold the LOW HPF button and then press the HIGH LPF button of the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER controls All EQ values will be reset to their initial values LOW HPF L MI
359. recording mode can be set individually for each slot however and settings are stored in scene memories The following I O cards can be used with 24 bit Recording mode ADAT CD8 AT Tascam CD8 TDII Yamaha CD8 Y AES Single CD8 AE S and AES Double CD8 AE The following I O cards can be used with 24 bit Recording mode ADAT CD8 AT Tascam CD8 TDII Yamaha CD8 Y AES Single CD8 AE S and AES Double CD8 AE The input and output configurations for analog I O cards are not affected by the 24 bit Recording mode settings Digital I O Setup and Utilities 205 Shown below is the SCENE 5 5 page 24bit Recording Mode NORMAL MODE NORMAL MODE NORMAL MODE NORMAL MODE If you attempt to set 24bit MODE when the Input Please Confirm Patch for a slot is assigned one or more buses the E nsei 5 confirmation dialog box shown here appears Choose EXECUTE to cancel the Input Patching and activate 24bit MODE 02R User s Guide 206 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Use the SCENE MEMORY button to locate the SCENE 4 5 page SCENE MEMORY Use the CURSOR buttons to select an input icon and the ENTER button to select that input channel group You can also use the SEL buttons to select input channel groups Use the CURSOR buttons to select a signal source and the ENTER button to set it Input Patching The Input Patching function allows you to select the signal sources
360. ress the FLIP button Then the tape return channels can be operated by the faders The effect returns can only be adjusted with the rotary encoders You can also use the SEND LEVEL encoder in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls You must press the corresponding AUX 1 button to make certain you are adjusting the signal level for the correct aux send Note In order to adjust the aux send level with the SEND LEVEL encoder you must first select the send channel with the corresponding button of the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX controls 2 KEE M El N 2 gt CONTROL ROOM Secondary Recording Tutorial 45 Creating a Monitor Mix The 02R has two different monitoring outputs the control room outputs and the studio outputs plus of course the PHONES output which is a duplicate of the control room output During a multitrack recording session what you want to listen to in the control room is often very different from what the musicians need in the studio For example while recording a rhythm section the bass player and the drummer may want to hear the kick drum at a much higher volume than you need in the control room To cater to this requirement the 02R allows you to create a mono monitor mix using either AUX 5 or AUX stereo mix using both AUX 5 and AUX 6 Monitor Mix Process The process for creating the monitor mix is similar to the steps detailed in Setting the Aux
361. rformances such as electric pem rhythm guitar playing chords ttack ms j 16 E Guitar CMP Compressor 1 arpeggios Outgain dB 2 5 Knee 4 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 A variation on program 16 Ratio 1 25 intended for acoustic guitar playing rhythm chords or ttack ms i 17 A Guitar CMP Compressor arpeggios Outgain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Compressor for string Ratio 1 2 instruments This program was intended for violins Attack ms 33 18 Strings1 CMP Compressor Outgain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 12 Avariation on program 18 intended Ratio 1 15 for violas or cellos Attack ms 93 19 Strings2 CMP Compressor Outgain dB 1 5 Knee 4 Release ms 1 35 S Threshold dB 17 Avariation on program 18 intended Ratio 1 15 for string instruments with a very XE low range such as cellos or ttack ms 20 Strings3 CMP Compressor contrabass Outgain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 186 O2R User s Guide No 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Name BrassSection Syn Pad SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN Hip Comp Solo Vocal1 CMP CMP CPS CMP CPS CMP Type Compressor Compressor CompanderS Compressor Compressor CompanderS Compressor Parameter Value T
362. rom another dynamics program and paste it into your program for subsequent editing These icons only copy the title not the dynamics settings See Icons on page 88 of the User s Guide 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STORE icon Rotate the encoder wheel to select a dynamics program If you select one of the preset programs 1 to 40 the message Preset is read only appears when you attempt to store your program Select a program from the 88 user programs 41 to 128 You cannot store your settings to program U the UNDO buffer either 5 Press the ENTER button The 02R will display a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected dynamics program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during STORE operations See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information 02 Getting Started Guide Secondary Recording Tutorial 61 CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The dynamics program is stored Note Ifyou decide you do not like a dynamics program after you have stored it it is very easy to overwrite it by creating n
363. rrent program You can undo or redo the recall operation e CLEAR delete the data located in the currently selected AUTOMIX memory location You cannot undo the CLEAR function e A CLR delete all the data from all AUTOMIX memory locations You cannot undo the ALL CLEAR function UNDO This operation allows you to undo the following conditions updating the automix after recording has been stopped via the STOP transport function or due to the interrupted timecode recalling the data from the automix memory into the current mix creating a new mix or aborting the automix It returns the current automix to its previous state NEW Before you can record an automix session you must create a new automix This operation allows you to create a new mix As a default new mix the current scene memory the last scene memory to be stored or recalled will be inserted at timecode location 00 00 00 00 Later you can edit the timecode location using the AUTOMIX event edit operations Automix 151 1 Use AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 3 7 page AUTOMIX 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the MOTOR ON icon and press ENTER to change its value 3 Select the Fader Edit Out RETURN check box with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Rotate the encoder wheel to set a Time value 4 Select the desired Fader Edit Mode check box with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button 5 Use
364. rt CD players tape decks etc This function is intended for use with stereo sound sources That s why only the odd numbered channels 9 11 13 and 15 cause a MIDI Note on message to be transmitted Paired mono input channels 9 to 16 and the stereo channels 17 to 24 provide up to eight stereo pairs for use with Fader Start MIDI Note messages are transmitted on the Transmit Channel set on the MIDI 1 5 page MIDI Note On Messages are of the format 9n kk vv Where kk is the note number and vv is the velocity Chald Note Number Decimal Hex MIC9 37 25h MIC11 38 26h MIC13 39 27h MIC15 40 28h LINE17 18 41 29h LINE19 20 42 2Ah LINE21 22 43 2Bh LINE23 24 44 2Ch 026 User s Guide 164 MIDI Use the MIDI button to locate the MIDI 4 5 page MIDI Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Control Change column and the encoder wheel to select a Control Change Use the CURSOR buttons to select the parameter type channel type and channel number parameters and the encoder wheel to set them To initialize the assignments use the CURSOR buttons to select a mapping 02 03D and press the ENTER button confirmation dialog box appears By default CANCEL is selected Use the CURSOR buttons to select EXECUTE and press the ENTER button O2R User s Guide MIDI Control Change Assign The MIDI Control Assign page is used to assign 02R paramet
365. rter Without copyright information A D Conv with C A D Converter With copyright information Solid Memory Solid memory device Experimental Experimental device Unknown Unknown Note Ifyou monitor a signal in the IEC958 Part3 AES EBU Professional format which does not have a category code bit the Category column will show AES EBU Copy This shows the status of C bit Copyright information that has been implemented in only the IEC958 Part 2 Consumer format The following items will be shown Ok Copy allowed Prohibit Copy prohibited Note Ifyou monitor a signal in the IEC958 Part3 AES EBU Professional format which does not have a C bit the Copy column will show O2R User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 213 Battery Check 1 Use the UTILITY button This function allows you to check the status of the 02R s backup battery to locate the UTILITY 4 4 page Shown below is the UTILITY 4 4 page Battery Check UTILITY SHE Battery check SE Status Okay Yes l m Fine 2 2 If there is enough battery capacity the battery says Yes I m fine If the battery needs to be changed it says I m exhausted Replace me immediately as shown below Status Voltage low exhausted Rerlace me immediatelu SHE Communication Speed 8 2 E 1 2 Note If this message appears yo
366. s and events are resorted automatically In the Memory column event type and memory number can be edited In the Channel column the channel number for EQ dynamics effects and channel library events can be edited Mix scene events do not have a Channel value 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to move up or down the event list and the encoder wheel to edit values You can edit the following data Time Code the location of the event as a timecode value 02R sorts events by their timecode value e Memory the type of the event You can select from the following events SCENE scene memory recall The number indicates the scene number from 0 to 96 EQ Lib EO library recall The number indicates the EQ library number from 1 to 128 e DY Lib dynamics library recall The number indicates the dynamics library number from 1 to 128 02 Getting Started Guide 82 Mixing and Automix 02 Getting Started Guide EELib effect library recall The number indicates the effect library number from 1 to 128 e CH Lib channel library recall The number indicates the channel library number from 1 to 64 e Channel the channel that the recall applies to For scene memory recall this field is blank For timecode you can independently adjust the hours minutes seconds and frames values 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DUPLICATE icon and press the ENTER button to duplicate
367. s Guide 026 User s Guide Specifications 239 Specifications In this chapter General 240 Input 246 Output Specifications 247 Digital Input and Output Specifications 247 eee a E ev EH PS 248 teria ate eR tends 249 Troubleshooting dw b dare he ht SA 250 Error Messa fesen assin auc thu RE VERE aed 251 MIDI Data 262 Parameter Change and Request Format 265 Bulk Dump and Request 273 026 User s Guide 240 Specifications General Specifications Number of scene memories 96 E Internal 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Sampling frequency External 32 kHz 696 to 48 kHz 6 Signal delay Less than 2 5 ms MIC LINE input to STEREO output Fader resolution 10 to 90 e dB 128 steps 100 mm input faders to 120 dB 128 steps 100 mm stereo fader Total harmonic distortion THD Less then 0 2 20 Hz to 20 kHz analog output 14 dB into 6000 Frequency response 1 3 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz 4 dB into 6000 Dynamic range 110 dB typical D A Converter ST
368. s a delay of 0 to 59 0 ms and at 48 kHz itisa delay of 0 to 542 ms Delay can be applied to any of the input channels and the tape and effect return channels The stereo input channels are always ganged together The MIC LINE and TAPE channels are set independently only when they are not linked together in GANG mode with the PAN function Delay and Cascade If you use a digital cascade kit CD8 CS to connect more than four 02Rs together you will need to use the DELAY display function to apply delay to the machines closest to the output Set a delay value of 10 to 20 samples for each unit The digital cascade kit will automatically apply the correct amount of delay when you connect four or less 02Rs together See Cascade Configuration on page 191 of the User s Guide Delay Pages There are two pages to the DELAY 1 1 function The first page shown below contains the Delay controls for MIC LINE channels 1 to 24 and appears when one of these channels is selected Sme mSEC Sme msEC Sme1 s a Eg 5 o o o IP 8 8 5 e a En Em Em 15 8 8 B e a Bm a a Em i22 dies 6 6 Eg e a BM 24 O2R User s Guide MIXING Display Functions 35 The second page shown below contains the Delay controls for TAPE channels 1 to 16 and effects returns EFF 1 and EFF 2 and appears when one of these channels is selected 5 1 mSEC 5 1 mSEC 3
369. s a measurable amount of distortion By adding dither the correlation between the signal level and the quantization error is cancelled allowing the digital system to encode amplitudes smaller than the least significant bit If you change the word size as a signal passes from one digital system to another being able to add dither allows you to maintain a high quality signal Digital Signal Processor DSP A specialized circuit usually a chip that is designed to manipulate large quantities of data in real time YAMAHA has developed world renowned expertise in proprietary musical application specific digital signal processing Ducking Ducking is used to automatically reduce signal levels when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold It is used for voice over applications where for example level of background music is automatically reduced allowing an announcer to be heard clearly See Dynamics Processor Dynamic range The difference between the loudest maximum output level and quietest residual noise floor sounds produced in an audio system The dynamic range in a digital system is determined by the data resolution about 6dB per digital bit A 20 bit system has a theoretical dynamic range of 120 dB The 02R has a specified dynamic range of 105 dB Dynamics Library An area in 02R memory used to access and store dynamics settings stored as programs There are 40 preset programs 1 to 40 for you to recall an
370. s enabled when it is highlighted 02R User s Guide 160 MIDI Use the MIDI button to locate the MIDI 2 5 page MIDI Select a Program Change number with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to change the value of the corresponding Scene Memory number Press the ENTER button to enable or disable the current Scene Memory number When a memory is disabled appears beside the Program Change number Use the CURSOR buttons to select the TABLE RESET control icon and press the ENTER button Select the UNDO control icon using the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button O2R User s Guide Program Change Assign MIDI Program Change messages are used to recall scene memories Shown below is the MIDI 2 5 page MIDI Program Change Assign Won ww 42 42 50 5 The default Program Change Assign table consists of a mapping of Program Change numbers 1 through 96 to Scene Memories 1 through 96 Program Change numbers 98 through 127 are mapped to nothing Messages containing those Program Change numbers are ignored Program Change number 97 is mapped to Scene Memory 0 initial data A scene memory to Program Change assignment table is provided on page 255 TABLE RESET The TABLE RESET command sets the Program Change Assign table back to its default mapping UNDO The UNDO command restores the Program Change Assign table to its previous state Backup You
371. s filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU THRU 8 0kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency Rev Dly 18 0ms 0 1 85 0ms Delay between early reflections and reverb Rev Bal 50 0 100 Reverb balance The amount of reverb Program 2 REVERB HALL2 This is a variation of program 1 It emphasizes longer reverberation and spaciousness Parameter Rev Time Seiting Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Range Same as program 1 Program 3 REVERB ROOMI This simulates reverberation of a room with many reflective wall aspects It gives a live acoustic feel to drums Parameter Rev Time Seiting Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Range Same as program 1 Description Same as program 1 Description Same as program 1 O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 113 Program 4 REVERB ROOM2 This is a variation on program 3 Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly Density LPF HPF Rev Dly Rev Bal Same as program 1 Same as program 1 Program 5 REVERB STAGE This has a slightly brighter effect than the REVERB HALL programs Applying a small amount of this effect to an entire mix will create the feel of live acoustic environment Parameter Setting Range Description Rev Time Hi Ratio Diff Ini Dly
372. s the dynamics settings of the currently selected channel The top of the page contains the dynamics LIB icon the DYNAMICS icon the main control prompts KEY IN ST LINK and optionally IN the dynamics graph and the gain reduction meter plus a level meter for the currently selected channel pair The bottom of the page is split into two main sections The first section shows the channel KEY IN settings and LINK icons These settings can be changed using the CURSOR buttons the encoder wheel and ENTER button The second section contains the controls for adjusting the parameters for the currently selected channel There are rotary icons for the threshold ratio output gain attack release and so on depending on which dynamics program you have selected Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired icon and adjust its value with the encoder wheel Press the ENTER button to turn the dynamics processor on or off 02R User s Guide 84 Dynamics To turn the dynamics processor on use the CURSOR buttons to select the DYNAMICS icon and press the ENTER button The icon changes from OFF to ON and is highlighted Use the CURSOR buttons to select the KEY IN prompt and rotate the encoder wheel or press the ENTER button to select a trigger source Use the CURSOR buttons to select the ST LINK prompt and rotate the encoder wheel or press the ENTER button to turn the stereo link on or off If the stereo li
373. send levels Aux 1 8 on off e Aux 1 8 pre post e Delay on off e Delay parameters EQ parameters e Dynamics parameters e Fader group and mute group e Fade time e Recall safe e Solo on off e Surround CSR and subwoofer O2R User s Guide Groups and Pairs 185 The second PAIR page shown below contains pair hearts for the aux sends and bus outs SE Aux Pair SERE The following functions are linked when aux channels are paired e Input channel aux send level depends on input channel pan e Aux master levels e Aux master on off and pre post The following functions are linked when bus channels are paired Bus master levels e Dynamics parameters Use the CURSOR buttons to select a heart and press the ENTER button to make or break the pair Another method of pairing input channels is to press and hold the SEL buttons of both channels When the Make Pair dialog box appears select EXECUTE to pair the channels Which channel s settings are copied to the other channel depends on which SEL button you press first For example if you press the MIC 1 SEL button and then MIC 2 SEL button the settings of the MIC 1 channel are copied to the MIC 2 channel and vice versa The Make Pair dialog box shown below indicates in which direction the channels settings will be copied Please Confirm Make Pair CXMIC1 25 EXECUTE When a channel from a stereo pair is selected its SEL button indic
374. signature information for use with MIDI Clock Automix functions can be customized using the preferences on the SETUP 4 4 page See Preferences 2 on page 201 026 User s Guide 144 Automix Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 1 7 page AUTOMIX Select the INT Start Time with the CURSOR buttons and set the desired value by rotating the encoder wheel Use the CURSOR buttons to select the desired Frame rate check box and press the ENTER button Select a TC Input check box with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Automix ENABLE check box and press the ENTER button to change its value Select the Overwrite status check boxes with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button Use the CURSOR buttons to select the Edit Out END or RET check box and press the ENTER button to change its value Select a Fader Edit Mode check box with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button O2R User s Guide Automix Main Basic automix functions are controlled using the Automix Main page shown below EE Automix Main SW Time Code Free Size 00 00 00 00 Current 1k 479k 99 Undo Gk Offset INT Start Time 90 E 64 68 00 00 00 00 Time Reference E368 590 125 124 Esmere Rutomi x Overwri te O ENABLE OFADER OCH ON OEG O SURROUND Edit Out Fader
375. splays of the pre EQ post EQ post fader levels of all channel input are displayed on the screen Tape Input channel TAPE 1 through 16 option ANALOG ADAT TASCAM AES EBU YAMAHA Filter DC cut filter de emphasis Attenuator 0 to 96 dB 1 dB step 4 band parametric equalizer Parameters are the same as MIC LINE input equalizer Dynamics Parameters are the same as MIC LINE input dynamics Delay 0 to 2600 sample Phase NORMAL REVERSE ON OFF Fader Rotary encoder INPUT AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 Aux send Parameters are the same as MIC LINE input aux send Pan 33 positions L 16 to 1 C R 16 to 1 Routing BUS 1 through 8 ST Solo ON OFF Pre fader After pan Peakhold ON OFF Meter 12 points displays of the pre EQ post EQ post fader levels of all channel input are displayed on the screen Effect Return EFF 1 through 2 Attenuator 0 to 96 dB 1 dB step 4 band parametric Parameters are the same as MIC LINE input equalizer equalizer Delay 0 to 2600 sample Phase NORMAL REVERSE ON OFF Fader Rotary encoder INPUT AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 Parameters the same as MIC LINE input aux send EFF1 can only send to AUX8 EFF2 can only send to AUX7 Pan 33 positions L 16 to 1 C R 16 to 1 O2R User s Guide 244 Specifications Effect Return EFF
376. t Buffer are written to the selected scene memory The first time you adjust a parameter in the current mix settings the Edit Indicator of the SCENE MEMORY indicator on the display starts to flash This indicates that the current mix settings those in the Edit Buffer do not match those of the scene memory previously recalled Initial Data and UNDO Memory The 02R has two special scene memory locations Scene number 0 zero and scene number U are read only memory locations Scene number 0 Initial Data contains the initial mix settings for the 02R When you want to reset all the mixer settings to their initial values recall this scene memory Normally all channel faders move to the minimum position You can however set the Initial Data Nominal preference so that they move to the nominal position Aux and bus master faders move to the nominal 0 0 dB position regardless of this preference See Preferences on page 198 Scene number U is the UNDO memory It always contains a copy of the last scene memory Even if you have pressed the STORE button and confirmed the operation you can still recall the contents of the overwritten scene memory by recalling scene number U 02R User s Guide 130 Scene Memories 1 Use the increment or decrement buttons to select a scene memory C v SCENE MEMORY 2 Press the STORE button A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select
377. t AC outlet e Is the POWER switch ON No sound is produced e 5 the signal coming in from the external device e Is the input ON indicator lit e 5 the input fader raised e Is the stereo output ON indicator lit e 5 the stereo output fader raised e 15 the option board securely inserted e 5 the output bus assigned correctly 15 the word clock set correctly e 15 the output in the C R monitor section selected The volume level is very low e Are the PAD switch and GAIN volume control set correctly e Is the input fader raised e 15 the gain set too low the equalizer section e Are the threshold and ratio settings for the dynamics processor set correctly 15 the DIM key in the C R monitor section OFF Sound is distorted e Are the PAD switch and GAIN volume control set correctly e 15 the input fader raised too high e 15 the stereo output fader raised too high 5 the gain set too high in the equalizer section A pair of stereo channels does not sound in stereo 15 the pan setting correct Abnormal phase 15 the phase on the input device set correctly The volume level of certain channels goes up and down e Is the dynamics processor ducking set for those channels Scene data cannot be stored 5 memory protect ON e You cannot store scene data to Scene 0 MIDI data cannot be transmitted or received e Does the MIDI transmit channel match the receive channel 5 the switch for
378. t ENABLE check box and press the ENTER button The remainder of the screen contains icons for each of the input and return channels plus the stereo master fader Select an icon and press the ENTER button to safety a channel In order for the Fader Recall Safe function to have any effect you must store the scene memory see Storing Mix Scenes on page 130 of the User s Guide Restoring the Faders To restore the fader movements select the DISABLE option and press the ENTER button Reset the fader levels Then store the scene memory again see Storing Mix Scenes on page 130 of the User s Guide Note Ifyou DISABLE the fader recall safe or switch off the individual channels and then store the scene memory be aware that the current fader levels will be stored in the memory not the levels that were previously stored there 02R User s Guide 136 Scene Memories 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY button to locate the SCENE 3 5 page SCENE MEMORY 2 Select the individual channels with the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons Rotate the encoder wheel to set the fade time value 3 Press the STORE button Respond to the confirmation dialog box by selecting EXECUTE and pressing the ENTER button The scene memory is stored O2R User s Guide Fade Time The second method of protecting the system from sudden volume level changes is to set the fade time for each channel When the sc
379. t about 10 seconds the CLEAR operation will be automatically cancelled To clear the scene memory use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The scene memory is cleared O2R User s Guide Scene Memories 133 If you change your mind the cleared mix scene can be retrieved by recalling the Undo scene memory U 026 User s Guide 134 Scene Memories m SCENE MEMORY Protecting Scene Memories You can protect stored mix scenes against accidental overwriting using this Memory Protect function This is useful when you ve set up many mix scenes for repeated use or when inexperienced users operate 02R When the Memory Protect is checked mix settings cannot be stored using the STORE button Any scene memory data received as MIDI Bulk Dump is also ignored PASTE CLEAR Free 100 O Memory Protect Recalling Scene Memories Scene memories are recalled using the RECALL button They can also be recalled using MIDI Program Changes Note When you recall a scene memory all mix settings in the Edit Buffer current mix scene are overwritten You may want to store the Edit Buffer to an unused scene memory before recalling just in case Note When recalling mix scenes be aware that volume levels may change suddenly as channels are switched ON and faders moved The 02R has a feature that allows you to fade the levels as a scene mem
380. t is the Edit 129 Initial Data and UNDO 129 Storing Mix Scenes 2 2 2 1 130 Naming a Scene 131 Recalling Scene 134 Fader Recall cereos eret een 135 Fade Time eet este e eg 136 AUTO aud 137 What is the Automix Function 138 What is Timecode 140 Automix Function esd eee eh re ey d ed 143 Automix euer Leda ue LEE EL 144 Memory 148 Fader Edit eerie e eerte ie cte n etd 151 BventCOpy ee npe ug nene dh gia ett tee Rs 153 Event Edit 155 Event Edit CH ON PAN 156 MIDI RUE ERE QUEE DUC IER S NM E ARI ene 157 MIDI and the 02R ee ee eee 158 SOUP e erena ania eth hoa dea te de Rake uate UR ud eg 159 Program Change Assign 160 Bulk Dump Request 161 Fader Start i d cette re ee Dre wa tee ale are ale 163 MIDI Control Change 164 MIDI Remote eee ede d netu e 165 026 User s Guide vi Contents 12 13 14 15 Groups and Pairs
381. ter source points you can easily observe the effect of changing the EQ or channel fader levels on the signal Note Switching the meter source point for the input channels switches it for the tape and effect returns as well Switching it for the tape and effect return changes the input channels Optional Meter Bridge MBO02 YAMAHA MIC LINE TAPE If your 02R is equipped with the optional Meter Bridge MB02 the METER display function controls both the selection of the meter points for each channel as well as switching the Peak Hold function ON or OFF The levels displayed on the optional meter bridge will be identical to the levels shown on the METER pages 026 User s Guide MIXING Display Functions Use the VIEW button to locate the VIEW 1 2 page VIEW Select a channel by pressing one of the SEL buttons Use the CURSOR buttons to select an item Adjust the value of the item using the encoder wheel and or the ENTER button To set the EQ use the CURSOR buttons to select the EQ curve and press the ENTER button The 02R will switch to the EQ display function To set the dynamics select the dynamics curve with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The 02R will switch to the DYNAMICS display function O2R User s Guide View The VIEW display function allows you to see all the parameters of an individual channel at a
382. the Solo Safe channels and press the ENTER button to enable disable the selected channel SHE Solo SENE Status Listen BElRecordins OMixdown OPre Fader BAfter Pan Mode Solo Cue Dim Solo OLast Solo sede soa Tare Solo Safe ES ES ES E ED Ra ETE ES EE LE Mic Solo Safe ES ER E ED il LED Ec n e s E Line Solo Safe Eff Solo Safe eae zz eas Eres B Solo Functions Status This command determines which bus will be used when you press the SOLO button If you select Recording the Solo bus will be used If you select Mixdown the signals selected by the combination of the SOLO button and the ON buttons will be sent to the Stereo bus and all other channels will be off Listen This command is only functional in Recording Mode It selects the point the Solo monitoring signal will be taken from You can select Pre Fader or After Pan as the monitoring points In Mixdown Mode the signal is always taken from after the pan and this function is grayed out Mode This command controls which channels are added to the Solo If you select Mix Solo all channels that are selected ON will be added to output If you select Last Solo the channel that was last selected ON will be output If you only want to listen to one channel at a time in solo mode select Last Solo Solo Level This rotary icon controls the output le
383. the change the AUX LED of the FADER STATUS indicator illuminates The number indicator corresponding to the current AUX button in this case AUX 1 is also illuminated The faders automatically move from their channel level positions to the aux send level positions Note Avoid blocking the fader movements when the faders move to their aux send positions by placing objects on the 02 It is possible to damage the faders Although the faders have moved to the auxiliary send level positions the 02R remembers the channel signal levels 2 Select MIC LINE 1 using the SEL buttons or the CURSOR buttons Turn the aux send on by pressing the AUX 1 button and then the ON button in the AUX group of the SELECTED CHANNEL controls The default is for the send to be ON therefore this step is not usually required Note In order to change the aux send status from on to off you must first select the send channel with the corresponding button of the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX controls 3 To change the aux send from post to pre fader press the ENTER button The PRE icon becomes the POST icon and is highlighted when the signal is pre fader 02 Getting Started Guide 44 Secondary Recording Tutorial o m 2 m lt m 02 Getting Started Guide 4 Tochange the signal level adjust the fader for MIC LINE 1 until the desired value is obtained You can use the rotary encoders for the tape returns or p
384. the currently selected channel pair The middle of the page shows a scrolling list of dynamics programs The name of the dynamics program under the cursor is highlighted When the cursor is on the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY or PASTE icons the encoder wheel is used to scroll through the program list A small diagram of the dynamics graph of the highlighted program is shown to the right along with its vital statistics such as Attack Hold Decay and so forth Beside the list of dynamics programs is the TITLE EDIT field The CURSOR buttons are used to select the character and the encoder wheel is used to change its value The bottom of the page contains several icons Use the CURSOR buttons to select from the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY PASTE INS and DEL icons Exiting the Library Selecting the LIB icon and pressing the ENTER button switches back to the DYNAMICS 1 2 page You can also use the DYNAMICS button 02R User s Guide 88 Dynamics O2R User s Guide Icons STORE This icon is used to store the current program to the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02R to prevent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the STORE operat
385. the fader is moved to a position lower If the fader is moved to a position higher than the previously recorded position than the previously recorded position 9 When you have finished adjusting the fader press the SEL button again The O2R will return to AUTOMIX RECORD READY status 10 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the STOP icon and press the ENTER button You may find it faster and more convenient to stop the automix recording session by stopping the device that is providing the timecode The effect is the same as if you selected the STOP function on the 02R 11 Stop the device that is providing the timecode 02R Getting Started Guide AUTOMIX Mixing Automix 81 Off line Automix Editing Editing Scene and Library Recall Events The Event Edit Scene Lib page shown below allows you to duplicate and delete mix scene and library recall events and insert new events Timecode addresses can be captured on the fly and new events inserted at the captured points The Locate function provides a speedy way to locate events in a complex automix 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 5 7 page Initial Data RUTOMIH 57 Event Edit Scene Lib Selected 00 00 00 00 SCENE DUPLICATE DELETE Mix scene recall events and library program recall events are listed in the Time Code Memory and Channel columns Events can be moved by editing the timecode addresse
386. the item to be transmitted received Program Change Parameter Change turned on The fader movement is not consistent e Calibrate the faders See Fader Calibration on page 215 of the User s Guide O2R User s Guide Specifications 251 Error Messages Follow the corrective actions described below when the error messages are shown on the display Error Message 2TR D1 No Input Corrective Action Correct digital signal is not input to 2TR D1 C R monitoring is not available 2TR D2 Cascade Disabled 2TR D2 cannot be routed to STEREO BUS Incorrect word clock setting 2TR D2 No Input Correct digital signal is not input to 2TR D2 C R monitoring is not available 2TR D3 No Input Correct digital signal is not input to 2TR D3 C R monitoring is not available Automix Aborted Automix data was aborted You can undo the operation Automix Disabled Time code was input but automix is disabled Automix REC Ready Ready for recording automix Automix Recording Recording automix now Automix Running Automix is now running Automix Updated Automix has been updated You can undo the operation Byte Count Error Byte count for the received bulk data is not correct Can t assign 2TR D1 2TR D1 cannot be routed to line 17 18 The signal at 2TR D1 is syncing with the 02R or 2TR D1 has been selected in the C R mon itor section
387. the optional digital I O cards you can also have 8 channels of direct digital input Depending on configuration up to four cards can be inserted into the 02R The cards allow you to select from any of the currently used formats ADAT TDIF Yamaha or AES EBU The optional cards allow you to route up to 16 outputs directly to your modular digital multitrack recorder In addition you can insert a Digital Cascade card into one of the I O slots allowing you to connect multiple 02Rs together to create a larger digital mixing system Dynamic Automix with Total and Instant Recall The 02R is a fully dynamic automated mixing console all referenced to timecode Its onboard automix system memorizes not just the faders but a myriad of parameters Switch individual channels on or off adjust the EQ or the pan position change the auxiliary send and recall any scene memory automatically There are 96 internal scene memories which can store every digital mix parameter in a snapshot providing instant recall and reset Crystal Clarity and Unsurpassed Audio Quality The 02R features Yamaha s latest generation 32 bit proprietary audio DSP All of your mix data is processed internally with 32 bit precision Using the power of the latest generation effects processor chip it also has a startling range of effects available shimmering reverbs clean precise delays flanging and chorus and other effects are built into this mixer It also feat
388. the selected event The selected event can be duplicated or deleted using the DUPLICATE and DELETE icons When the Selected CH parameter is checked only events corresponding to the selected channel are listed useful for editing an automix consisting of many events 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DELETE icon and press ENTER to delete the selected event When the SYNC icon is pressed events occurring around the current timecode address are displayed The timecode counter below the SYNC icon displays the incoming timecode When the CAPTURE icon below that is pressed the current timecode address is captured and displayed in the window below Up to eight timecode addresses can be captured and they are stored when the 02R is turned off The parameter next to the CAPTURE icon is used to select the addresses When the LOCATE icon is pressed events occurring about the captured timecode address are displayed When the INSERT icon is pressed a new scene recall event is inserted at the captured timecode address The new event can be edited as required AUTOMIX Mixing and Automix 83 Editing Channel On Pan amp Fader events The Event Edit CH ON PAN FADER page shown below allows you edit channel on off pan and fader events and duplicate delete and insert new events Timecode addresses can be captured on the fly and new events inserted at the captured points The Locate function provides a speedy way to locate events i
389. tination channel can be selected from MIC 1 to 16 TAPE 1 to 16 LINE 17 to 23 or EFF 1 or 2 Move Merge The Move function allows you to move the selected parameters from the selected channels between the In Time and Out Time points to the Copy To point When the MOVE icon is pressed a confirmation dialog box appears When the Source is set to an automix memory instead of the current automix the Move function becomes the Merge function Trim Edit The Trim Edit function allows you to trim the fader and rotary encoder levels of the selected channels between the In Time and Out Time points The In parameter determines how long it takes to reach the specified trim level after the In Time The Out parameter determines how long it takes to return to the previous level before the Out Time In and Out parameters can be set from 0 0 to 10 0 seconds in 0 1 second steps Undo The Undo function can be used to undo Erase Trim Copy or Move Merge operations When the UNDO icon is pressed a confirmation dialog box appears Automix 155 1 Use the AUTOMIX button to locate the AUTOMIX 5 7 page AUTOMIX Use the CURSOR buttons to select an event to edit Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DUPLICATE icon and press ENTER to duplicate an event Use the CURSOR buttons to select the DELETE icon and press ENTER to delete an event Address Capture 1 With timecode running press the CAPTURE button To insert a
390. tion can be used to compensate for level increases caused by EQ boosting or dynamics processing Instead of using a GAIN control to reduce a boosted signal it s better to use the Attenuation function Although levels can be reduced using the GAIN controls this also reduces the level of the signal being fed to the A D converter which is not desired The Attenuation function comes after the A D converter so conversion performance is not affected The Attenuation functions of adjacent channels are not linked when those channels are configured as a stereo pair Likewise the Attenuation functions of odd and even channels 17 to 24 always work independently The effects returns and stereo output channels have only one Attenuation control each so the left and right signals of these channels are always controlled together Attenuation can also be set on the View 1 2 and EQ 1 2 pages However operation for input channels 17 to 24 and MIC or TAPE channels configured as stereo pairs is as follows since only one attenuation control is displayed on the View or EQ page the attenuation functions of each channel are linked to preserve their relative settings If the channel whose control cannot be seen reaches the minimum or maximum attenuation setting a message appears MIXING Display Functions 33 Phase amp Attenuation Pages There two pages to the ATT 1 1 function The first page shown below contains the Phase and Attenuation c
391. tion frequency AM Depth 8496 0 100 Amplitude modulation depth PM Depth 6 0 100 Pitch modulation depth LSF F 250Hz 32Hz 1 0kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSF G 2 12 to 12dB Low shelving filter gain 630Hz 160 2 8 2 Equalizer frequency EQG 1 12 to 12dB Equalizer signal gain HSF F 2 8KHz 1 0 10 0kHz High shelving filter frequency HSF G 1 12 to 12dB High shelving filter gain 026 User s Guide 124 Internal Effects Program 37 AUTO PAN This effect performs automatic panning across the stereo image Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 0 5Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Modulation frequency LR Depth 98 0 100 Left to right pan depth FR Depth 15 0 100 Front to rear pan depth LSF F 140Hz 32Hz 1 0kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSF G 4dB 12 to 12dB Low shelving filter gain Dir L 5R Pan direction Choose from L lt gt R L gt R L R Turn L or Turn R EQF 630Hz 160 2 8 2 Equalizer frequency EQG 3dB 12 to 12dB Equalizer signal gain HSF F 3 2kHz 1 0 10 0kHz High shelving filter frequency HSF G OdB 12 to 12dB High shelving filter gain Program 38 PHASING Stereo phaser This effect simulates old phase shifter effects Parameter Setting Range Description Freq 1 3Hz 0 1 40 0Hz Modulation frequency Depth 52 0 100 Modulation depth FB Gain 68 99 to 99 Feedback gain The amount of signal returned to th
392. tions 247 Stereo channel inputs 12 STEREO OUT ANALOG connectors 12 STEREO OUT DIGITAL connectors 13 Stereo width 37 ST LINK 72 STOP icon automix 147 Store Confirmation 198 Storing automixes 148 channel programs 48 dynamics programs 87 effects programs 109 EQ programs 55 scene memories 130 STUDIO buttons 29 STUDIO LEVEL control 30 STUDIO MONITOR OUT connectors 11 Subwoofer 66 Surround CSR Edit 201 Surround pan 2 2 mode 65 3 1 mode 66 34241 mode 66 about 64 CSR 73 linking channels 72 notes 73 output assignments 64 panning sounds freely 67 selecting modes 65 trajectory panning 69 Surround SWF Edit 202 Surround X Y Edit 201 T T B LEVEL control 30 TALKBACK buttons 30 Tascam I O card installation 234 TC Drop Warning OFF 199 Timecode WORD CLOCK connectors 13 about 140 Wordlength 193 counter 145 offset 145 X TIME CODE INPUT connectors 13 Titling XG tone generator 176 automixes 148 XLR inputs 12 channel programs 48 dynamics programs 87 effects programs 109 EQ programs 55 scene memories 131 TO HOST connector 13 Touch Sense Edit 201 Touch Sense Select 201 Trajectories surround pan 70 Transmit channel MIDI 159 Transmit Key Remote 199 Transport controls automix 147 Trimming events 153 Troubleshooting 250 Tx 02R Link Message 202 U Undo automix 146 automix recalls 150 channel program recalls 49 dynamics program recalls 89 effects program recalls 111 EQ program recalls 57 pr
393. to overwrite it by adjusting the mixer settings and storing them to the same location Conversely it is also very easy to accidentally overwrite a valued scene memory The 02R has a Memory Protect feature to help prevent this but this feature can interfere with your work plus it is very easy to turn off the protection See Protecting Scene Memories on page 134 of the User s Guide YOU SHOULD ALWAYS BE CAREFUL WHEN THE 02R DISPLAYS A CONFIRMATION DIALOG BOX Naming a Scene Memory Scene memories can be named before being stored or after In the latter case you must first recall the scene memory name it and then store it In this tutorial a scene memory that has already been stored is named 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY button to locate the SCENE 1 5 page shown below Binitial Data abedefshiikimno Parstuyvuxyzii ey 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons or encoder wheel to select the scene memory When you select a different scene memory the number displayed in the SCENE MEMORY LED indicator flashes 3 Press the RECALL button to recall the scene memory 4 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the TITLE EDIT box 02 Getting Started Guide 64 Secondary Recording Tutorial 5 Select the individual character positions with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select the characters You can create a name of up to 16 characters long It can contain any of the following charact
394. to select the RECALL icon then rotate the encoder wheel until the UNDO buffer is the current program and press the ENTER button The previous settings are restored Program Name Dynamics program names can be up to 16 characters in length and can contain any of the following characters 1 7 2 99 amp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt 1 A B C D E FIG YIZ kl m pq ris tu 026 User s Guide 90 Dynamics Preset Dynamics Program Parameters The Release Hold and Decay values shown in the following table are valid when the 02R is set at a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz No Name Type 1 A Dr BD CMP Compressor 2 A Dr BD EXP Expander 3 A Dr BD GAT Gate 4 A Dr BD CompanderH 5 A Dr SN CMP Compressor 6 A Dr SN Expander Parameter Value Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 9 Outgain dB 5 5 Knee 2 Release ms 58 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 1 Outgain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 70 Threshold dB 11 Range dB 53 Attack ms 0 Hold ms 1 93 Decay ms 400 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 Outgain dB 1 5 Width dB 7 Release ms 19
395. to store your own settings You can access this page from the EFFECT 2 3 page by selecting the LIB icon with the CURSOR buttons and pressing the ENTER button Shown below is the AUX 7 3 3 page EFFECT TYPE Si REVERB HALL EVERS HALL 1 C kta 23REVERB HALL 2 33REVERB ROOM 1 4sREUERB ROOM 2 SsREUERB STAGE The top of the page shows an effects curve or icon which changes depending on the selected effect and a level meter for the effects return channel The middle of the page shows a scrolling list of effects programs The name of the effects program under the cursor is highlighted When the cursor is on the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY or PASTE icons the encoder wheel is used to scroll through the program list Beside the list of effects programs is the EFFECT TYPE field and below that is the TITLE EDIT field The cursor buttons are used to select the characters in the title and the encoder wheel is used to change the value The bottom of the page contains several icons Use the cursor buttons to select from the STORE RECALL CLEAR COPY PASTE INS and DEL icons 026 User s Guide 110 Internal Effects Exiting the Library Selecting the LIB icon and pressing the ENTER button switches back to the EFFECT 2 3 page Icons STORE This icon is used to store the current program to the library Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the EN
396. tomix Memories Effect Library Programs Dynamics Library Programs EQ Library Programs Channel Library Programs System Setup Program Change Assign Table Use the MIDI button to locate the MIDI 1 5 page MIDI Use the CURSOR buttons to select the item you want to change and press the ENTER button MIDI 159 Setup The MIDI Setup page is used to configure basic 02R MIDI parameters such as MIDI transmit and receive channels OMNI on off and echo on off Shown below is the MIDI 1 5 page MIDI Setup Receive Transmit i Channel Channel Omni Bouk GH ewe Echo rs 14 75 6 Enable Parameter Cha 3 Control Receive Channel Use these parameters to set the Receive Channel and select whether the 02R will receive Program Change Parameter Change and Control Change messages When you change the MIDI Receive Channel the MIDI Transmit Channel is set automatically to the corresponding channel Transmit Channel Use these functions to set the Transmit Channel and select whether the 02R will transmit Program Change and Parameter Change messages OMNI Use this function to select whether the 02R will receive Program Change messages regardless of the Receive Channel setting This parameter is enabled when it is highlighted Echo Use this function to select whether the received Program Change messages are echoed from the MIDI IN to the MIDI OUT This parameter i
397. ton The program is cleared If you change your mind the cleared channel program can be retrieved by recalling the Undo channel program U e COPY This icon is used to copy the name of a library program Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The program name is copied into an edit buffer e PASTE This icon is used to paste a program name previously selected with the COPY operation into the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The program name is pasted from the edit buffer into the TITLE EDIT box for subsequent editing INS This icon is used to insert blank characters into the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button DEL This icon is used to delete characters from the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button UNDO Operation When the 02R stores or recalls a program the previous settings are always preserved in the UNDO buffer If you discover you have made a mistake you can always recall the UNDO buffer displayed as U in the scrolling list of programs Use the CURSOR buttons to select the RECALL icon then 02R User s Guide 50 MIXING Display Functions rotate the encoder wheel until the UNDO buffer is the current program and press
398. tus of the channels within a group by disabling the group by selecting the corresponding icon a group is enabled when its icon is highlighted and pressing the ENTER button The LEDs inset in the SEL buttons of the channels in the group will flash and they will be ungrouped temporarily allowing you to adjust the individual channel status of the group members Note A channel can only be assigned to one group If you attempt to assign a channel to more than one group the message Duplicate Grouping appears 02R User s Guide 184 Groups and Pairs Pairing Channels 1 Use the PAIR button tO Adjacent channels be paired for stereo operation This makes it easy to locate the PAIR 1 2 work with stereo signals because you only have to adjust one channel to page control both left and right signals The 02R allows you to pair MIC LINE channels TAPE channels aux sends or bus outs PAIR There are two pages to the PAIR function The first page shown below contains pair hearts for TAPE channels 1 to 16 and MIC LINE channels 1 to 2 Use the CURSOR buttons 16 to select a pair of channels and press the ENTER button to activate the pair 1 Press the PAIR button again to select the PAIR 2 2 page 2 Select a pair of aux sends or bus outs and press the ENTER button to activate the pair The following functions are linked when TAPE or MIC LINE channels are paired e Faders and encoders e Aux 1 8
399. tus of the scene memory is shown in the SCENE MEMORY LED beside the display When you select a new scene memory with the SCENE MEMORY increment or decrement buttons the number in the scene memory indicator flashes Use the RECALL button to load the selected scene memory into the current edit buffer When you first change a parameter in the recalled memory the Edit Indicator starts to flash To save your changes select a scene memory with the increment or decrement buttons and press the STORE button The 02R will request you confirm the action To display the number of the scene memory that was stored or recalled last press the scene memory increment and decrement buttons together O2R User s Guide Edit Indicator Scene Memories 129 What is Stored in a Scene Memory Virtually all 02R mix settings are stored a scene memory Settings that are not stored consist mainly of analog controls and switches They are 48V phantom switches A B input switches 20 dB pad switches GAIN controls T B LEVEL control STUDIO LEVEL control PHONES LEVEL control C R LEVEL control and the display CONTRAST control MIDI setup and assignment table data are also not stored in the scene memory What is the Edit Buffer The Edit Buffer is the current mix settings When a scene memory is recalled the mix settings of the selected scene memory are written to the Edit Buffer When a scene memory is stored the mix settings in the Edi
400. ues Q F and G with the adjacent rotary encoders Use the EQ ON button to turn the EQ on or off Note You can customize your 02R so that when you adjust any of the controls in this group the display switches to the EQ page See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide O2R User s Guide Mixing and Monitoring 25 Mixing and Monitoring In this chapter Analog Inputs ose RR eI ang agian 26 Ph ntom POWet e Rete E qu RE ME 26 Pad dud De oL rM 27 GAIN Controls E th RE AG 27 SEL Buttons yee e satel tah ais 27 ON BATONS Sted hs De Pate EHE ME 28 UM Bice Meta ge do e te os Ir Net sa Md 28 Analog Outputs sna aed eh hele eae ERES 29 Monitor Selector Switches 29 Monitor Level 30 026 User s Guide 26 Mixing and Monitoring Analog Inputs The 02R is equipped with 24 analog input connectors The first sixteen channels 1 through 16 are mono input channels designed for microphone to line level signal inputs The last eight channels 17 through 24 are stereo channels designed for line level signals only INPUT 23 INPUT 24 INPUT 21 INPUT 22 INPUT 19 INPUT 20
401. unt High XX block count Low 0 size Oyyyyyyy yy total size High Oyyyyyyy yy total size Low size 1 Ottttttt tt title1 DATA ttttttt tt title16 Oddddddd dsH Oddddddd dsL Automix Memory 1024x2bytes Oddddddd Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M 4 dSH deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Automix compact STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 FORMAT NO 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT H 00010000 10 Total 2078 1024 2 20 10 BYTE COUNT L 00011110 1E 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000001 41 0268 User s Guide Appendix MIDI 287 Automix compact 00110110 36 6 00110111 37 y DATA NAME 01100001 61 a Ommmmmmm mm mm 0 15 Automix 1 16 DATA Oddddddd dsH Automix Memory compact 1024 2 byte Oddddddd dsL Oddddddd deH Oddddddd deL CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee ee INVERT L M deL 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Automix Bulk Dump Request Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4C
402. ur important data in memory such as scene memories automix memories and libraries may be lost Ask your nearest Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Service Center to replace the battery as soon as possible 02 User s Guide 214 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Communication Speed 1 Use the UTILITY button The Communications Speed section of the UTILITY 4 4 page allows you to to locate the UTILITY 4 4 monitor the TO HOST port speed and is for use with computer software page such as Project Manager or Visualizer The controlling host computer automatically configures the communication speed so you don t have to worry about these settings Once communications between the 02R and UTILITY host computer have been established you can change the communication speed on the computer only and the check boxes on the UTILITY 4 4 page are grayed out The 1 speed is the default at 38 4 kbps 026 User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 215 1 Turn off the 02 2 Press and hold the left CURSOR button o 3 Turn the 02R back on confirmation dialog box appears 4 Select the EXECUTE icon by with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The 02R initializes itself When it has completed the initialization operation the SCENE 1 1 page appears 2 System Initialization This operation allows you to reset the 02R to its initial settings This operation deletes all scene
403. ures dynamics processors on all the inputs allowing you to compress limit or gate the signals giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility The 02 samples audio at 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz using its internal clock and can sample at any frequency from 28 kHz to 53 kHz when an external word clock is applied Introduction to the O2R 3 RISC Technology To provide powerful system control and full dynamic automix the 02R is driven by a RISC technology CPU With all this power and sonic quality the 02R will become the heart of your digital recording studio User Guides The 02R is supplied with an Owner s Manual that consists of two guides a Getting Started Guide and a User s Guide You should keep this manual handy for future reference Getting Started Guide The Getting Started Guide contains a simple description and a couple of tutorials about digital recording with the 02R to get you started It also has a tutorial on the automix system User s Guide The User s Guide explains each 02R function in full detail Use its table of contents to search for general topics and the index to search for specifics A glossary of related terms is also provided Where to Start If you are unfamiliar with the 02R you should start with the Getting Started Guide Read through the section and follow the steps outlined in the tutorials Refer to the User s Guide when you are more familiar with the 02R and just need the details o
404. vel of a return channel is shown by the corresponding icon at the bottom of the display SEL buttons These buttons select the individual channels When you press one of the SEL buttons the LED in the center of the button is illuminated ON buttons These buttons switch the selected channel ON or OFF When a channel is ON the LED in the center of the button is illuminated When you press the SOLO button engage the SOLO function these buttons are used to select the monitor channels The LEDs inset in the buttons are switched off Press the ON buttons to select channels to send to the SOLO bus When you press the SOLO button again cancel the SOLO function the prior channel status is restored and the appropriate LEDs are switched back on 02R User s Guide 10 Controls and Connections O2R User s Guide 31 32 FLIP button This button interchanges the functions of MIC LINE channels 1 to 16 and TAPE RETURN channels 1 to 16 This allows you to set the tape return levels with the Faders rather than the Tape Return controls Holding down the FLIP button for one second activates the MIDI Remote function See MIDI Remote on page 165 of the User s Guide Faders These 100mm motorized faders set the channel level for the corresponding channel The faders will position themselves automatically when a scene memory snapshot is recalled a number of faders are grouped or paired or an automix is played back Sc
405. vel sent to the Solo bus in Recording Mode In Mixdown Mode the signal is sent to the stereo bus and this icon is grayed out Cue Dim This rotary icon sets the level to which the cue outputs are dimmed when talkback is engaged O2R User s Guide Digital I O Setup and Utilities 197 e Solo Safe Tape Mic Line and Effects These functions disable solo On Off selection If you set a channel to Solo Safe while it was set to Solo ON the channel remains unconditionally ON in Mixdown Mode when you select Solo This function has no effect in Recording Mode How to use Solo 1 Press the SOLO button The LEDs inset in all the ON buttons start flashing 2 Press the ON buttons for the channels you want to solo The LED inset in the ON button you select is illuminated steadily If you selected Last Solo in the Status command only the last channel you select will be soloed 3 Press the SOLO button again to cancel the solo function 026 User s Guide 198 Digital I O Setup and Utilities 1 Use the SETUP button to locate the SETUP 3 4 or SETUP 4 4 page SETUP 2 Use the CURSOR buttons to select a preference 3 Enable or disable the preference by pressing the ENTER button Preferences The O2R is a very flexible mixer You can customize its behavior to suit your needs using the preferences which are divided into two pages SETUP 3 4 and SETUP 4 4 Shown below is the SETU
406. vent the confirmation dialog box appearing during the CLEAR operation See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the CLEAR operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the CLEAR operation will be automatically cancelled To clear the effects program use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The program is cleared If you change your mind the cleared effects program can be retrieved by recalling the Undo effects program U O2R User s Guide Internal Effects 111 e COPY This icon is used to copy the name of a library program Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons Use the encoder wheel to select a program and press the ENTER button The program name is copied into an edit buffer e PASTE This icon is used to paste a program name previously selected with the COPY operation into the TITLE EDIT box Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button The program name is pasted from the edit buffer into the TITLE EDIT box for subsequent editing INS This icon is used to insert blank characters into the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons and press the ENTER button e DEL This icon is used to delete characters from the TITLE EDIT box at the current cursor location Select the icon with the CURSOR buttons
407. x 02 Getting Started Guide What is 02R Automix There are three basic steps to making a multitrack recording Setup and initial tracks e Overdubbing e Mixdown Each step is vital in order to produce a satisfactory recording but the most difficult one for most engineers is the mixdown The musicians have finished their work They have played their instruments and sung their vocals All that raw material is stored on your multitrack recorder waiting to be turned into a perfect final mix To assist you with this difficult task the 02R has a fully featured on board automix system It memorizes fader position changes switches individual channels on or off adjusts the EQ or pan positions and changes the auxiliary sends all based on timecode It can also recall scene memories and programs from the EQ library effects library dynamics library and channel library This allows you to record an entire mixing session and then edit the individual channel settings in multiple passes until you have achieved perfection You can punch in to fine tune a specific parameter or you can use one of the event editors to adjust the timecode position of a channel setting or scene change You can easily create a mix that would be virtually impossible to achieve on a standard analog mixer Time Code Free Size 00 00 00 S Current 1k 479k 99 Undo ak Offset INT Start Time 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frames Time Reference E3
408. x0 PART ADI RD2 PAN RNO RND ADI 2 REU CHO STEREO 4114 0 0 0 0 REMOTE If you use this page to control an XG MIDI sequencer for example the Yamaha QY700 on the MIDI 1 5 page of the 02R disable the Program Change and Control Change parameters 02R User s Guide 178 MIDI O2R User s Guide ProR3 amp REV500 O2R controls can be used to remotely control the following parameters of a Yamaha ProR3 amp REV500 Parameters on the ProR3 or REV500 Faders MIC 1 16 Parameters 1 16 value 02R Controls Rotary encoders TAPE 1 16 Parameters 1 16 value Display functions Program recall REV500 Setup On the REV500 use the UTILITY button to locate the MIDI Channel page and set to the same MIDI Channel as that of the REV500 MIDI Remote page CH Press the UTILITY button again to locate the MIDI OUT ECHO BACK page and set to OFF The REV500 does not receive MIDI messages in Utility mode so press a PROGRAM button TYPE PRESET USER or to return to Program mode ProR3 Setup On the ProR3 use the UTILITY button to locate the MIDI Channel page and set to the same MIDI Channel as that of the ProR3 MIDI Remote page CH The ProR3 does not receive MIDI messages in Utility mode so press the PGM button to return to Program mode Apart from the number and type of parameters the ProR3 and REV500 remote pages are essentially the same As well as remote paramete
409. xiliaries 98 The AUX Buttons e ERA qe Ha wane the ted 99 Stereo Input 101 AUX ONT 22 chin chee te Ne ere bee wate es 101 AUX Pre Posta o tees es e ess 101 erret date o Rx EU UR Ue te te 102 026 User s Guide 98 Auxiliary Channels AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 Al EFF1 EFF2 c gt AUX 7 O2R User s Guide About the 02R Auxiliaries The 02R has eight auxiliary sends AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 and AUX 8 The auxiliary sends can be configured pre fader or post fader AUX 7 and AUX 8 are used to feed the internal effects processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 EFF 1 RTN and EFF 2 RTN are used to return the processed signals Refer to Internal Effects on page 103 of the User s Guide for further details The other auxiliary sends can be used to feed external effects processors foldback amplifiers or multitrack recording equipment When a send is used to feed an external effects processor the processed signal can be returned via one of the stereo input channels or an unused monophonic input channel There are two different ways to access the auxiliary send channels DISPLAY ACCESS AUX buttons These buttons access the AUX pages that set the auxil
410. y all the digital parameters of the mixer Settings that are not stored consist mainly of monitor controls analog controls and switches The 02R has 96 mix scene memory locations Each can be named for easy identification Shelving An EQ circuit that is used to cut and boost a signal above or below a specified frequency High and low band EOs are usually shelving type The 02R EQ can be configured as shelving or peaking Signal to Noise ratio S N The difference between the nominal signal level and the residual noise floor usually expressed in decibels System Exclusive A MIDI message that is used to transmit data between MIDI devices that is exclusive to those devices Bulk dump data can be sent from any device to a MIDI data filer Controller events are transmitted between 02Rs using System Exclusive messages See also Bulk Dump Talkback System A system that allows the engineer in the control room to talk to the musicians in the studio Timecode Timecode is a signal that contains a chronological record of the absolute time in a recording It is used for synchronizing different recorders It can be used for electronic editing Timecode was initially invented for the motion picture business as a method of synchronizing the pictures recorded in the frames of a camera to the sound recorded on tape recorder The 02R supports three types of timecode SMPTE timecode MTC MIDI timecode and Internal timecode White noise A rand
411. y is 32 KHz Threshold sets the level at which the gate closes cutting off the signal Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close For ducking trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate ducking and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter The trigger signal is determined using the KEY IN parameter Range controls the level to which the gate closes It can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely At a setting of 70 dB the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold At a setting of 30 dB the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through At a setting of 0 dB the gate has no effect When signals are gated abruptly the sudden cutoff can sound odd For ducking a setting of 70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff Ata setting of 30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB setting of 0 dB the duck has no effect Attack determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive sounds Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound backwards 02R User s Guide 82 Dynamics O2R User s Guide For ducking this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is duck
412. y sends all referenced to timecode It can also record and execute scene memory changes also referenced to timecode This allows you to perform an entire mixing session and then edit individual channel settings until you have achieved the perfect mix The 02R allows you to record a mixdown in real time and then edit the results either in real time or by using one of the event editors You can select single parameters of the mixer to edit for example just enable the faders for one pass as you create your mixdown Scene Memories The 02R has 96 internal scene memories each of which is a snapshot of all the digital settings of the mixer a mix scene Each can be named for easy identification They can be stored and later recalled instantly If you work on several projects at one time you can store the current mixer settings in a scene memory so when you return to that project you can start immediately from where you left off When you are working on a mixdown the ability to recall mixer scenes can speed the process and allows for accurate repetition of the various parts of the mix When you use the 02R for sound reinforcement applications the ability to recall mix scenes can make light work of night after night sound checks Storing the mixer settings to a scene memory is a simple matter of pressing the STORE button and confirming the request Note You can customize your 02R to perform the storage operation without confirmation S
413. you to select all channels or parameter in one go Please Confirm Select ONE ALL CALL 02R User s Guide 154 Automix O2R User s Guide The In Time and Out Time parameters are used to select the range of automix data for editing The Copy To parameter is used with the Copy and Move Merge function When the Source parameter is set to Current data from the current automix between the In Time and Out Time parameters can be copied or moved to a point specified using the Copy To parameter When Source is set to an automix from 1 to 16 data from another automix between the In Time and Out Time parameters can be copied to or merged with the current automix The following table shows how existing data at the source and destination are affected by these functions Function Data at Source Data at Destination Copy Remains Overwritten Move Deleted Overwritten Merge Remains Merged Erase The Erase function allows you to delete the selected parameters from the selected channels between the In Time and Out Time points When the ERASE icon is pressed a confirmation dialog box appears Copy The Copy function allows you to copy the selected parameters from the selected channels between the In Time and Out Time points When the COPY icon is pressed a confirmation dialog box appears When only one channel is selected as a source you can specify the destination channel using the channel parameter next to Copy To The des
414. you to select the title from another effects program and paste it into your program for subsequent editing These icons only copy the title not the effects settings See Icons on page 110 of the User s Guide 4 Use the CURSOR butions to select the STORE icon Rotate the encoder wheel to select an effects program If you select one of the preset programs 1 to 40 the message Preset is read only appears when you attempt to store your program Select a program from the 88 user programs 41 to 128 You cannot store your settings to program U the UNDO buffer either 5 Press the ENTER button The 02R displays a confirmation dialog box asking if you want to store your settings in the selected effects program The dialog box has two icons CANCEL and EXECUTE Note You can customize your 02K to prevent the dialog box appearing during STORE operations See Preferences on page 198 of the User s Guide for more information CANCEL is the default To cancel the STORE operation either press the ENTER button or wait about 10 seconds the STORE operation will be automatically cancelled To store your settings use the CURSOR buttons to select the EXECUTE icon and press the ENTER button The effects program is stored Note Ifyou decide you do not like an effects program after you have stored it it is very easy to overwrite it by creating new settings and storing them to the same locatio
415. your DA 88 modular digital multitrack recorder and then the 02 It is always important to observe the correct order for powering up equipment in a studio Start with the DA 88 and mastering recorders and the signal processors then the 02R and finally the monitoring amplifiers and other downstream gear 2 Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page Word Clock Select 6 48k If the card was installed properly the 02R should will identify it in the appropriate slot The TDIF 1 digital I O card CD8 TDII can be installed in any slot You should install the first two cards in SLOTI and SLOT2 in order to access the direct out lines Note Ifthe W CLK IN box is not showing a proper wordclock input no discrepancy between the input and selected wordclock frequencies check the BNC cable between the WORD SYNC OUT connector on the DA 88 and the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the 02R Check that the DA 88 is powered on 3 Use the CURSOR buttons to select the wordclock source Use the CURSOR buttons to select the W CLK IN box and press the ENTER button The current wordclock source is indicated by a highlighted icon See Word Clock Select on page 188 of the User s Guide for further details 02R User s Guide 236 Installing Options Peak Meter Bridge 02 The Peak Meter Bridge 02 allows you to quickly and easily check the levels of the input channels the tape and effect returns t
416. ystem Initialization 215 02R User s Guide Use the DIGITAL I O button to locate the DIGITAL I O 1 5 page DIGITAL 1 0 Note The 02R always recalls the last page visited even after you turn the power off and back on again Use the CURSOR buttons to select a wordclock source and press the ENTER button O2R User s Guide 188 Digital I O Setup and Utilities Word Clock Select The 02R processes audio data at 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz using its internal clock and can run at any frequency from 32 kHz 6 to 48 kHz 6 when an external wordclock is applied Wordclock When you connect a number of digital audio devices together all the devices should synchronize to one device the wordclock master The wordclock master generates a sync pulse which allows the other devices connected to it to determine where the start of each digital word is Although most digital interconnect protocols are self clocking it is more reliable to use a dedicated line for your wordclock signal This is especially important in a multitrack environment where up to eight channels of digital data may be multiplexed on one cable When you are using a digital device such as a DAT mastering recorder or a modular digital multitrack recorder connected to the 02R all the digital devices in the system including the 02R should synchronize the wordclock being supplied by one master device If any device do
417. z WORD CLOCK IN TTL 750 BNC WORD CLOCK OUT TTL 750 MIDI IN MIDI DIN Connector 5P MIDI OUT MIDI DIN Connector 5P MIDI THRU MIDI DIN Connector 5P TO HOST MiniDIN Connector 8P METER RS422 Dsub Connector 15p MTC IN MIDI DIN Connector 5P TC IN SMPTE Nominal 10 dBV 10kO RCA phono jack O2R User s Guide 248 Specifications Dimensions Specifications and external appearance are subject to change without notice For European Model Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 9A Conformed Environment E1 E2 E3 and E4 O2R User s Guide Specifications 249 Options AD DA I O Card Specifications Analog Input Input level Input Actual load For uss Mixer GAIN with nom 5 E 2 connections impedance Sensitivity 1 Nominal 3 connector inal before clip 4 6 dB 4 dB 24 dB 388mV 1 23 12 3mV INPUT 1 10 Bade ines Phone Jack through 8 40 20dBV 10dBV 10dBV_ TRS 100mV 816mV 3 16 1 is set to maximum gain All faders and level controls are maximum position 2 CH INPUT phone jacks are balanced Tip HOT Ring COLD Sleeve GND Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of 4 dB 1 23V or the nominal output level when the unit In these specifications when dB represents are specific voltage 0 dB is refer

user manual - Warehouse Sound Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents